Bosch Appliances Video Game Controller D9412GV2 User Manual
D9412GV2/D7412GV2  
Program Entry Guide  
EN Control Panels  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | Table of Contents  
EN | 3  
2.10.1 Keypad (Command Center) Assignment..... 51  
2.10.2 Area Text.......................................................... 57  
Table of Contents  
2.11  
User Interface.................................................. 60  
1.0  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
Introduction ......................................................5  
2.11.1 Commands....................................................... 60  
2.11.2 Keypad Selections .......................................... 60  
2.11.3 Access Control Functions.............................. 63  
2.11.4 Authority Level Selections ............................. 67  
2.11.5 Access Control Levels.................................... 76  
2.11.6 SIA Duress Passcode Options...................... 77  
Using this Program Entry Guide......................5  
Product Handlers...............................................6  
Guide to Programming Options.......................7  
Programming the Control Panel with the  
D5200 Programmer.........................................................7  
1.5  
Guide to UL 864 Programming  
Requirements.....................................................8  
2.12  
2.13  
Function List..................................................... 77  
Relay Parameters ........................................... 78  
2.0  
2.1  
2.2  
GV2MAIN..........................................................11  
Phone................................................................11  
Phone Parameters ..........................................12  
2.13.1 Area Relays ..................................................... 79  
2.13.2 Panel-Wide Relays ......................................... 81  
2.2.1 Special Point/User Reporting.........................14  
2.3 Routing..............................................................15  
3.0  
RADXUSR1/RADXUSR2 .............................. 84  
Pass Code or Token Worksheet................... 84  
3.1  
2.3.1 Called Party Disconnect .................................15  
2.3.2 Route Number Groups: Which Has the  
Highest Priority? ..............................................16  
2.3.3 Programming Primary and Backup  
Destinations......................................................16  
2.3.4 Enhanced Routing...........................................16  
2.3.5 Programming a Duplicate Report..................16  
2.3.6 Routing Destination Communication  
Failures .............................................................16  
2.3.7 Message Prioritization within a Route  
Number .............................................................16  
2.3.8 Dialing Attempts...............................................16  
3.1.1 User Groups..................................................... 84  
3.1.2 Pass Codes...................................................... 84  
3.1.3 User Group Window ....................................... 84  
3.1.4 User Name....................................................... 84  
3.1.5 Tokens and Cards........................................... 84  
3.1.6 Reporting and Logging................................... 85  
4.0  
4.1  
4.2  
RADXPNTS ..................................................... 88  
Point Index ....................................................... 88  
Point Responses............................................. 92  
4.2.1 Applications for Point Responses 9, D,  
and E:................................................................ 92  
4.2.2 Characteristics of a Fire Point:...................... 92  
2.4  
Enhanced Routing...........................................24  
4.3  
4.4  
5.0  
5.1  
Point Assignments..........................................102  
COMMAND 7 and COMMAND 9 ...........104  
RADXSKED...................................................106  
Windows.........................................................106  
2.4.1 Programming a Primary and Backup  
Destination........................................................24  
2.4.2 Programming a Duplicate Report..................24  
2.4.3 Numeric Pager Capability...............................25  
5.1.1 Opening and Closing....................................106  
5.1.2 User Group Windows ...................................113  
5.1.3 Holiday Indexes for User Group  
2.5  
2.6  
2.7  
Power Supervision...........................................28  
Printer Parameters ..........................................30  
RPS Parameters..............................................32  
Windows.........................................................115  
2.7.1 Uploading and Downloading Reports...........32  
2.7.2 Log Threshold Reports ...................................33  
2.7.3 RPS Callback Reports....................................33  
2.8  
2.9  
5.2  
5.3  
Skeds..............................................................115  
Holiday Indexes.............................................124  
5.3.1 Add/Change/Delete ......................................124  
5.3.2 View Holidays ................................................125  
Miscellaneous ..................................................35  
Area Parameters..............................................36  
6.0  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
GV2AUX.........................................................126  
Introduction ....................................................126  
RPS and D5200 Handler Requirements....126  
SDI Automation .............................................126  
SDI RPS Parameters....................................128  
2.9.1 Area Parameters..............................................36  
2.9.2 Programming Account Numbers in  
9000 Series Control Panels ...........................37  
2.9.3 Shared-Area Characteristics..........................41  
2.9.4 Bell Parameters ...............................................41  
2.9.5 Open/Close Options........................................43  
2.9.6 Arming Features ..............................................47  
6.4.1 User Interface Modifications for  
COMMAND 43...............................................128  
6.4.2 Using an External Modem ...........................130  
2.10  
Keypad (Command Center)...........................51  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | Table of Contents  
EN | 4  
6.5  
6.6  
Programming Path Numbers and IP  
Addresses for Enhanced Communications135  
SDI RPS/Enhanced Communications  
Configuration..................................................138  
Route Group Attempts..................................139  
Miscellaneous ................................................139  
Cross Point Parameters ...............................142  
RADXAXS......................................................144  
Door Profile.....................................................144  
Strike Profile...................................................147  
Event Profile...................................................148  
SIA CP-01 Quick Reference ......................150  
Table 13: Test Reports ............................................. 20  
Table 14: Diagnostic Reports .................................. 20  
Table 15: Relay Reports........................................... 21  
Table 16: Auto-Function Reports ............................ 21  
Table 17: RPS Reports............................................. 22  
Table 18: Point Reports............................................ 22  
Table 19: User Change Reports.............................. 23  
Table 20: Access Reports........................................ 23  
6.7  
6.8  
6.9  
7.0  
7.1  
7.2  
7.3  
8.0  
Table 21: Event Descriptions, Priorities, and  
Numbers.................................................... 27  
Table 22: Programming Four-Digit Account  
Numbers.................................................... 37  
Programming Prompts Directory ..........................151 Table 23: Programming Ten Digit Account  
Numbers.................................................... 37  
Table 24: Verify Time................................................ 39  
Figures  
Table 25: CF### Key Strokes.................................. 58  
Figure 1: Pager Display Fields.....................................26  
Table 26: CF### Custom Function Keystrokes .... 59  
Figure 2: Account Number Entry.................................37  
Table 27: Keypad Programming Choices.............. 60  
Figure 3: Softkey Locations on the D1260  
Table 28: Authority Level Selections ...................... 67  
Table 29: L## Secure Door-Door Mode  
Definitions ................................................. 71  
Table 30: BSFK User Code Report ........................ 85  
Keypad.......................................................58  
Figure 4: User Group 122 Example ............................85  
Figure 5: Example Opening Window Timeline  
(using two Opening Windows on  
Table 31: Bypassing a Point.................................... 99  
Table 32: P### BFSK/Relay Codes/Relays ........103  
Table 33: Point Text for Points 240 to 247 ..........104  
Table 34: Window Selections ................................106  
same day)................................................108  
Figure 6: COMMAND 43 Flow Chart ........................129  
igure 7: RPS IP Address Prompts.............................130  
Figure 8: Com Port Selection within  
HyperTerminal ........................................131  
Table 35: Programming for Two Same Day  
Opening Windows..................................109  
Table 36: Programming to Link Two Days over  
Midnight* .................................................109  
Table 37: Programming Example: Linking Two  
Figure 9: External Modem Connection.....................132  
Figure 10: Path # IP Add1 to Add4 ...........................135  
Figure 11: Poll Rate Timeline.....................................137  
Closing Windows over Midnight...........110  
Table 38: Opening and Closing Windows  
Tables  
Worksheet...............................................112  
Table 1:  
Differences between the D9412GV2  
and D7412GV2...........................................5  
Table 39: Opening and Closing Windows............112  
Table 40: Normal Store Hours* .............................112  
Table 41: Delivery Schedule* ................................113  
Table 42: Monthly Auditor’s Schedule* ................113  
Table 43: Cross Point Ranges Within Groups ....143  
Table 2:  
Table 3:  
Table 4:  
Table 5:  
Table 6:  
Literature Referenced................................5  
Product Handlers........................................6  
Programming Error Displays.....................7  
UL 864 Programming Requirements.......8  
UL 864 Programming  
Table 44: Effects of Programming on Custom  
Function Activation ................................145  
Table 45: Programming the Control Panels for  
Recommendations ...................................10  
Table 7:  
Table 8:  
Table 9:  
Modem IIIa2 Communication Format  
Data - User ID Numbers..........................13  
SIA CP--01 Compliance........................150  
Modem IIIa2 Communication Format  
Data – Point Numbers .............................13  
D6000 User IDs and Zones ....................14  
Table 10: Fire Reports...............................................18  
Table 11: Burglar Reports.........................................18  
Table 12: User Reports.............................................19  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 1.0 Introduction  
EN | 5  
Table 2: Literature Referenced  
1.0 Introduction  
1.1  
Using this Program Entry Guide  
Document Name  
Part Number  
This guide is only for programming the D9412GV2  
and D7412GV2 Control Panels.  
D1255 Installation Instructions  
74-06819-000  
74-06925-000  
D1256/D1257 Installation  
Instructions  
D1255RBD1256RBD1257RB  
Installation Instructions  
D1260 Installation Guide  
D1260 Owner’s Manual  
Although this guide specifically refers to the  
D9412GV2 Control Panels, it can be used for  
programming the D7412GV2 Control Panels.  
Differences between the D9412GV2 and D7412GV2  
are shown in Table 1.  
F01U011791  
48101  
50410  
Table 1: Differences between the D9412GV2  
and D7412GV2  
D5200 Programmer Operation  
Manual  
74-06176-000  
D6500 Report Directory  
74-04651-001  
4998122702  
Features  
D9412GV2 D7412GV  
2
Conettix D6600/6100  
Receiver/Gateway Program Entry  
Guide  
Conettix D6600/6100  
Receiver/Gateway Computer  
Interface Manual  
Access Control  
Expanded users  
Eight  
Two Doors  
Doors  
4998122703  
Passcodes  
Cards/tokens  
249  
996  
99  
396  
D720 Series Installation Guide  
74-06918-000  
32206  
Passcode-protected  
custom functions  
Number of printers  
Number of points  
Number of relays  
16  
4
D9210B Operation and  
Installation Guide  
D9210B Program Entry Guide  
D9210B Program Record Sheet  
3
1
32207  
246  
128  
75  
64  
32208  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Operation  
and Installation Guide  
F01U003641  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Program  
Record Sheet  
RPS Installation and Operation  
Guide  
F01U003635  
4998141259  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 1.0 Introduction  
EN | 6  
1.2  
Product Handlers  
Programming the 9000GV2 Series requires multiple product handlers. The availability of each handler is  
indicated in Table 3. Refer to the specific control panel’s release notes to determine the most current handler  
versions.  
Although the handlers shown in Table 3 can be used to program any of the new control panels, not all of the  
functions operate. For example, the RADXUSR1 Handler programs users 000 through 124. Even though the  
handler allows you to program users 100 through 124, the D7412GV2 does not allow the activation of these  
users.  
Table 3: Product Handlers  
Product  
Handler  
Compatible  
Versions  
Function  
D9412GV2 D7412GV2  
9
9
9
9
GV2MAIN  
V1.03 and above  
Covers Panel-Wide, Area, Keypad  
Function List, User Interface, and  
Relay programming modules.  
Covers passcode and token  
programming for users 000 through  
124  
RADXUSR1  
V1.06 and above  
(users 000 through 099 for the  
D7412GV2).  
9
9
9
9
RADXUSR2  
RADXPNTS  
RADXSKED  
GV2AUX  
V1.05 and above  
V1.08 and above  
V1.04 and above  
V1.03 and above  
Covers passcode and token  
programming for Users 125 through  
249.  
Covers Point Index and Point  
Assignment programming for all  
points.  
Covers Open/Close Windows, User  
Access Windows, Skeds, and Holiday  
Index programming modules.  
Covers SDI Automation, SDI RPS  
Parameters, Enhanced  
N/A  
9
9
9
Communication Parameters, Route  
Group Attempts, Miscellaneous, and  
Cross Point Parameters.  
9
9
RADXAXS  
V1.06 and above  
Covers the programming parameters  
for installed D9210B Door Controllers.  
The program entry guide and program  
record sheet for this handler come  
with the D9210B Access Control  
Module.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 1.0 Introduction  
EN | 7  
1.3  
Guide to Programming Options  
To acquire an update for your D5200  
Programmer, call the Bosch Security  
Systems, Inc. Handler Update System at  
(800) 657-4584. Make a separate phone  
call for each handler.  
This guide is set up in a specific order. Related  
program entries are grouped together in modules as  
they appear in the specific product handlers. The  
handler and the programming module are listed at the  
top of each page to help you find specific  
programming prompts.  
Use an analog telephone line with the  
D5200. The D5200 dials only pulses.  
This guide shows the programming options for each  
product handler. Each option is listed with:  
Refer to Section 10 Updating Handlers in  
the D5200 Programmer Operation Manual  
(P/N: 74-06176-000-B) for details on  
updating handlers.  
•
The Program Item Prompt: Each prompt is  
shown as it appears in the D5200 Programmer  
[refer to the D5200 Programmer Operation  
Manual.(P/N: 74-06176-000)] or the Remote  
Programming Software (RPS). Refer to the RPS  
Installation and Operation Guide (P/N:  
4998141259). For space considerations, some  
prompts must be abbreviated in the Programmer  
display. In these cases, the meaning of the  
prompt is explained below the prompt  
•
To connect the D5200 Programmer to the control  
panel:  
1. Close the reset switch, located in the upper  
right corner of the control panel and labeled  
S1 Reset, to place the D9412GV2 or  
D7412GV2 Control Panel in the standby  
mode.  
2. Connect the Molex® connector at one end of  
the cord to the connector labeled PROG on  
the PCB and PROG CONN on the faceplate.  
•
Program Entry Default Setting: Because  
defaults are set for the typical installation,  
programming each prompt might not be  
necessary. Review the default entries in the  
program record sheet shipped with the control  
panel to determine which prompts must be  
programmed.  
•
•
•
To retrieve the current control panel configuration,  
press the [RECV (COPY)] key on the D5200 at  
the NEWRECORD prompt. Refer to the D5200  
Programmer Operation Manual (P/N: 74-06176-  
000) for detailed information.  
•
•
Program Entry Selections: Only the selections  
listed can be used for a particular program item.  
To write new configuration information for the  
control panel, press the [SEND (LOAD)] key at  
the NEWRECORD prompt. Refer to the D5200  
Programmer Operation Manual (P/N: 74-06176-  
000) for detailed information.  
Program Entry Description: Describes the  
various entry selections. Read the descriptions  
carefully to avoid improperly programmed  
equipment.  
To disconnect the D5200:  
1. Disconnect the the Molex® connector.  
2. Open the reset switch.  
•
Custom Programming: Select custom  
programming (Yes or No) to expand  
programming modules within the D5200.  
Programming Custom as Yes allows parameters  
for special applications to be visible in the  
programmer.  
When the reset switch is opened, the  
control panel reboots and resumes  
normal operation within 5 to 25 sec.  
1.4  
Programming the Control Panel  
with the D5200 Programmer  
Table 4: Programming Error Displays  
Caution: Do not connect the D5200 to  
the PROG connector without closing the  
reset switch. Doing so causes SDI ##  
TROUBLE and CALL FOR SERVICE to  
display on the keypads. Door controllers  
also activate, depending upon the SDI  
failure DIP switch setting.  
Display  
INCOMPATIBLE  
PANEL  
Description  
You are connected to the  
wrong control panel or using  
the wrong handler. Check the  
faceplate for the model  
number and the handler title.  
CHECK  
CORD/RESET PIN  
Check the cord and the reset  
pin  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 1.0 Introduction  
EN | 8  
1.5  
Guide to UL 864 Programming Requirements  
This section identifies the programming requirements you must make in order to comply with UL 864  
Commercial Fire applications.  
NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AND OTHER  
INVOLVED PARTIES  
This product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the  
requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864,  
you must limit certain programming features or options to specific values. Refer to Table 5.  
Table 5: UL 864 Programming Requirements  
Product Feature/Option Permitted in  
UL 864? (Y/N)  
Possible Settings Settings Permitted in  
UL 864  
Refer to  
Page:  
If using two phone lines:  
Phone 1 through 4  
Yes  
24 characters  
Program a valid phone  
number  
11 to 12  
Phone Supervision  
Alarm On Fail  
Buzz On Fail  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
0 to 240 sec  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
10 to 200 sec  
Set to No  
Set to Yes  
14  
14  
15  
15  
Two Phone Lines  
Yes / No  
Set to Yes when using  
PSTN communications.  
Expand Test Report  
Fire Reports  
R# Fire Supervisory  
Missing  
Yes  
Yes/No  
Yes / No  
Yes/No  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
15  
Yes  
Required  
18  
18 (Table 10)  
Test Reports  
AC Fail Report  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
1 to 4  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Must have 1 to 4  
Must have 1 to 4  
Enter 61  
19  
20 (Table 14)  
20 (Table 14)  
20 (Table 14)  
20 (Table 14)  
20 (Table 14)  
25  
AC Restoral Report  
Battery Missing Report  
Low Battery Report  
Battery Restoral Report  
RG#1 Primary SDI  
RG#1 Backup SDI  
R# Service Start Report  
R# Service End Report  
R# Fire Walk St Report  
R# Fire Walk End Report Required  
R# Walk Test St Report Required  
R# Walk Test End Report Required  
RG #1 Primary Device  
RG #1 Backup Device  
AC Fail Time  
25  
Required  
Required  
Required  
22 (Table 18)  
22 (Table 18)  
22 (Table 18)  
22 (Table 18)  
22 (Table 18)  
22 (Table 18)  
25  
25  
28  
29  
30  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
1 to 4  
1 to 90  
10 to 300 sec  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
AC Fail Display  
AC Tag Along  
AC/Battery Buzz  
Bat Fail/Res Rpt  
10 to 200 sec  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
30  
30  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 1.0 Introduction  
EN | 9  
Table 5: UL 864 Programming Requirements (continued)  
Product Feature/Option Permitted in  
UL 864? (Y/N)  
Possible Settings Settings Permitted in  
Refer to  
Page:  
UL 864  
Area 1 Area On  
Required to  
send system  
status reports  
Yes / No  
Set to Yes  
36  
A# Delay Res  
Verify Time  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes / No  
Set to Yes  
60 sec  
38  
38  
42  
51  
54  
56  
65  
10 to 60 sec  
1 to 90 min  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Area # Fire Time  
CC# Supervised  
CC# Trouble Tone  
CC# Scroll Lock  
Remote Program  
5 min (check with AHJ)  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to P  
Disable /  
Enable  
Blank, E, or P  
A# Fire Bell  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
A,B,C, 1 to 128,  
Blank  
A,B,C, 1 to 128,  
Blank  
Program with a relay  
Program with a relay  
79  
79  
85  
86  
A# Reset Sensors  
U### Area # Auth  
U### Passcode  
1 to 8, Blank  
Program an Authority  
Level for the Fire Area  
3-, 4-, 5-, or 6-digit Must program at least  
passcode  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
one passcode  
Set to No  
Set to No  
Set to No  
P## Silent Bell  
P## Invisible Pt  
P## Local While  
Disarmed  
No  
No  
No  
94  
95  
97  
P## Local While Armed  
P## Disable Rst  
P## Bypassable  
P## Swinger Byps  
P## Fire Point  
P## Resettable  
Sked## Function Code  
Sked## Defer Test  
Sked## Hourly Test  
(Report?)  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Required  
No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
1 to 11, 13 to 28  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Set to No  
Set to No  
Set to No  
Set to No  
Set to Yes  
As required  
Sked Function Code 9  
Set to No  
98  
98  
99  
100  
101  
101  
116  
118  
118  
No  
Set to No  
Sked## Time  
Sked## Date  
Enter valid time 00:00 to 23:59  
00:00 to 23:59  
Set to No  
123  
123  
123  
123  
123  
123  
123  
123  
123  
124  
No  
mm/dd  
Sked## Sunday  
Sked## Monday  
Sked## Tuesday  
Sked## Wednesday  
Sked## Thursday  
Sked## Friday  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to Yes  
Set to No  
Sked## Saturday  
Sked## Xept On Holiday No  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 1.0 Introduction  
EN | 10  
Table 5: UL 864 Programming Requirements (continued)  
Product Feature/Option Permitted in  
UL 864? (Y/N)  
Possible Settings Settings Permitted in  
Refer to  
Page:  
UL 864  
For IP Communications to a D6600 Receiver  
Enhanced Comm  
Yes  
Yes / No  
Set to Yes  
135  
Path1 IP Add1 (2, 3 or 4) Yes  
000 to 255  
Program a valid IP  
address  
135 − 136  
Path 1 Poll Rate  
Path 1 Ack Wait  
Path 1 Retry Count  
9133 Supervision  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
0, 5 to 65535 sec  
0, 5 to 65535 sec  
0 to 255  
Program as necessary  
Program as necessary  
Program as necessary  
Set to Yes  
136  
137  
138  
139  
Yes / No  
The following programmable parameters are recommended by Bosch when installing a commercial fire alarm  
system. Always check with your local Authority Having Jurisdiction.  
Table 6: UL 864 Programming Recommendations  
Prompt  
Possible Settings  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Recommendation  
Phone Line Fail Report  
Phone Line Restoral Report  
Fire Walk Start Report  
Fire Walk End Report  
Cancel Report  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes / No  
CC# Scope  
Panel Wide, Account Wide, Area  
Wide, Custom, No Keypad  
Do not program No Keypad  
CC# EnhancCmdCtr  
CC# Menu Key Lock  
Reset Sensors  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Disable/Enable/Passcode Protect  
Set to Yes, if applicable  
If using D1256RB, set to No  
Enable  
Fire Test  
Disable / Enable / Passcode Protect Enable  
L## Reset Sensors  
Disable / Enable  
If Reset Sensor is set to Passcode  
Protect, set this to Enable  
L## Fire Test  
Disable / Enable  
If Fire Test is set to Passcode  
Protect, set this to Enable  
U### User Group  
P## Ring Til Rst  
Blank, 1 to 8  
Yes / No  
Program as blank  
May be required for Waterflow,  
otherwise No  
P## Cross Point  
D# Fire Unlock  
Yes / No  
Yes / No  
Set to No for Fire devices.  
No  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 11  
This is the telephone number the control panel dials  
to contact the central station receiver when sending  
event reports. This number is Phone 1 referred to in  
the prompts in Section 2.3 Routing on page 15.  
2.0 GV2MAIN  
Use GV2MAIN programming module to define the  
operating characteristics that affect panel-wide  
functions. This module has nine programming  
categories:  
The control panel is programmed with a 7-sec dial  
tone detect period. When a dial tone is detected or  
the waiting period ends, the control panel begins to  
dial. To extend the dial tone detect period, place a D  
before the phone number. To insert a pause during or  
after dialing, use C in the number sequence. For  
example, if the control panel hangs up before it hears  
the Modem IIIa2 ACK tone from the D6500 or D6600,  
program extra Cs after the phone number. The  
control panel waits on line for three extra seconds for  
each C programmed.  
•
Phone  
•
Phone Parameters  
Routing  
•
•
Enhanced Communications  
Area Parameters  
Keypad  
•
•
Enter up to 24 of the characters shown in the Phone  
1 table to define dialing characteristics.  
•
User Interface  
Function List  
Relay Parameters.  
Phone  
•
Using both phone-data entry lines: The  
first line of the phone number data entry  
line must be filled (twelve characters)  
before you press [ENTER] to move to the  
second line. If you enter characters on  
the second line, and the first line has less  
than twelve characters, the second line  
clears when you press [ENTER].  
•
2.1  
The control panel can dial as many as four different  
telephone numbers when sending event reports. All  
telephone numbers use the same receiver format.  
Refer to Section 2.3 Routing on page 15 for  
information about event report routing and  
communication protocols.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
Call Waiting Disable  
When using PSTN telephone lines,  
program two telephone numbers to  
meet UL 864 requirements.  
If the telephone system at the installation site uses  
the Call Waiting feature, ensure that the backup  
telephone reporting number is programmed to  
disable Call Waiting.  
Phone 1  
If you program the primary phone number with a  
sequence to temporarily disable Call Waiting  
(typically *70 pause, but verify with the phone service  
provider) followed by the phone number, you should  
program the backup phone number without the Call  
Waiting cancel sequence. If the subscriber cancels  
Call Waiting without notifying their alarm installing  
company, the control panel can still send reports  
using the backup number.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Up to 24 characters (do not enter  
[SPACE])  
0 to 9  
C
Numbers 0 through 9  
3-sec pause  
D
7-sec dial-tone detection  
# or *  
Used for the same purpose as  
pressing this key on a telephone  
keypad when manually dialing. For  
example, an asterisk (*) may be  
needed to access your long distance  
service. Do not use these characters  
when pulse dialing.  
Dialing a Call Waiting sequence on a  
non-Call Waiting line prevents the system  
from dialing the central station receiver  
successfully.  
Example: If the central station telephone  
number is 555-1234, and the backup  
Route Group destination is Phone 2,  
program Phone 2 with the following  
sequence: 70C5551234.  
Blank  
Control panel dials no phone number.  
Programming this item Blank does  
not disable phone routing. To disable  
reporting to this phone, refer to  
Section 2.3 Routing on page 15.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 12  
2.2  
Phone Parameters  
Phone 2  
The program items in this category describe panel-  
wide characteristics for telephone dialing, receiver  
format, and supervision.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Up to 24 characters (do not enter  
[SPACE])  
Modem Format  
Refer to the explanation of Phone 1. This number is  
Phone 2, referred to in the prompts in Section 2.3  
Routing.  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Modem IIIa2 Communication  
Phone 3  
Yes  
Format: Reports identify points as  
001 through 247 and pass-code User  
ID codes as 000 through 249 at the  
D6500 or D6600 Receiver (unless  
Point/User Flag is programmed Yes;  
refer to the Point/User Flag prompt  
in this section). When reporting point  
events, Modem IIIa2 Communication  
Format also sends point text to the  
D6500 or D6600 as programmed in  
Point Assignments.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Up to 24 characters (do not enter  
[SPACE])  
Refer to the explanation of Phone 1. This number is  
Phone 3, referred to in the prompts in Section  
Section 2.3 Routing.  
Phone 4  
Default:  
Blank  
No  
BFSK (2300 Hz or 1400 Hz  
acknowledgment tone).  
Selection:  
Up to 24 characters (do not enter  
[SPACE])  
Central Station Receiver Format for Transmission  
of Reports: Modem format provides many reporting  
advantages over the BFSK format. Refer to the  
D6500 Report Directory (P/N: 74-04651-001) for  
more information about the effect of reporting  
formats.  
Refer to the explanation of Phone 1. This number is  
Phone 4, referred to in the prompts in Section 2.3  
Routing.  
Modem Format must be set to Yes when  
sending events over a network to a  
D6600 Receiver.  
If Modem Format is No, assign a number  
to identify Duress Reports in BFSK  
Duress Code (page 15).  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 13  
Table 7: Modem IIIa2 Communication Format  
Data - User ID Numbers  
Point/User Flag  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Point/User Flag  
NO  
000  
Point/User Flag  
YES  
000  
Yes  
The control panel sends a flag with  
each report telling the D6500 or  
D6600 to convert point numbers and  
User ID numbers to COMEX format.  
Refer to Table 7 and Table 8 for  
conversion information. When this  
parameter is programmed Yes,  
points and User ID numbers are  
converted, regardless of the  
programming of the D6500 or D6600  
Receiver for output to the computer  
system. Refer to Appendix C in the  
Conettix D6600/D6100  
001 to 005  
006 to 013  
014 to 021  
022 to 029  
030 to 037  
038 to 045  
046 to 053  
054 to 061  
062 to 069  
070 to 249  
001 to 005  
601 to 608  
701 to 708  
801 to 808  
B01 to B08  
C01 to C08  
D01 to D08  
E01 to E08  
F01 to F08  
000  
Receiver/Gateway Computer  
Interface Manual (P/N: 4998122703).  
No  
The control panel does not send the  
flag. The D6500 or D6600 outputs  
point numbers as 001 to 247 (rather  
than 100 to 732) and User ID  
numbers as 000 to 249 (rather than  
000 to F08), as indicated in Table 7  
and Table 8.  
Table 8: Modem IIIa2 Communication Format  
Data – Point Numbers  
Point/User Flag  
NO  
Point/User Flag  
YES  
001 to 008  
009 to 024  
025 to 040  
041 to 056  
057 to 072  
073 to 088  
089 to 104  
105 to 120  
121 to 136  
153 to 168  
169 to 184  
185 to 200  
201 to 216  
217 to 232  
233 – 247  
100 to 800  
101 to 116  
201 to 216  
301 to 316  
401 to 416  
501 to 516  
601 to 616  
701 to 716  
801 to 816  
217 to 232  
317 to 332  
417 to 432  
517 to 532  
617 to 632  
717 to 731  
This program item determines how point and User ID  
numbers are presented at the D6500 or D6600  
display, printer, and computer RS-232 output.  
When Modem Format is Yes, the control panel  
sends expanded Bosch Modem IIIa2 Communication  
Format reports to the D6500 or D6600. If your central  
station data files are not set up for point and User ID  
number reporting, you can use this program item to  
convert these numbers to COMEX Reports.  
When Modem Format is Yes, the control panel  
sends expanded Bosch Modem IIIa2 Communication  
Format Reports to the receiver. Point/User Flag  
affects Bosch Modem IIIa2 Communication Format  
data as shown in Table 7. The Bosch Security  
Systems, Inc. D6500 or D6600 Receiver adds the  
leading zero in the User ID number with Point/User  
Flag programmed No.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 14  
2.2.1 Special Point/User Reporting  
Phone Supv Time  
Independent Zone Control Notice: When using  
Independent Zone Controls (IZC) to send  
Default:  
Blank  
Opening/Closing Reports by point, do not duplicate  
reporting independent point numbers with User ID  
Reports (refer to Section 3.1 Pass Code or Token  
Worksheet on page 84). For example: If an IZC is  
connected to Point 8, do not use User ID 8.  
Selection:  
Blank or 10 to 240  
No phone line supervision.  
Blank  
10 to 240  
Enter the number of seconds (in 10  
sec increments) you wish to wait  
before indicating trouble. After a  
faulted phone line restores, it takes  
the same amount of time to start  
restoral responses.  
D6000: Opening/Closing User ID numbers are  
identified at the receiver as ZONEs (same  
identification as independent points). Refer to Table  
9.  
Table 9: D6000 User IDs and Zones  
Phone line trouble responses: Keypads display  
SERVC PH LINE # to indicate which phone line  
failed. The keypad initiates a trouble tone if Buzz on  
Fail is Yes and CC Trouble Tone is Yes.  
User ID  
Number  
Zone  
User ID  
Number  
Zone  
With dual phone lines (using the D928 Module), the  
restored phone line handles all messages regardless  
of the phone line’s number.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
C
D
E
F
6
91  
92  
93  
04  
95  
96  
1
2
3
4
5
0
Phone, Trouble, and Restoral Events report when  
they occur. They report also when a Diagnostic  
Report is initiated from a keypad or by a Sked.  
7
To meet UL 864 requirements, set this  
parameter to a non-zero value.  
8
D6500 or D6600 Receiving BFSK Format:  
Opening/closing User ID numbers are identified at  
the receiver as ZN (same identification as  
Alarm On Fail  
independent points). The ZN numbers are based on  
the tens digit of the User ID number. This applies  
only for Users 000 through 099. Users 100 through  
249 do not report in BFSK format.  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Generate alarm responses when a  
phone line fails.  
DTMF Dialing  
No  
Phone failures report as trouble  
responses for Area 1 or the account  
number associated with Area 1.  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Dials the programmed phone  
number(s) using DTMF.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set this  
parameter to No.  
No  
Pulse dialing only.  
Use dual-tone multi-frequency (DTMF) to dial the  
central station receiver phone number(s) for event  
reports, or to dial the remote programming software  
(RPS).  
Phone Supv Time must be programmed  
to use this feature.  
Phone Failure Alarm Responses: The Alarm Bell  
relay for Area 1 activates. All Phone Event messages  
report as Area 1 and the account number for Area 1.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 15  
Expand Test Rpt  
Buzz on Fail  
Default:  
No  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
Off-normal events listed in Routing  
Group Test Reports are reported to  
the central station.  
Yes  
Generate panel-wide trouble tones  
and display PHONE FAIL # at  
keypads when a Phone Fail Event  
occurs.  
Off-normal conditions for the events  
listed in the Routing Group Test  
Reports at test time are not reported.  
No  
Does not generate trouble tones at  
keypads when a Phone Fail Event  
occurs. PHONE FAIL # still displays.  
Use this program item to add system event  
information to scheduled Test Reports. Refer to  
Section 5.2 Skeds on page 115.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set this  
parameter to Yes.  
This parameter relates to Sked Function  
Code 9 (Test Report) because it allows a  
Sked to send Expanded Test Report  
information. Expand Test Rpt does not  
affect Sked Function Codes 28  
Phone Supv Time must be programmed  
to use this feature.  
(Expanded Off-Normal Test Report) and  
29 (Non-Expanded Off-Normal Test  
Report).  
When Buzz on Fail is Yes, users can disable the  
resulting trouble tone on individual keypads by setting  
CC# Trouble Tone to No.  
2.3  
Routing  
Use routing to select full or partial groups of events  
that report to up to four different destinations. Routing  
includes choosing the most important destination  
(route number), reporting the events to a single or  
multiple destination, and selecting a backup  
destination if the events fail.  
Two Phone Lines  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
The D928 Dual Phone Line Module  
is installed. The LEDs on the D928  
light to indicate primary or secondary  
line trouble and COMM FAIL.  
2.3.1 Called Party Disconnect  
Telephone companies provide called party  
disconnect to allow the called party to terminate a  
call. The called party must go on hook (hang up) for a  
fixed interval before a dial tone is available for a new  
call. This interval varies with telephone company  
equipment. D9412GV2/D7412GV2 firmware allows  
for called party disconnect by adding a 35-sec on-  
hook interval to the dial-tone detect function. If the  
control panel does not detect a dial tone in 7 sec, it  
puts the phone line on hook for 35 sec to activate  
called party disconnect. The phone line goes off hook  
and begins a 7-sec dial tone detect. If no dial tone is  
detected, the control panel dials the number anyway.  
Each time the number is dialed, the control panel  
records this as an attempt. After ten attempts, the  
control panel enters communications failure and  
Comm Fail Route # appears on the keypads.  
No  
D928 Dual Phone Line Module is not  
installed.  
When using two telephone lines, set this  
parameter to Yes to meet UL 864  
requirements.  
Program Phone Supv Time when using  
two phone lines.  
BFSK Duress Code  
Default:  
0
Selection:  
0 to 9  
If Duress Enable in Area Parameters is Yes and  
Modem Format in Phone Parameters is No, you  
must program a number to identify Duress Reports at  
the central station.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 16  
2.3.2 Route Number Groups: Which Has the  
Highest Priority?  
2.3.6 Routing Destination Communication  
Failures  
To program a group, first choose a route number.  
The lower the route number, the higher priority that  
group has (for example, events reported for Route 1  
have a higher priority than Routes 2, 3, or 4 if each  
group tries to send a message at the same time). The  
priority of the route numbers becomes important  
when programming duplicate reports or choosing the  
events you want to report first regardless of the  
number of events that must report to multiple groups.  
Route 1 group primary device is the first destination  
the control panel attempts to dial if an event in that  
group must be reported. If the control panel is idle,  
any event generated for any group starts a dialing  
sequence.  
When the R# Primary Device fails to connect with  
the central station after one or two attempts (refer to  
RG# 1 Attempt in Route Group Attempts on page  
139), it then attempts to connect with the R# Backup  
Device (phone number or SDI Path). The central  
station receives the original event with a COMM FAIL  
PHONE# = (1, 2, 3, or 4) event modifier, if the R#  
Primary Device destination is a phone number.  
If the R# Primary Device is an SDI Path, the central  
station receives the original event with a COMM FAIL  
RG# SDI## (SDI 88 + Path 1, SDI 89 = Path 2,  
SDI 90 = Path 3, SDI 91 = Path 4) event modifier.  
When all attempts to both the R# Primary Device  
and R# Backup Device fail, a Comm Fail RG# Event  
is generated. Comm Restore Events are not  
generated.  
2.3.3 Programming Primary and Backup  
Destinations  
Each route number has an R# Primary Device and  
an R# Backup Device. In typical applications where  
two phone numbers are programmed, the R#  
Primary Device destination is the phone number that  
the route group attempts to dial first. If the R#  
Primary Device destination does not connect to the  
central station receiver after two dialing attempts, the  
control panel dials the R# Backup Device  
destination.  
2.3.7 Message Prioritization within a Route  
Number  
The D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Control Panels meet the  
digital reporting requirements for UL 864. Fire Alarm  
Events have the highest priority and reports are sent  
first for each group. Other events are sent in the  
following order: Panic, Duress, Medical, Intrusion  
Alarm, Supervisory, and all troubles and restorals.  
To comply with NFPA and UL 864 ,  
program Route 1 to send a report of only  
Fire Alarm Events to ensure the fastest  
reporting time.  
You can also program the control panel so that the  
R# Primary Device or the R# Backup Device uses  
an SDI device, such as a D4020 Network Interface  
Module.  
2.3.4 Enhanced Routing  
2.3.8 Dialing Attempts  
The D9412GV2 and D7412GV2 allow events to be  
sent to up to four additional SDI Paths. The network  
interface module (NIM) connects directly to the SDI  
Bus and occupies SDI Address 88. For additional  
information regarding the specific programming  
requirements for enhanced communications, refer to  
Section 2.4 Enhanced Routing on page 24 and  
Section 6.5 Programming Path Numbers and IP  
Addresses for Enhanced Communications on page  
135.  
The control panel makes up to ten dialing attempts  
using the primary and backup devices within a route  
group. If unsuccessful, it sends a Comm Fail Report.  
The dialing attempts occur in the following sequence:  
1. Primary device  
2. Primary device  
3. Backup device  
4. Backup device  
5. Primary device  
6. Backup device  
7. Primary device  
8. Backup device  
9. Primary device  
10. Backup device  
2.3.5 Programming a Duplicate Report  
Select Yes for each available route number to allow  
an event within a group to send a report to multiple  
groups. For instance, if fire alarms are programmed  
for Route Group 1 and Route Group 2, a fire alarm  
sends a report first to Route Group 1, followed by a  
duplicate report to Route Group 2.  
When only one destination is programmed, the  
control panel makes ten attempts to contact that  
destination. Each group takes approximately 10 min  
to go into Comm Fail.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 17  
Route #  
R# Backup Device  
Default:  
Blank  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 4  
1 to 4  
1
2
3
4
Phone 1 or SDI Path 1 is this  
group’s backup destination if the  
primary destination fails.  
1
2
3
4
First group sent  
Second group sent  
Third group sent  
Fourth group sent  
Phone 2 or SDI Path 2 is this  
group’s backup destination if the  
primary destination fails.  
Enter the number specifying the route group to  
program. The route represents the group you wish to  
send a group of reports. Group 1 is the first group to  
send a report and Group 4 is the last group to send a  
report. Each group has a primary and a backup  
device. The primary device is the first (most  
important) destination used to reach the programmed  
route within this group. The backup device is used if  
the primary device fails.  
Phone 3 or SDI Path 3 is this  
group’s backup destination if the  
primary destination fails.  
Phone 4 or SDI Path 4 is this  
group’s backup destination if the  
primary destination fails.  
To meet UL 864 requirements for  
Central Station and Remote Station  
applications, program a Backup  
Device.  
R# Primary Device  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Enter the number specifying the backup device. The  
backup device is used when the primary device fails  
to reach the programmed destination.  
Blank, 1 to 4  
1
2
3
4
Phone 1 or SDI Path 1 is this  
group’s primary destination.  
View Events?  
Phone 2 or SDI Path 2 is this  
group’s primary destination.  
Default:  
No  
Phone 3 or SDI Path 3 is this  
group’s primary destination.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
Access each routing group and  
program individual events for this  
route group only (D5200).  
Phone 4 or SDI Path 4 is this  
group’s primary destination.  
To meet UL 864 requirements for  
Central Station and Remote Station  
applications, program a Primary  
Device.  
Continue programming without  
viewing individual groups.  
The D5200 Programmer reveals the following sub-  
prompts. Leaving View Events? as No allows the  
user to ignore a large area of programming that might  
not need to be changed.  
Enter the number specifying the primary device.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 18  
Select Yes to send a report when the event occurs.  
To meet UL 864 requirements for  
Central Station and Remote Station  
applications, enable Fire Reports.  
Table 11: Burglar Reports  
Selecting Yes enables a report to be sent when the  
event occurs.  
Report  
R# Alarm  
R# Burg  
Restore  
Selections Report Description  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Burglar Alarm Event  
Non-fire restoral from  
trouble, missing, or  
supervisory  
Table 10: Fire Reports  
Report  
Selection  
s
Report Description  
R# Duress  
R# Missing  
Alarm  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Duress  
Missing Alarm point  
R# Fire Alarm Yes, No  
Fire Event  
R# Fire  
Restore  
(Alarm)  
R# Fire  
Missing  
R# Fire  
Trouble  
R# Fire  
Yes, No  
Fire restoral from  
alarm  
R# Usr Code  
Tmpr  
R# Trouble  
Rpt  
R# Missing  
Trbl  
R# Non Fire  
Suprv  
R# Pt Bus  
Fail  
R# Pt Bus  
Rstl  
R# Non Fire  
Cncl  
R# Alarm  
Restore  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
User code tamper  
Trouble Event  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Missing Fire point  
Fire trouble  
Missing Trouble  
Event  
Non-fire Supervision  
Event  
Fire supervision  
Supervis  
Point bus failure  
R# Fire  
Restore  
(T/M/S)  
R# Fire  
Cancel  
R# Fire Sup  
Miss  
R# Fire Supv  
Fire restoral from  
trouble, missing, or  
bypass  
Restoral of point bus  
after failure  
Canceled non-fire  
alarm  
Non-fire restoral from  
alarm  
Supervisory missing  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Canceled fire alarm  
Fire supervisory  
missing  
Restorals from Fire  
Supervision  
R# Sup  
Missing  
R# Unverified  
Evt  
Rest  
Unverified Events for  
Cross Points  
This event is not reported when using BFSK format.  
R# Unverified Evt is not reported when using BFSK  
format. Additionally, this event does not produce a  
corresponding Restoral event.  
R# Unverified Evt is sent when a single  
point programmed in Cross Point Group  
faults into an alarm condition, then  
restores before the Cross Point Time  
elapses.  
R# Unverified Evt encompasses both  
Fire and Non-fire points, but is not related  
to the A# Verify Time used for smoke  
detectors.  
The 9000GV2 Series control panels log a  
Ground Fault Event as Trouble Point 256.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 19  
Restoral Reports are not sent if the  
control panel resets after a point is  
bypassed and then unbypassed. This is  
true for both Fire and Non-fire points.  
To meet UL 864 requirements for  
Central Station and Remote Station  
applications, enable Test Reports.  
Sending Test Reports  
Automatic: To send a single Test Report (R# Test  
Report) automatically, enable Sked Function Code  
#9 (Test Report) in the Skeds section of the program.  
Refer to Table 13.  
Selecting Yes enables a report to be sent when the  
event occurs.  
Table 12: User Reports  
Manual: To send a single Test Report manually,  
enter [COMMAND][4][3] at the keypad. Refer to the  
Send Report prompt on page 63.  
Report  
Selection  
s
Report Description  
Point Bypass Event  
Forced Point Event  
Point Opening Event  
Point Closing Event  
Point Force Armed  
Fail to Open Event  
Fail to Close Event  
To expand this Test Report to include any off-normal  
point condition or other off-normal system conditions,  
Expand Test Rpt (refer to page 12) must be  
programmed Yes. Refer to the footnotes with Table  
14 on page 20 for a list of event types that are  
included in an expanded test report. Additionally, the  
expanded test report includes Summary Fire  
Supervisory, Summary Fire Fault, Summary  
Controlled Point Fault, and Summary Point Device  
Fault conditions.  
R# Point  
Bypass  
R# Forced  
Point  
R# Point  
Open  
R# Point  
Close  
R# Forced  
Arm  
R# Fail To  
Open  
R# Fail To  
Close  
R# Ext Clos  
Tm  
R# Opening  
Rpt  
R# Forced  
Close  
R# Closing  
Rpt  
R# FC Perim  
Inst  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
The control panel can generate an Expanded Off-  
Normal Test Report by using Sked Function Code 28  
or a Non-Expanded Off-Normal Test Report using  
Sked Function Code 29. To generate this event, one  
or more points must be in an off-normal state at the  
time the Sked executes. Expanded Off-Normal Test  
Reports include the Off Normal Test Report Event as  
well as a panel-wide summary of off-normal point and  
system conditions. Non-Expanded Off-Normal Test  
Report Events are sent only when a point is in the off-  
normal state but sends only the Off-Normal Test  
Report Event.  
Extend Close Time  
Event  
Opening Events  
Point Forced Close  
Event  
Closing Events  
Sending Status Reports  
Automatic: To send a Status Report automatically  
that includes the events shown in the footnotes in  
Table 13, enable Sked Function Code #10 in the  
Skeds section of the program.  
Forced Close  
Perimeter Instant  
Armed Event  
Forced Close  
Perimeter Delay  
Armed Event  
R# FC Perim  
Delay  
Yes, No  
Manual: To send a Status Report manually that  
includes the events shown in the footnotes in Table  
13, enter [COMMAND][4][2] at the keypad. Refer to  
the Send Report prompt on page 63.  
R# Perim Inst Yes, No  
Arm  
Perimeter Instant  
Armed Event  
Sending off-normal conditions as a Status Report  
following a Test Report is required by some  
automation systems. Sending off-normal conditions  
as a Non-status Report that follows a Test Report is  
required for other automation systems.  
R# Perim  
Delay Arm  
Yes, No  
Perimeter Delay  
Armed Event  
User text  
R# Send User Yes, No  
Text  
An off-normal condition is any point that is missing,  
trouble, supervisory, or in alarm. Also, points not  
cleared at the keypad report as off-normal.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 20  
Table 13: Test Reports  
Selecting Yes enables sending a report when the  
event occurs. If the off-normal state of the events  
indicated by footnote 1 in Table 14 on page 20 still  
exists, the events report when a Test Report is  
enabled and Expanded Test Rpt is programmed  
Yes. Refer to the Test Reports sub-prompt in  
Section 2.3.8 Dialing Attempts on page 16.  
Report  
Selection Report  
s
Description  
R# S: Alarm1  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Status Alarm  
Status Trouble  
Status Supervised  
R# S: Trouble1  
R# S:  
Supervised2  
Table 14: Diagnostic Reports  
R# Status  
Report  
Yes, No  
Status  
R# S: Open1  
R# S: Close1  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
R# Test Report Yes, No  
Status Open  
Status Close  
Test  
Status Perimeter  
Instant Arm  
Status Perimeter  
Delay Arm  
Status Fire  
Supervision  
Status Fire Alarm  
Report  
Status Fire Trouble  
Status Fire Missing  
Report  
Selection  
s
Report  
Description  
SDI device  
failure  
Restoral of SDI  
device failure  
Watchdog  
Reset Event  
Parameter  
checksum  
failure  
Reboot Event  
Failure of  
phone line  
Restoral of  
phone line  
after failure  
Failure of AC  
power to  
R# SDI Dev Fail1  
R# SDI Dev Restl  
Yes, No  
R# S: Perim  
Inst1  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
R# S: Perim  
Delay1  
R# Watchdog Rset Yes, No  
R# S: Fire  
Supv2  
R# ParaChksmFail  
Yes, No  
R# S: Fire  
Alarm3  
R# S: Fire Trbl2 Yes, No  
R# Reboot  
R# Ph Line Fail1  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
R# S: Msng  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Fire2  
R# S:  
Status Burg  
Missing Trouble  
Status Burg  
Missing Alarm  
Status Fire  
Supervision  
Missing  
R# Ph Line Rstl  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
MsngBurgTr2  
R# S:  
MsngBurgAl2  
R# AC Fail1, 2  
R# S:  
FireSpMsng2  
control panel  
R# AC Restorl 2  
Restoral of AC  
power to  
control panel  
after failure  
Battery Missing  
Detection  
Event  
R# S:  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Status Non-fire  
Supervision  
Missing  
Status Door Left  
Open  
SuperMsng2  
R# Batt Missing1, 2  
R# S:  
Yes, No  
DrLeftOpen2  
R# Battery Low1, 2  
R# Battery Rstl 2  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Low battery  
power  
Restoral of  
battery power  
to control panel  
after Missing or  
Low Event  
Failure to send  
report to  
1 Information about this condition is sent with a Status  
Report.  
2 Information about this condition is sent as S: Trouble  
Event with a Status Report.  
3 Information about this condition is sent as S: Alarm  
Event with a Status Report.  
R# Rt Comm Fail1,  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
3
specific route  
R# Rt Comm Rstl  
Restoral of  
communication  
to specific  
route after a  
failure  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 21  
When activating an on-board relay using  
Table 14: Diagnostic Reports (Continued)  
remote automation software, the  
D9412GV2 and D7412GV2 Control  
Panels log and print the resulting event  
as:  
Report  
Selections Report  
Description  
R# Checksum Fail Yes, No  
Checksum Fail  
Event  
Failure of  
network  
Restoral of  
network  
Relay 250 (Relay A)  
Relay 251 (Relay B)  
Relay 252 (Relay C)  
R# Network Fail4  
Yes, No  
R# Network Rest4  
Yes, No  
The following prompts support customized routing of  
Auto Function Reports. Selecting Yes enables a  
report to be sent when the event occurs.  
R# Network Cond4  
Yes, No  
Condition of  
network  
1 This event is included in the Expanded Test Report  
when an off-normal condition exists..  
Table 16: Auto-Function Reports  
2 To meet UL 864 requirements for Central Station and  
Remote Station applications, enable AC Fail, Battery  
Missing, Low Battery, Battery Restoral, and AC  
Restoral reports.  
Report  
R# Sked  
Executed  
R# Sked  
Changed  
R# Execute  
Fail  
Selections  
Yes, No  
Report Description  
Sked Executed  
Event  
Sked Changed  
Event  
Fail to Execute  
Event  
3 This event covers Comm Fail Route Group and Comm  
Fail Phone. If enabled, both events are sent; if disabled,  
neither event is sent  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
4 This event is reserved for future use.  
Enable Rt Comm Fail and Rt Comm  
Restore in only one route group.  
Selecting Yes enables sending a report when the  
RPS Passcode Event occurs.  
RPS Access Fail can indicate a wrong  
RPS passcode when communicating  
with the control panel or a valid RPS  
session terminated by a means other  
than a Good-bye or Reset-bye  
Selecting Yes enables sending a report when the  
event occurs.  
Table 15: Relay Reports  
command. Remote Reset indicates a  
Reset-bye command issued from RPS;  
Bad Call to RPS indicates the control  
panel called RPS but was unable to  
connect.  
Report  
Selections  
Report  
Description  
Sensor Reset  
Event  
R# Sensor  
Reset  
Yes, No  
R# Relay Set Yes, No  
Relay Set Event  
R# Relay  
Reset  
Yes, No  
Relay Reset Event  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 22  
Point Reports  
Table 17: RPS Reports  
Selecting Yes enables a report to be sent when the  
event occurs.  
Report  
Selections  
Report Description  
R# Log  
Threshold  
Yes, No  
Event log threshold  
reached  
Table 18: Point Reports  
R# Log  
Overflow  
R# Para  
Changed  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Log is full, old events  
are overwritten  
RPS Parameter  
Change Event  
Successful RPS  
Access Event  
Failed Access RPS  
Event  
Report  
Selections Report  
Description  
R# Service Start  
Yes, No  
Reorts Service  
Walk Test Start  
Event  
R# RPS OK Yes, No  
R# RPS Fail Yes, No  
R# Service End  
R# Fire Walk St  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Service Walk  
Test End Event  
Fire Walk Start  
Event  
R# Remote  
Reset  
Yes, No  
Remote Reset Event  
R# Fire Walk End Yes, No  
R# Walk Test St Yes, No  
Fire Walk End  
Event  
Walk Test Start  
Event for Walk  
Test and  
R# Program Yes, No  
OK  
R# Program Yes, No  
Fail  
Successful Local  
Programming Event  
Failed Local  
Programming Event  
Invisible Walk  
Test  
R# Walk Test End Yes, No  
Walk Test End  
Event for Walk  
Test and  
Invisible Walk  
Test  
R# Extra Point  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Extra Point  
Event  
Point Text  
R# Send Point  
Text  
R# RF Low Bat  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Low battery  
conditions for  
RF points  
Low battery  
restoral  
R# RF Low Bat  
Res  
conditions for  
RF points  
Point text is always transmitted when using  
network applications.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 23  
Selecting Yes enables a report to be sent when the  
Selecting Yes enables a report to be sent when the  
event occurs.  
event occurs.  
Table 19: User Change Reports  
Access Granted, No Entry, Request to  
Enter (RTE) and Request to Exit (REX)  
Events can be enabled or disabled by  
each D9210B.  
Report  
Selections Report  
Description  
R# Date  
Changed  
R# Time  
Changed  
R# Delete  
User  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Date Change Event  
Table 20: Access Reports  
Time Change Event  
Report  
Selections Report Description  
R# Access  
Granted  
Yes, No  
Access Granted  
Event  
No Entry Event  
Door Left Open  
Event  
Open Door Event  
Unlock Door Event  
Secure Door Event  
RTE or REX Event  
Locked Door Event  
Delete User Code  
Event  
R# No Entry Yes, No  
R# User Code Yes, No  
User Passcode Add  
or Change Event  
Start and end of  
area watch  
Card Assigned to  
User Event  
Access Control  
Level Change  
Event  
R# Door Lt  
Open  
R# Cycle  
Door  
R# Door  
Unlocked  
R# Door  
Secure  
R# Door  
Request  
R# Door  
Locked  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Chg  
R# Area  
Watch  
R# Card  
Assigned  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
R# Change  
Level  
With R# Delete User Events, the control panel  
always uses the account number from Area 1.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
Section 2.4 Enhanced Routing on page 24  
EN | 24  
2.4  
Enhanced Routing  
determines the route groups and which destinations  
within the route groups use network interface  
modules (NIMs) for reporting purposes. A single NIM  
can send events to as many as four different  
destinations.  
Enhanced routing allows the control panels to  
determine if events are routed over standard  
telephone lines or a local-area network (LAN) or  
wide-area network (WAN). Sending events over a  
LAN or WAN requires a network interface module  
(NIM), such as the DX4020 or the D9133TTL-E.  
For example, if you want to send events using Route  
Group 1 over a LAN or WAN as your primary  
destination, and you use a standard telephone line as  
your backup destination, program the following  
sections:  
Refer to Section 6.5 Programming Path  
Numbers and IP Addresses for  
Enhanced Communications on page  
135 for details on Enhanced  
Communications Route path  
programming.  
•
Routing (Section 2.3 Routing on page 15)  
1. Select Route Group 1  
2. Program a 1 for Primary Destination  
3. Program a 1 for Backup Destination  
4. Enable all applicable events to be included in  
Route Group 1.  
Enhanced routing also enables and disables the  
ability of the control panel to send events to a  
numeric pager.  
•
•
Phone (Section 2.1 Phone on page 11)  
1. Select Phone 1.  
2. Program Phone 1 with the applicable central  
station receiver phone number.  
If the installation does not require these  
applications, skip this section.  
With enhanced routing, whether you use standard  
telephone lines or a NIM, you can program the  
control panel to send full or partial groups of events  
to as many as four different destinations. Routing  
includes:  
Enhanced Routing (Section 2.4 Enhanced  
Routing on page 24)  
1. Enter Yes for RG1 Primary SDI (Tells the  
control panel to send the events to the  
network interface module (NIM) using IP  
Address 1)  
2. Enter No for RG1 Backup SDI (Tells the  
control panel to use the phone line to send  
events if the primary destination fails after  
one or two attempts)  
•
•
Choosing the most important destination  
Sending events to a single destination or to  
multiple destinations  
•
Selecting a backup destination if events fail.  
2.4.1 Programming a Primary and Backup  
Destination  
Because you are using an SDI Path to send events,  
you must also program the applicable items in  
Section 6.5 Programming Path Numbers and IP  
Addresses for Enhanced Communications on  
page 135.  
Each route number has an R# Primary Device and  
an R# Backup Device. With enhanced  
communications, the R# Primary Device destination  
can be either the phone number or the path number  
for the SDI device, to which the route group first  
attempts to send the event. If the R# Primary Device  
destination fails to connect to the central station  
receiver after one or two attempts (refer to RG# 1  
Attempt), the control panel attempts to connect with  
the R# Backup Device destination.  
2.4.2 Programming a Duplicate Report  
To send an event within a group to multiple groups,  
program the event as Yes for each route number  
available. For example, programming fire alarms for  
Route Group 1 and Route Group 2 sends a fire alarm  
report first to Route Group 1, followed by a duplicate  
report to Route Group 2.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 25  
UL 864 Enhanced Communication Path  
Report Prioritization:  
The poll rate entry for the backup SDI  
path might need to increase because of  
heavy traffic on the network or  
excessive signals generated at the  
same time. All Comm prompts must be  
set to No.  
To ensure that high priority events such  
as Fire Alarms are reported before any  
other queued event reports, use Route  
Groups 1 and 2. The lower numbered  
route groups are higher priority than the  
higher numbered route groups. For  
example, the following route groups are  
listed from highest priority to lowest  
priority: RG1 RG2 RG3 RG4.  
RG# Primary Pager  
Default:  
Selection:  
No  
Yes or No  
This parameter determines if this route group sends  
events to a numeric pager. To send events to a  
numeric pager, a phone number must also be  
programmed in the route group’s primary destination.  
UL 864 Enhanced Communication Path  
Supervision:  
To detect and locally annunciate a break  
in an Enhanced Communication Path in  
less than 200 sec, program no more than  
two Enhanced Communication Paths in  
no more than two Route Groups. Use the  
following settings for both Enhanced  
Communication Paths:  
If programming the control panel to dial a  
numeric pager, choose its route group  
carefully. Place events being sent to a  
central station in a route group class with  
a lower number than the numbers of the  
events in the route group for the numeric  
pager.  
Path # Poll Rate: 75 sec  
Path # ACK Wait: 13 sec  
Path # Retry Count: 5  
2.4.3 Numeric Pager Capability  
The D9412GV2 and D7412GV2 Control Panels can  
send most events to a numeric pager. Any time an  
event is generated and routed to a numeric pager,  
the control panel calls the numeric pager once for  
each message in the queue. To enable the pager,  
program the primary phone number and the backup  
phone number to the numeric pager’s phone number  
in any of the four route groups. Then select which  
events to route to the numeric pager within the  
selected route group.  
If the External Modem feature is used,  
RG# Primary SDI and RG# Backup  
SDI must be set to No. The control  
panel supports either enhanced  
communication or external modem, but  
not both at the same time.  
RG# Primary SDI  
Default:  
No  
Up to four event fields can be shown in the pager  
message. Refer to Figure 1.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
This parameter determines if the primary destination  
for Route Group 1 (2, 3, or 4) is sent to the NIM  
RG# Backup SDI  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
This parameter determines if the backup destination  
for Route Group 1 (2, 3, or 4) is sent to the NIM.  
To completely disable Enhanced  
Routing over an SDI path, RG# Primary  
SDI,  
RG# Backup SDI, and Enhanced  
Comm prompts must be set to No.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 26  
A user might not want all four fields to show in the  
Figure 1: Pager Display Fields  
pager message. Entering “*” characters in the phone  
number allows the user to select the number of fields  
to show in the pager message. To limit the number of  
fields shown in the pager message, enter the  
appropriate number of “*” characters in the phone  
number as shown below:  
[1234-001-011-008]  
1
2 3 4  
•
•
•
•
•
Zero “*” characters in phone number: Shows  
all four fields.  
1 - Account number (1234)  
2 - Event policy (001)  
3 - Event number (011, Fire Alarm Event)  
4 - User number, point number, or relay number  
(008)  
One “*” character in phone number: Shows  
first field only.  
Two “*” characters in phone number: Shows  
first two fields.  
Three “*” characters in phone number: Shows  
first three fields.  
The account number must contain four  
numeric digits. No alpha characters (B to  
F) are allowed when using the numeric  
pager.  
Four or more “*” characters in phone number:  
Shows all four fields.  
Programming the Pager Phone Number  
For example, the phone number 2773074***CC  
(seven digit pager phone number followed by three  
asterisks and two pauses) produces the following  
pager display: [1234-001-011] (three fields display at  
the pager).  
To program the pager phone number, enter the  
number used to reach the pager, followed by pauses.  
Entering C creates a 3-sec pause (example:  
5552341CCC.)  
Table 21 shows the description of each event, its  
priority, and event number.  
Experiment with the number of pauses you add after  
the page phone number. Each pause equals 3 sec.  
Try calling the pager yourself first and listening to the  
length of time it takes to get a beep allowing you to  
enter touch-tone information. This length is what you  
must program after the pager’s phone number in  
Section 2.1 Phone on page 11 If you need a longer  
pause, enter D after the number. Each D equals  
7 sec.  
Using “#” characters in the phone number affects the  
event’s display on the pager:  
•
•
•
No “#” characters in phone number: Dashes  
appear in the display [1234-001-011-008].  
One “#” character in phone number: Dashes  
are replaced by zeros [1234000100110008].  
Two or more “#” characters in phone number:  
Dashes appear in the display [1234-001-011-  
008].  
For example, if the phone number 2773074#CC  
(seven-digit pager phone number followed by “#” and  
two pauses) is programmed, the pager message  
appears as follows: [1234000100110008] (dashes  
are replaced by zeros).  
If the “#” is not placed in the phone number, the  
message appears as follows: [1234-001-011-008]  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 27  
Table 21: Event Descriptions, Priorities, and  
Numbers (Continued)  
Table 21: Event Descriptions, Priorities, and  
Numbers  
Event  
Priorit  
y
Event  
Priorit  
y
Event  
Event  
Number  
Event Description  
Number  
084  
085  
088  
089  
n/a  
Event Description  
Forced Close Perim Instant  
Forced Close Perim Delay  
Perimeter Instant Armed  
Perimeter Delay Armed  
Send User Text  
007  
007  
008  
008  
n/a  
Fire Alarm  
001  
005  
011  
014  
Fire Restoral (after Alarm,  
Supervision)  
Fire Missing  
005  
005  
005  
005  
013  
012  
124  
015  
Fire Trouble  
Fire Supervision  
S: Alarm  
n/a  
n/a  
Fire Restoral (after Tbl, Msg,  
Bypass)  
S: Trouble  
n/a  
n/a  
S: Supervision  
n/a  
n/a  
Fire Cancel  
004  
005  
005  
003  
006  
002  
006  
008  
006  
008  
006  
006  
006  
004  
006  
008  
006  
007  
007  
008  
008  
007  
008  
008  
008  
008  
007  
008  
027  
146  
123  
016  
018  
004  
019  
055  
017  
020  
078  
024  
091  
045  
026  
147  
169  
007  
008  
021  
022  
034  
040  
041  
044  
047  
048  
050  
Status Report  
008  
n/a  
035  
n/a  
Fire Supervision Missing  
Fire Supervision Restore  
Alarm Report  
S: Open  
S: Close  
n/a  
n/a  
Test Report  
008  
n/a  
051  
n/a  
Burg Restore  
S: Perimeter Instant  
S: Perimeter Delay  
S: Fire Supervision  
S: Fire Alarm  
Duress  
n/a  
n/a  
Missing Alarm  
n/a  
n/a  
User Code Tamper  
Trouble Report  
Missing Trouble  
Non-Fire Supervision  
Point Bus Fail  
n/a  
n/a  
S: Fire Trouble  
n/a  
n/a  
S: Missing Fire (Trouble)  
S: Missing Burglary ((Trouble)  
S: Missing Burglary (Alarm)  
S: Fire Supervision Missing  
S: Burglary Supervision Missing  
S: Door Left Open  
SDI Device Failure*  
SDI Device Restoral*  
Watchdog Reset  
Parameter Checksum Fail  
Reboot  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Point Bus Restoral  
Non-Fire Cancel  
Alarm Restore  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Supervision Missing  
Unverified Event  
Point Bypass/Command Bypass  
Forced Point  
004  
008  
004  
n/a  
070  
071  
077  
n/a  
Point Opening  
008  
004  
008  
004  
008  
004  
004  
008  
004  
008  
n/a  
082  
068  
069  
072  
073  
074  
075  
076  
066  
067  
n/a  
Point Closing  
Phone Line Fail  
Was Force Armed  
Fail To Open  
Phone Line Restoral  
AC Failure  
Fail To Close  
AC Restoral  
Extend Close Time  
Opening Report  
Forced Close  
Battery Missing  
Battery Low  
Battery Restoral  
Route Comm Fail  
Route Comm Restore  
Checksum Fail  
Closing Report  
Sensor Reset  
007  
007  
007  
007  
007  
008  
008  
008  
031  
032  
033  
057  
058  
151  
052  
053  
Relay Set  
Relay Reset  
Sked Executed  
Sked Changed  
Fail to Execute  
Event Log Threshold  
Event Log Overflow  
* SDI Device number is not reported when using pager  
format.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 28  
2.5  
Power Supervision  
Table 21: Event Descriptions, Priorities, and  
Numbers, continued  
AC Fail Time  
Default:  
Selection:  
1
Event  
Priorit  
y
Event  
Number  
1 to 90 (Blank and 0 are invalid)  
Event Description  
Parameters Changed  
RPS Access OK  
RPS Access Fail  
Remote Reset  
Program Access OK  
Program Access Fail  
Service Start  
Program the amount of time that AC power must be  
off before the control panel responds to the AC  
failure. The response to restoral of AC power is  
delayed for the same amount of time. The control  
panel always monitors AC. The response to this  
prompt is the actuation of the relay programmed in  
the Panel-Wide Relays prompt AC Failure (refer to  
Section 2.13.2 Panel-Wide Relays on page 81) and  
the AC Fail report enabled by the AC Fail/Res Rpt  
prompt. Local annunciation of an AC failuter is  
controlled by the AC Fail Display prompt.  
008  
008  
008  
008  
n/a  
054  
064  
065  
079  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
008  
008  
008  
008  
008  
008  
008  
n/a  
029  
030  
036  
037  
038  
039  
023  
n/a  
Service End  
Fire Walk Start  
Fire Walk End  
Walk Test Start  
Walk Test End  
Extra Point  
UL 864 requirements, Section 50.2.1.b  
states: “A trouble signal shall be  
transmitted for remote station, central  
station, and proprietary-type protected  
premises units after a delay of between  
60 and 180 min.  
Send Point Text  
RF Low Battery  
RF Battery Restore  
Date Changed  
Time Changed  
Delete User  
006  
006  
008  
008  
008  
008  
008  
008  
007  
008  
008  
008  
008  
008  
008  
008  
008  
002  
002  
093  
094  
059  
060  
090  
056  
042  
110  
061  
003  
115  
116  
112  
113  
114  
117  
145  
005  
006  
Exception: Products are not prohibited  
from providing capability of selecting  
that the primary power failure trouble  
signal transmission be delayed other  
time periods, including no  
User Code Change  
Area Watch  
Card Assigned  
Change Level  
delay,provided the 60 – 180 min delay  
is also included.”  
Access Granted  
No Entry  
To meet UL 864 requirements, program  
AC Fail Time with 61, 63, 65, ... (odd  
numbered values), and 89. Always  
check with the Authority Having  
Door Left Open  
Cycle Door  
Door Unlocked  
Door Secure  
Jurisdiction for local requirements.  
Door Request  
Door Locked  
When you program AC Fail Time, if the second digit  
User Alarm COMMAND 7  
User Alarm COMMAND 9  
is:  
•
1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 (such as 3, 5, 11, 13, 15, 21, and  
so on): The AC Fail Time interval is in minutes.  
•
2, 4, 6, 8, or 0 (such as 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 20, 22,  
and so on): The AC Fail Time interval is in  
seconds.  
For the following items to be true, AC  
Fail/Res Rpt must be programmed as  
Yes and AC Tag Along must be  
programmed as No.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 29  
When you program AC Fail Time, if the second digit  
is:  
•
•
•
•
7 (such as 7, 17, 27, 37, and so on): The AC  
Fail Time interval is in minutes. An AC Fail Event  
is only sent after 6 hours if the AC Fail condition  
is still present.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
1, 3, or 5 (such as 3, 5, 11, 13, 15, 21, and so  
on): The AC Fail Time interval is in minutes and  
an AC Fail Event is sent after the loss of AC for  
this amount of time.  
No additional AC Fail Events are sent after 6  
hours or 12 hours.  
8 (such as 8, 18, 28, 38, and so on): The AC  
Fail Time interval is in seconds. An AC Fail Event  
is only sent after 6 hours if the AC Fail condition  
is still present.  
2, 4, or 6 (such as 2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16, 22, 24, 26,  
and so on): The AC Fail Time interval is in  
seconds and an AC Fail Event is sent after the  
loss of AC for this amount of time.  
No additional AC Fail Events are sent after 6  
hours or 12 hours.  
9 (such as 9, 19, 29, 39, and so on): The AC  
Fail Time interval is in minutes. An AC Fail Event  
is only sent after 12 hours if the AC Fail condition  
is still present.  
0 (such as 10, 20, 30, and so on): The AC Fail  
Time interval is in seconds. An AC Fail Event is  
sent after 12 hours only if the AC Fail condition is  
still present.  
7 (such as 7, 17, 27, 37, and so on): The AC  
Fail Time interval is in minutes and an AC Fail  
Event is sent after the loss of AC for this amount  
of time.  
An additional AC Fail Event is sent after 6 hours  
if the AC Fail condition is still present.  
To eliminate AC Reporting, AC Tag  
Along and AC Fail/Res Rpt must be  
programmed as No and the second digit  
of the AC Fail Time must be a 1, 2, 3, 4,  
5, or 6.  
8 (such as 8, 18, 28, 38, and so on): The AC  
Fail Time interval is in seconds and an AC Fail  
Event is sent after the loss of AC for this amount  
of time.  
An additional AC Fail Event is sent after 6 hours  
if the AC Fail condition is still present.  
AC Fail Display  
Default:  
60 sec  
Selection:  
10 to 300 sec (in 5-sec  
increments)  
9 (such as 9, 19, 29, 39, and so on): The AC  
Fail Time interval is in minutes and an AC Fail  
Event is sent after the loss of AC for this amount  
of time.  
An additional AC Fail Event is sent after 12 hours  
if the AC Fail condition is still present.  
Program the length of time the AC power must be off  
before the message SERVC AC FAIL shows on the  
keypads. The response to restoral of AC power is  
delayed for the same amount of time.  
0 (such as 10, 20, 30, and so on): The AC Fail  
Time interval is in seconds and an AC Fail Event  
is sent after the loss of AC for this amount of  
time.  
AC Fail/Res Rpt  
Default:  
No  
An additional AC Fail Event is sent after 12 hours  
if the AC Fail condition is still present.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
For the following items to be true, AC Fail/Res Rpt  
must be programmed as No and AC Tag Along must  
also be programmed as No.  
Yes  
Send AC Fail and AC Restoral  
Reports.  
No  
Does not send AC Fail and AC  
Restoral Reports.  
When you program AC Fail Time, if the second digit  
is:  
AC Power Supervision Reports are sent to the central  
station and local printer at the time programmed for  
AC Fail Time.  
•
1, 3, or 5 (such as 3, 5, 11, 13, 15, 21, and so  
on): The AC Fail Time interval is in minutes. No  
AC Fail or AC Restoral Events are sent.  
•
2, 4, or 6 (such as 2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16, 22, 24, 26,  
and so on): The AC Fail Time interval is in  
seconds. No AC Fail or AC Restoral Events are  
sent.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 30  
Bat Fail/Res Rpt  
AC Tag Along  
Default:  
Yes  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes Battery Failure and Restoral Reports are  
sent to the central station. They are routed  
to the telephone number programmed for  
Power/Phone Events.  
Yes  
Send AC messages as tag along  
events.  
No  
Do not send AC messages as tag  
along events.  
Modem Missing or  
Report shorted  
BATTERY  
MISSING  
Send AC Reports only if any other event occurs while  
AC is off-normal.  
s
Discharged  
below 12.1  
VDC  
BATTERY  
LOW  
If AC Tag Along is set to Yes and a  
subsequent event is generated, the AC  
Fail Event is sent first, before sending  
any subsequent events.  
BFSK  
Report shorted low  
battery  
Missing,  
TROUBLE  
ZONE 9  
s
AC Tag Along is required for NFPA  
and UL 864 Commercial Fire systems.  
Be sure to program AC Fail/Res Rpt as  
No if AC Tag Along is programmed  
Yes.  
No  
Battery Failure and Restoral Reports are not  
sent to the central station.  
To comply with NFPA standards and  
UL 864 requirements for Commercial Fire  
systems, program this item as Yes.  
AC/Battery Buzz  
Default:  
No  
2.6  
Printer Parameters  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Up to three D9131A Parallel Printer Interface  
Modules can be connected to the D9412GV2’s (one  
printer for the D7412GV2’s) SDI bus. Each printer is  
identified by an address of 17, 18, or 19. Options are  
available for Routing Reports and area assignments.  
Yes  
Initiates panel-wide trouble tone at  
all keypads.  
No  
Does not initiate panel-wide trouble  
tone at keypads  
Printer Address  
Initiates a panel-wide trouble tone at keypads when  
AC fails or battery is low or missing. This program  
item does not prevent the SERVC AC FAIL or  
SERVC BATT LOW displays.  
Default:  
17  
Selection:  
17, 18, or 19 (only 17 is available  
for the D7412GV2)  
To comply with NFPA standards and  
UL 864 requirements for Commercial Fire  
systems, program this item as Yes.  
Enter the printer address you are programming.  
P## Area Assign  
Default:  
1
If annunciating panel-wide troubles at a  
keypad with CC# Scope set to Panel  
Wide is undesirable, set CC# Trouble  
Tone to No. Refer to Section 2.10  
Keypad (Command Center) on page 51  
for keypad configurations.  
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Assign an area to the printer programmed in Printer  
Address.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 31  
P## Supervised  
P## Scope  
Default:  
No  
Default:  
No Printer  
Selection:  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
No Printer, Area, Account, Panel  
Wide, Custom  
Yes  
Only one printer can be installed for  
this P## SDI address.  
Panel  
Wide  
Printer prints all designated events  
that occur panel-wide. A panel-wide  
printer can cross account boundaries.  
No  
More than one unsupervised printer  
can be installed using this P## SDI  
address and the same address DIP  
switch setting.  
Account  
Printer prints all designated events  
that occur within any area with the  
same account number in which this  
printer is assigned.  
Supervise this SDI address. Generate Trouble SDI  
## Reports and local trouble annunciation if a  
problem occurs with this printer or the SDI bus.  
Area  
Printer prints all designated events  
that occur in the area to which this  
printer is assigned.  
Unsupervised printers sharing the same  
address setting print the same text.  
Custom  
Printer prints all events occurring in  
areas programmed Yes for this  
prompt regardless of any boundary  
restrictions.  
Trouble SDI ## Reports are always  
reported as Area 1, Account 1 Events  
regardless of where the SDI device is  
assigned.  
No Printer No printer installed at this address. If  
a printer is connected, data does not  
print.  
When P## Supervised is set to Yes and  
all Printer Event Groups (such as P##  
Fire Events, P## Burglar Event, or P##  
Usr Chng Evt) are set to No, the control  
panel does not generate Trouble SDI ##  
Reports for the printer if the D9131A  
becomes disconnected.  
Press the [SPACE] bar to scroll through the  
selections. Press [ENTER] when the correct selection  
appears in the display.  
The following prompts are visible only  
when you program P## Scope to  
Custom.  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Include Area # Events in the scope of  
this printer.  
No  
Does not include Area # Events in  
the scope of this printer.  
Only available if P## Scope is programmed Custom.  
This program item determines if events occurring in  
an area print at this printer.  
Refer to the report tables in Section 2.3  
Routing on page 15 to identify the events  
that print. Events programmed as No in  
Routing still print at the local printer.  
Individual events within the report group  
cannot be suppressed for events printed  
at the local printer.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
P## Point Event  
EN | 32  
P## Fire Events  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection:  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
All events in this group print at  
assigned printer.  
P## Usr Chng Evt  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
No  
No events in this group print at  
assigned printer.  
Selection:  
Use this prompt to determine whether these events  
print at assigned printer.  
2.7  
RPS Parameters  
Use these program items to enable remote  
programming software (RPS) functions in the control  
panel using the on-board phone connection. Two  
other methods of remote programming are available  
(external modem and LAN or WAN connection) using  
RPS. Refer to Section 6.4 SDI RPS Parameters on  
page 128 for more information on these types of  
remote programming.  
P## Burglar Event  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
P## Access Event  
2.7.1 Uploading and Downloading Reports  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
If the control panel is programmed to send reports in  
modem format, when RPS contacts the control panel  
and the passcode is incorrect, the control panel  
sends an RPS Access Fail Report to the D6500 or  
D6600. RPS Access Fail also occurs when the call is  
not terminated with either a Good-bye or Reset-bye  
command.  
Selection:  
P## User Event  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
RPS ACCESS OK is sent according to phone routing  
when a Good-bye command is entered from RPS to  
terminate the call.  
P## Test Event  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
When a Reset-bye is used to terminate the call, a  
Remote Reset Report is sent to the D6500 or D6600,  
and an RPS ACCESS OK is placed into the control  
panel’s event log. Reports in the event log that were  
not sent before the Reset-bye are never sent to the  
D6500 or D6600.  
Selection:  
P## Diag Event  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
When RPS programming changes parameters, a  
Parameters Changed Report is sent to the D6500 or  
D6600. If any programming changes are made,  
perform a Reset-bye.  
P## Auto Functions Event  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
When RPS contacts the control panel, the RPS  
passcode and DataLock code are verified. If the  
control panel’s passcode matches and the DataLock  
code does not, the control panel still generates a  
RPS Access OK Event; however, the session ends  
immediately.  
Selection:  
P## RPS Event  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
To prevent the control panel from answering the  
telephone automatically, enter Blank in the Answer  
Armed and Answer Disarmed prompts in this  
section.  
P## Relay Event  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 33  
2.7.2 Log Threshold Reports  
Log % Full  
If communication with RPS is unsuccessful, or if no  
phone number is programmed in RPS Ph, the control  
panel generates Log Threshold and Bad Call to Ram.  
This indicates the log is filling and the control panel  
cannot download its events.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
1 to 99, or Blank  
This parameter determines how full the memory log  
can be before initiating a call to RPS at the central  
station. This allows the central station to call the  
control panel and copy the memory log before  
messages are overwritten.  
If there is no RPS Ph programmed, the control panel  
generates the Log Threshold and Bad Call to RPS  
Events immediately. Bad Call to RPS Events are  
logged only locally. If an RPS Ph is programmed, the  
control panel makes multiple attempts to reach RPS  
before sending the reports. Refer to the RPS Ph  
prompt in Section 2.7.3 RPS Callback Reports for an  
explanation of dialing characteristics.  
Blank disables the Log Threshold and Log Overflow  
Events. These events are not entered in the log or  
reported to the D6500 or D6600 or the local printer.  
The control panel continues to log events after the  
Log Threshold Report is sent. When it reaches 100%  
capacity (memory logger is full and previously stored  
events are overwritten), the control panel generates a  
local Log Overflow Event.  
2.7.3 RPS Callback Reports  
When dialing the RPS phone number, the control  
panel makes two attempts to reach RPS. If the  
control panel does not reach RPS on the first two  
attempts, it waits 10 min then tries six more times  
with a 10-min interval between each attempt. One  
hour after the last failed attempt, the control panel  
starts dialing the RPS phone number again. It makes  
two more attempts then waits 10 min and tries six  
more times with 10-min intervals between each  
attempt before generating a Bad Call to RPS Report  
and abandoning the effort.  
The control panel does not call RPS again until it  
downloads the log and the Log % Full percentage is  
reached. These events are also sent to the control  
panel’s event log and to the local printer(s) if  
installed.  
The Log Overflow Event is not sent to  
the central station unless Expanded  
Test Rpt is programmed Yes.  
Remote Program Dialing Exception: When an RPS  
phone number is programmed, the user can call RPS  
by entering [COMMAND][4][3] and pressing the  
[NEXT] key until CALLRPS? is displayed. Press  
[ENTER]. Only one attempt is made to contact RPS.  
Failure to program the RPS telephone  
number results in a BAD CALL TO RPS  
trouble event sent to the central station  
when the log threshold is reached. Refer  
to the RPS Ph prompt on page 35 for  
information about programming the RPS  
telephone number.  
RPS Passcode  
Default:  
999999  
Selection:  
0 to 9, A to F  
(six characters required)  
Enter six characters. Do not use a space in the  
passcode.  
The control panel verifies the remote programming  
software at the central station has valid access  
before connecting using the RPS passcode.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 34  
RPS Call Back  
Program this item No if it causes false  
seizures of the phone line or if you do  
not use RPS. This indicates that a  
device using the same frequency tone is  
also using the phone line to which the  
control panel is connected.  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
When the control panel hears the  
correct RPS passcode, it hangs up  
the phone, seizes the phone line,  
then dials the programmed RPS  
phone number (refer to the RPS Ph  
prompt on page 35). This ensures  
that the control panel only  
If RPS Call Back is programmed Yes,  
the control panel hangs up the phone  
after the RPS tone and a proper RPS  
passcode is identified. It then calls the  
RPS phone number.  
communicates with RPS units  
connected to the programmed phone  
number.  
Answer Armed  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
1 to 15, or Blank  
If the call is answered manually, the  
call back must be initiated manually.  
Selection:  
Blank  
No answer.  
No  
The RPS session starts immediately.  
No call back is required. The control  
panel can engage in RPS sessions  
when called from any phone number  
and a proper RPS passcode is  
identified.  
1 to 15  
The control panel answers the phone  
after the specified number of rings  
when all areas are master armed.  
Set the telephone ring counter to answer when all  
areas are master armed. If any area in the control  
panel is perimeter armed or disarmed, the Answer  
Disarmed ring counter is used.  
This function allows the control panel, after it verifies  
the RPS passcode, to provide an additional level of  
security by hanging up and dialing the RPS phone  
number at the central station before allowing any  
upload or download.  
The remote programming software  
(RPS) considers perimeter armed as a  
disarmed state.  
When using the RPS Call Back feature,  
be sure to program the character “C” as  
the last digit in the RPS phone number  
when using DTMF Dialing.  
Answer Disarmed  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
1 to 15, or Blank  
Selection:  
RPS Line Monitor  
Blank  
No answer.  
Default:  
Yes  
1 to 15  
The control panel answers the  
phone after the specified number of  
rings when any area in the system is  
in a perimeter armed or disarmed  
state.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Allows the control panel to  
communicate with RPS after the  
answering machine answers the  
phone.  
Set telephone ring counter to answer when any area  
is in a perimeter armed or disarmed state.  
No  
Use No if the control panel does not  
share the phone line with an  
answering machine.  
The RPS considers perimeter armed as  
a disarmed state.  
This program item enables a control panel that  
shares a phone line with an answering machine to  
communicate with RPS at the central station, even  
though the answering machine answers the phone.  
You must program Answer Armed or Answer  
Disarmed. The control panel must be in the correct  
armed state.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 35  
2.8  
Miscellaneous  
RPS Ph  
Duress Type  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Blank or up to 24 characters  
Default:  
0
Selection:  
0, 1, 2, or 3  
Blank  
Control panel does not dial a phone  
number for RPS.  
0
Do not send a duress event with any  
passcode.  
1 to 24  
Enter up to 24 characters to define  
characters dialing characteristics.  
1
Increase the last digit by 1 to generate an  
alarm. For example, if the passcode is 6123,  
6124 activates a duress alarm.  
This is the phone number the control panel dials to  
contact RPS. The control panel dials the  
programmed number on Phone #5 (RPS Ph #) when  
any of the following events occur:  
If the last digit of the passcode is 0, a duress  
alarm occurs when the user enters 1 as the  
last digit of the passcode.  
•
Log % Full threshold is achieved.  
If Log % Full is programmed with a  
value (1 to 99) and an RPS phone  
number is programmed, the control  
panel dials the RPS phone number  
when the log threshold is reached. This  
function is not available in RPS. Do not  
program Log % Full and an RPS phone  
number at the same time.  
If the last digit of the passcode is 9, a duress  
alarm occurs when the user enters 0 as the  
last digit of the passcode.  
2
Increase the last digit by 2 to generate an  
alarm. For example, if the passcode is 6123,  
6125 activates a duress alarm.  
If the last digit of the passcode is 8, a duress  
alarm occurs when the user enters 0 as the  
last digit of the passcode.  
•
•
The control panel is contacted by RPS and RPS  
Call Back is programmed Yes.  
If the last digit of the passcode is 9, a duress  
alarm occurs when the user enters 1 as the  
last digit of the passcode.  
The user enters COMMAND 43 and selects the  
call RPS option from the menu. On the D1255:  
1. Press [COMAND][4][3].  
3
Send a Duress event when any Passcode with  
L# Send Duress set to Yes is entered.  
2. Press [NEXT] until CONTACT RPS?  
appears, then press [ENTER].  
3. Wait for RPS VIA PHONE? to appear, then  
press [ENTER].  
This program item determines if users add one (+1)  
or two (+2) to the last digit of the passcode. To  
activate a duress alarm, the user increases the value  
of the last digit of the passcode when entering it at  
the keypad.  
The control panel tries to contact RPS  
only once using this method.  
Duress is enabled in Area Parameters by  
Refer to Section 6.4 SDI RPS Parameters on page  
setting A# Duress Enable to Yes.  
128 for other connection methods.  
Refer to Phone 1 in Section 2.1 Phone on  
page 11 for descriptions of special  
programming values for the RPS Phone  
number.  
The duress alarm activates when a user  
enters the duress passcode followed by  
the termination keys ([ESC] or [ENT]).  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
Duress Type must be set to 3.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
A# Acct Number  
EN | 36  
Cancel Report  
Default:  
0000  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
For BFSK: 0000 to 0999,  
0BBB to 0FFF  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Send Cancel and Fire Cancel  
Reports according to routing.  
For Modem (four-digit account  
numbers): 0000 to 9999,  
BBBB to FFFF  
No  
Do not send Cancel and Fire Cancel  
Reports.  
For Modem (ten-digit account  
numbers): 0000000000 to  
9999999999, BBBBBBBBBB to  
FFFFFFFFFF  
A Cancel and Fire Cancel Report is created when a  
passcode is entered to silence an Alarm Bell or a Fire  
Bell before the bell time expires.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
Determines the account number for this area. An  
account number must be assigned to each active  
area.  
This prompt must be set to Yes.  
2.9  
Area Parameters  
Account numbers are used to group areas together.  
Each area can have a different account number, or  
several areas can share the same account number.  
The control panel uses the account number as a  
reference for arming and keypad text displays.  
This programming module contains three  
programming categories: Area Parameters, Bell  
Parameters, and Open/Close Options.  
2.9.1 Area Parameters  
BFSK: Only the last three digits are sent. Insert a 0  
as the first digit of the account number.  
Example: 0 2 3 4.  
Modem IIIa2: Enter a four-digit or ten-digit number.  
Area  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Enter the area number you are programming.  
A# Area On  
Default:  
Yes (Area 1 only)  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Enable area.  
Disable area.  
Use this program item to enable or disable the area  
specified.  
Area 1 must be enabled:  
•
•
System events such as power and  
phone supervision do not send a  
report correctly if Area 1 is disabled.  
When programmed No, points  
assigned to this area do not generate  
events, show at the keypad when  
arming and disarming, or send status  
reports. All user authority in this area  
is turned off while the area is  
disabled.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set A#  
Area On to Yes.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 37  
2.9.2 Programming Account Numbers in 9000  
Series Control Panels  
Programming Ten-Digit Account Numbers  
To program a ten-digit account number (such as  
The GV2MAIN handler can program a four-digit or  
ten-digit account number for each area.  
1122334455) using the D5200 Programmer, you  
must enter a character for each of the ten digits.  
Refer to Table 23:  
Programming Four-Digit Account Numbers  
To program a four-digit account number (such as  
1234) using the D5200 Programmer, you must enter  
leading 0s (zeroes) for Digits 1 to 6, then enter 1234  
into Digits 7 to 10. When 0s are entered for the first  
six digits (Digits 1 to 6), the 9000 Series Control  
Panel treats this as a four-digit account number.  
Refer to Table 22.  
Table 23: Programming Ten Digit Account  
Numbers  
D5200 Programmer  
A# Acct# Dgt 1&2 1 1  
A# Acct# Dgt 3&4 2 2  
A# Acct# Dgt 5&6 3 3  
A# Acct# Dgt 7&8 4 4  
A# Acct# Dgt 9&10 5 5  
Table 22: Programming Four-Digit Account  
Numbers  
D5200 Programmer  
A# Acct# Dgt 1&2 0 0  
A# Acct# Dgt 3&4 0 0  
A# Acct# Dgt 5&6 0 0  
A# Acct# Dgt 7&8 1 2  
A# Acct# Dgt 9&10 3 4  
The D5200 account number entry shown in Table 23  
appears in RPS as shown in Figure 2.  
Figure 2: Account Number Entry  
1
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
3
4
5
6
7
The D5200 account number entry shown in Table 22  
appears in RPS as 1234.  
1 - RPS account number entry  
2 - Corresponding D5200 account number digits  
3 - Digits 1 and 2  
Although the D5200 allows the character  
“A” to be entered into the account, do not  
use this character for the account  
number.  
4 - Digits 3 and 4  
5 - Digits 5 and 6  
6 - Digits 7 and 8  
7 - Digits 9 and 10  
Any account number digits containing “A”  
for digits 1 to 6 that were uploaded to  
and received by RPS are not displayed.  
If an “A” is sent erroneously to the control  
panel from the D5200 for any of Digits 1  
to 6, correct this by:  
Although the D5200 allows the character  
“A” to be entered into the account, do not  
use this character for the account  
number.  
•
Entering six leading 0s from the  
D5200 and sending them to the  
control panel,  
or  
•
Entering six leading 0s from RPS,  
followed by the four-digit account  
number, and sending them to the  
control panel.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 38  
Points programmed for instant alarm  
A# FA Bypass Max  
response generate alarms immediately,  
even during exit delay. To avoid instant  
alarms on points adjacent to the  
perimeter when leaving the area,  
program P## Type as 3 (Interior  
Follower).  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
0 to 99  
Specify the maximum number of combined  
Controlled points that can be faulted or bypassed  
when arming this area.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
Refer to the prompts P## FA Retrnable and P## BA  
Retrnable in Section 4.2 Point Responses on page  
92 for returning a point to the system when the point  
returns to normal or when the area is disarmed.  
The Exit Delay Time must be between 45 sec and  
255 sec.  
A# Auto Watch  
Users can bypass more points than the  
number entered here during the  
Default:  
No  
disarmed state. It is only when the user  
attempts to Bypass Arm an area (or  
areas) that this restriction is enforced.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
When the area is disarmed, Watch  
Mode turns on automatically.  
A# Delay Res  
No  
When the area is disarmed, Watch  
Mode must be turned on or off  
manually.  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Controlled points must be programmed  
as P## Watch Point to generate a  
watch tone.  
Yes  
Point Restoral Report is not sent until  
the bell time expires or user  
acknowledges alarm condition.  
No  
Restoral Reports are sent when point  
restores, regardless of bell time.  
A# Verify Time  
Default:  
60  
A# Exit Tone  
Selection:  
10 to 60 (in 1-sec increments)  
Default:  
Yes  
Use alarm verification with smoke detectors to reduce  
the number of false fire alarms. When Verify Time is  
programmed, the control panel can check smoke  
detector point activations before generating alarm  
signals.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Sounds an exit tone during exit delay at all keypads  
assigned to this area.  
You can turn off exit tones for individual  
keypads by programming the  
appropriate CC# 1 to 8 as No in CC#  
Exit Tone.  
•
Do not enable the Cross Point feature  
in point indexes designated for Fire  
points.  
•
Check with your authority having  
jurisdiction (AHJ) to determine the  
maximum verification time allowed.  
A# Exit Dly Time  
Default:  
60  
Points are programmed individually to activate the  
verification feature. Refer to Section 4.1 Point Index  
on page 88. Any resettable Fire point can activate  
alarm verification for the area to which it is assigned.  
Use separate area alarm-verification relays.  
Selection:  
Blank (0) to 600 ( in 5 sec  
increments)  
Exit delay time for this area when Master Exit or  
Perimeter Exit arming.  
To enable alarm verification on a point, program  
Point Index, Fire Point, Alarm Verify, and Resettable  
as Yes.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 39  
When an Alarm Verification point senses an alarm,  
the control panel automatically removes power to all  
Resettable points connected to the area’s Reset  
Sensors relay. The sensor reset removes power to  
the sensors for the amount of time programmed in  
Verify Time. When power is reapplied, a 60-sec  
confirmation window begins. If the detector is still in  
alarm and experiences another alarm during the  
confirmation window, or a different Resettable  
Verification point in the area senses an alarm, an  
alarm occurs.  
When power restores to the points, the 60-sec  
confirmation window starts. If any detector, reset  
during the verification time, experiences another  
alarm during the confirmation window, an alarm  
occurs. If there is no activity during this period, no  
alarm occurs and the verification window ends. If a  
Verification point senses another alarm after the  
window ends, a new verification cycle begins. Refer  
to Table 24 for an example of Verify Time.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set A#  
Verify Time to 60 sec.  
Example: Verify Time is set for 20 sec. The alarm  
verification cycle starts when the detector senses  
smoke or fire. No report occurs.  
When the detector senses smoke or fire, the area’s  
sensor reset relay interrupts power to points  
connected to it for the time in Verify Time.  
Table 24: Verify Time  
Verification Point  
Activiation  
Verify Time/Reset  
Sensors  
Power removed,  
ignore activity  
60 sec  
Confirmation  
Generate alarm if  
additional activity  
received.  
Restart Alarm  
Verification Cycle if  
an Alarm  
Verification point  
activates.  
Example: Total  
Cycle time 80 sec  
20 Sec  
60 Sec  
*
A# Duress Enable  
Default:  
No  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Enable Duress alarm for this area.  
Disable Duress alarm for this area.  
Refer to Duress Type in Section 2.8 Miscellaneous  
on page 35 for an explanation of duress.  
The passcode you normally use for  
duress is not valid in an area with A#  
Duress Enable set to No.  
If a passcode with the appropriate  
L# Disarm authority is used to duress  
disarm an area with A# Duress Enable  
set to No, NO AUTHORITY appears in  
the display. Also, if the keypad display  
is moved to an area with A# Duress  
Enable set to No using  
[COMMAND][5][0], a valid duress  
disarm passcode does not send a  
duress report.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
A# Duress Enable must be set to Yes.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 40  
A# Area Type  
Default:  
Regular  
Selection:  
Regular, Master, Associate, or Shared  
Arms or disarms as an independent area.  
Does not allow arming for this area unless all associate areas with the same A# account  
Regular  
Master  
number are master exit delay armed or master armed. CHK AREA displays if the associate  
areas are not armed. Exception: RPS allows master areas to be armed without all associate  
areas being in the armed state.  
A master area can be disarmed regardless of the armed state of the other areas in the account.  
Multiple master areas can be programmed in a single account.  
CC# Scope affects master arming.  
Area: When arming a master area that has CC# Scope set to Area for all  
keypads, all associate areas within the same account must first be armed  
independently by other means.  
Panel Wide or Account Wide: When arming a master area from a keypad  
with CC# Scope set to Panel Wide or Account Wide, all associate areas  
enters exit delay as soon as the master area is armed. If there is a shared  
area within the same account, it begins its exit delay after all associate  
areas are armed.  
Using the arming sked (S## Function 1) requires that you first use an  
arming sked to arm the associate areas before using an arming sked to  
arm the master area. Arming master areas with RPS, Keyswitch, or Auto  
Close parameters (refer to Section 2.9.5 Open/Close Options on page 43)  
occurs before all associate areas are armed  
Associate  
Allows arming and disarming regardless of the armed state of the other areas with the same A#  
account number. Use this area type with a master area and associate it by using the same  
account number.  
Keypads assigned to associate areas, when used with shared areas, must  
have CC# Scope programmed.  
Shared  
Shared areas cannot be armed using a passcode, key switch, token or card, sked, or RPS.  
The scope of all associate areas must include the shared area(s) in order to view  
faulted points.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 41  
2.9.3 Shared-Area Characteristics  
Arming a Shared Area  
Silencing Sounders in the Shared Area  
Silence shared area alarms and troubles from any  
keypad.  
All associate areas must be armed when a shared  
area is armed. As soon as the last associate area is  
armed, the shared area automatically begins its  
arming sequence. Passcode, key switch, sub-  
controls, or RPS cannot arm shared areas. To  
display faulted points at associate areas, the shared  
and associate areas must have the same account  
number.  
To silence sounders, the user needs an authority  
level assigned to the shared area. If the user also has  
the authority to arm or disarm the area, then  
ALREADY ARMED or ALREADY DISARMED  
momentarily appears.  
Access Control Readers Assigned to the Shared  
Area  
Disarming a Shared Area  
The shared area momentarily disarms then begins  
the exit delay sequence, allowing a user to walk to an  
associate area and disarm. If the token or card  
reader assigned to the shared area includes any  
associate area in the D## CC# Scope (in the access  
handler), both the associate area and shared area  
disarms when the token or ard is presented.  
Shared areas automatically disarm when any  
associate area in the control panel is disarmed.  
Passcode, tokens, cards, key switch, sub-controls, or  
RPS cannot disarm shared areas.  
Shared Area Arming Sequence  
When shared areas automatically begin to arm, the  
arming is based on the A# Exit Dly Time  
programmed for the area number where the keypad  
is assigned.  
Closing Reports for Shared Areas  
If Closing Reports for shared areas are needed,  
assign passcodes a valid authority level in the shared  
area.  
Shared Area Not Ready  
2.9.4 Bell Parameters  
If a point is faulted in the shared area, CHK AREA  
appears on the associate keypad that is arming the  
last associate area. Associate area keypads can  
show faults from shared areas as long as the shared  
areas fall within the scope of the associate area.  
The D9412GV2 and the D7412GV2 have two main  
types of annunciation: Fire Bell and Burg Bell. Both  
Fire and Burg Bells share the same terminal  
(Terminal 6) on the control panel as shipped from the  
factory.  
Force Arming a Shared Area  
If a simultaneous Fire Bell and Burg Bell occur, the  
Fire Bell takes precedence over the Burg Bell  
regardless of which relay or terminal output they  
share.  
When CHK AREA appears, press [ESC] to show  
FORCE ARM at the associate keypad. Pressing  
[ENTER] force arms the shared area if:  
•
•
•
the user has authority to bypass points,  
the point is bypassable, and  
When the Fire and Burg Bells share the same output  
and a Fire Bell occurs while the Burg Bell is ringing,  
the Fire Bell pattern overrides the Burg Bell pattern.  
At the end of the fire time, the burg pattern resumes.  
the number of faulted points does not exceed the  
force arm maximum amount for the shared area.  
When the Fire and Burg Bells share the same output  
and a Burg Bell occurs while a Fire Bell sounds, the  
control panel waits until the Fire time expires before  
starting the Burg Bell.  
Remember to include the shared area  
in the associate area’s scope.  
Viewing Shared Area Armed Status  
Either a single bell (panel-wide) or a number of bells  
(area-wide) can be used on the control panel. For  
programming these applications, refer to Section  
2.13.1 Area Relays on page 79.  
View Area Status can be used from a keypad outside  
of the shared area to view the shared area’s armed  
state.  
When both Fire and Burg Bells occur simultaneously  
and a user enters a valid passcode, a Fire Cancel  
Report for the fire alarm and a Cancel Report for the  
burg alarm is sent to the central station if Cancel  
Reports is programmed Yes.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 42  
Select the bell pattern this area uses to signal an  
alarm on a Fire point.  
Area  
Press the [Space] bar to scroll through the selections.  
Press [Enter] when the correct selection appears in  
the display.  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Enter the area number you are programming.  
When an alarm occurs on two Fire  
points sharing the same relay, the bell  
pattern of the most recent fire event  
takes precedence.  
A# Fire Time  
Default:  
6 min  
Selection:  
1 min to 90 min  
A# Burg Time  
Enter the number of minutes the bell rings for Fire  
Alarm points. The relay activated for this time is  
programmed in A# Fire Bell in Area Relays.  
Default:  
6 min  
Selection:  
1 to 90 min (in one-minute  
increments)  
The bell output begins as soon as the fire alarm  
occurs. It shuts off the bell when the programmed  
number of minutes expires.  
4 min for UL  
If programmed for 1 min, the output can be anywhere  
from 0 to 60 sec of bell time. Program Fire Time for 2  
min or more to ensure you have ample output time.  
5 min for ULC  
Enter the number of minutes the bell rings for  
Burglary Alarm points. The relay activated for this  
time is programmed in A# Alarm Bell in Area Relays.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, program  
A# Fire Time for at least 5 min. Check  
with your AHJ to determine the  
appropriate bell time for your  
geographical area.  
The bell output begins as soon as the burglary alarm  
occurs. It shuts off the bell when the programmed  
number of minutes expires.  
When the control panel’s internal clock begins a new  
minute, it considers the first minute expired. Program  
Burg Time for 2 min or more.  
A# Fire Pat  
Default:  
Pulse  
Check with your AHJ to determine the  
appropriate bell time for your  
geographical area.  
Selection:  
Steady, Pulse, CaStnd, TmCod3  
Steady Output  
Steady  
Pulse  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
Pulse March Time  
A# Burg Time must be 6 min or more.  
120 beats per minute, at an even  
tempo  
A# Burg Pat  
CaStnd  
California Standard  
Default:  
Steady  
10 sec On + 5 sec Off + 10 sec On +  
5 sec Off. This sequence repeats  
until bell time expires.  
Selection:  
Steady, Pulse, CaStnd, TmCod3  
Select the bell pattern this area uses to signal an  
alarm on a Non-fire point.  
TmCod3  
Temporal Code 3  
Press the [SPACE] bar to scroll through the  
selections. Press [ENTER] when the correct selection  
appears in the display.  
0.5 sec On, 0.5 sec Off, 0.5 sec On,  
0.5 sec Off, 0.5 sec On, 1.5 sec Off;  
pattern repeats. This sequence  
repeats for a minimum of 3 min and  
with a ± 10% tolerance.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
Bell Test After Confirmation  
EN | 43  
A# Single Ring  
In areas that send Opening and Closing Reports, the  
Bell Test occurs after the control panel sends the  
Closing Report and receives an acknowledgment  
from the central station receiver. For proper operation  
of the Bell Test after closing confirmation, the  
following rules apply:  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
One bell output per arming period.  
After one alarm, alarms on any Non-  
fire points in the same area cannot  
restart the bell until the armed state  
changes. An alarm on a different  
point in same area restarts bell  
output.  
•
The control panel must send Opening and  
Closing Reports to the central station.  
•
Do not use restricted openings and closings or  
Opening and Closing Windows.  
Area Armed Confirmation  
No  
Restart bell output with each alarm  
event.  
In areas that do not report opening and closing  
activity, the alarm bell relay output for this area  
activates for 2 sec after exit time expires.  
Determines if an alarm from a non-fire point can  
restart the alarm bell time with each Alarm Event, or  
only start alarm output once per arming period.  
Multiple Bell Tests occur: When more  
than one area is armed at the same time  
(such as using the ARM ALL AREAS?  
function), the bell rings for 2 sec with a  
2 sec pause between each bell activation  
if all areas have the same exit delay time  
programmed. Otherwise, the Bell Test  
occurs as each area arms and it  
This does not silence the keypad alarm bell tone, or  
prevent any reports. This feature does not affect Fire  
points. Fire points restart bell time with each new  
alarm.  
If an alarm occurs on a 24-hour point  
while the area is disarmed, arming that  
area with a key switch does not clear  
the A# Single Ring flag.  
completes its exit delay time.  
When areas arm simultaneously and  
report to the central station, the Bell  
Test occurs as the central station  
receiver confirms each area.  
Silencing the bell resets A# Single  
Ring.  
2.9.5 Open/Close Options  
A# Bell Test  
Programming determines if Opening, All Normal  
Closing, and Force Arm/Bypass Closing Events are  
sent to the remote central station. Without remote  
reports, all control panel and area arming (Closing  
Events) and disarming (Opening Events) default to  
local events.  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
Start Bell Test.  
Do not start Bell Test.  
Use this programming category to determine which  
opening and closing supervision characteristics are  
needed.  
Provides alarm output from the relay programmed at  
A# Alarm Bell after the Closing Report is confirmed  
or the exit delay time expires.  
There are three ways to generate reports from the  
control panel. You can generate reports by account,  
by area, or a combination of both.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 44  
To suppress reports:  
Area  
•
Use Opening/Closing Windows to suppress  
reports for a specified period of time and then  
automatically turn them on again.  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
•
Use the Restricted O/C options. A Closing Report  
is sent if the user is force arming, sending  
duress, or bypass arming. An Opening Report is  
sent if the user is disarming during an alarm  
condition or unbypasses points when disarming.  
If the system is normal, no Opening or Closing  
Report is sent.  
Enter the area number you are programming.  
A# Acct O/C  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Send Opening and Closing Reports  
by account.  
For the scheduled suppression of  
Opening and Closing Reports, refer to  
Section 5.1.1 Opening and Closing) to  
define Opening and Closing Windows.  
Use this selection if the control panel  
sends reports to an automation  
system that cannot interpret multiple  
Area Opening and Closing Reports,  
or if Modem Format is programmed  
as No in the Phone category (BFSK  
format is used and Opening and  
Closing Reports are enabled).  
Account Opening and Closing Reports  
Opening and Closing Reports are sent by account  
when the last area in a group of areas with the same  
account number(s) is armed.  
Area Opening and Closing Reports  
Closing Reports are sent for each area as it is armed.  
The account number is also sent for each area.  
An Account Opening Report is  
generated when the first area in an  
account is opened (disarmed). After  
the Account Opening Report is sent,  
disarming other areas in the account  
does not generate another Account  
Opening Report. An Account Closing  
Report is generated only when the  
last area in an account is closed  
(armed). Opening and Closing  
Customizing Account Opening and Closing  
Reports  
You can eliminate area Opening and Closing Reports  
from selected areas in the account by programming  
A# Area O/C as No for those areas.  
Combination Account and Area Opening and  
Closing Reports  
Reports for accounts do not contain  
any area information.  
To send both account openings and closings, and  
individual area openings and closings for all areas in  
the account, you must:  
Opening and Closing Windows  
affect Account Opening and  
Closing Reports: If an account  
opening or closing is generated while  
an Opening or Closing Window for  
this area is in effect, and Disable O/C  
in Window is programmed Yes, the  
report is not sent. Use the same  
opening and closing window times for  
all areas sharing the same account  
number.  
•
Program A# Acct O/C as Yes for all areas in the  
account.  
•
Program A# Area O/C as Yes for all areas in the  
account.  
Closing Reports: When areas in the account are  
independently armed, each area generates an Area  
Closing Report. When the last area is armed, it also  
generates an Account Closing Report.  
Opening Reports: When the first area in the account  
is disarmed, it generates an Account Opening Report  
along with an Area Opening Report. When the  
remaining areas in the account are disarmed, each  
area generates an Area Opening Report.  
No  
Do not send Opening and Closing  
Reports by account.  
Determines if this area generates Account Opening  
and Closing Reports. Program this item the same for  
all areas in the account.  
Area Only Opening Closing Supervision Features  
Use these features to supervise opening and closing  
activity by area. Auto Close, Fail To Open, and Fail  
To Close all work independently of the A# Acct O/C  
feature. To use these features, program O/C  
Windows.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 45  
Determines if opening and closing activity is reported  
when it occurs inside an Opening or Closing Window,  
as programmed in O/C Windows.  
A# Area O/C  
Default:  
Yes  
Reports are always logged and printed on a local  
printer, if installed.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Ye Include the Area # and generate Opening  
A# Auto Close  
s
and Closing Reports for this area when it is  
armed.  
Default:  
No  
No Do not include the Area # or generate  
Opening and Closing Reports for this area.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Ye The area automatically master arms at the  
Determines if the area number and the account  
number are reported at arming and disarming. As  
long as Account O/C is No, the account number  
sends a report when arming this area individually. If  
Account O/C is Yes, all areas with the same account  
number must also be armed.  
s
end of the Close Window.  
When the area is armed automatically, a  
Closing Report is sent if the Area or Account  
Reports are programmed to do so.  
No Do not automatically arm the area at the end  
of the Close Window.  
An Area Opening Report is generated when each  
area is opened (disarmed). An Area Closing Report is  
generated when each individual area is closed  
(armed).  
With this program item, the control panel can  
automatically master arm the area at the end of the  
Closing Window regardless of the previous armed  
state.  
Do not program this item as Yes if the  
control panel reports to an automation  
system that cannot interpret multiple Area  
Opening and Closing Reports.  
When an area master arms automatically  
at the end of a Close window, the system  
disregards the settings in A# Force Arm  
Max and P## Bypassable for any faulted  
points. The faulted points arm when they  
return to normal state.  
A# Disable O/C in Window  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
A# Fail to Open  
Yes  
Do not send Opening and Closing Reports  
to the central station if they occur inside an  
active window.  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
If an Opening or Closing Report occurs  
outside a window, send it with an early or  
late modifier. Refer to Section 5.1.1  
Opening and Closing on page 106.  
Yes  
Fail to Open Report is sent for this  
area if the area was not disarmed  
when the Opening Window stop time  
occurred.  
The active window must be a Closing  
Window for Closing Reports. It must be an  
Opening Window for Opening Reports.  
No  
Fail to Open Report is not sent for  
this area.  
Use to determine if a Fail to Open Report is sent for  
this area. This can determine if a user failed to  
disarm the area before the Opening Window expiring.  
Normal Opening and Closing Reports do not need to  
be programmed to use this feature.  
No  
Send Opening and Closing Reports to the  
central station even when they occur inside  
a programmed window. If an opening or  
closing occurs outside of the appropriate  
window, it reports but does not have an  
early or late modifier.  
If you want to monitor all opening and  
closing activity and use features provided  
by Opening and Closing Windows, program  
this item as No, and program the  
appropriate O/C Windows.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 46  
A# Fail to Close  
A# Restrictd O/C  
Default:  
No  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Fail to Close Report is sent for this  
area if the area is not armed when  
the Closing Window stop time occurs.  
Yes  
Restrict Opening and Closing  
Reports for this area. A# Area O/C  
must be programmed Yes to  
generate Restricted Opening and  
Closing Reports.  
Note:  
Program an exit delay time in  
Exit Dly Time.  
Note:  
If a passcode is not required for  
arming or disarming and this item  
is Yes, the area sends only  
No  
Fail to Close Report is not sent for  
this area.  
•
If Auto Close is programmed  
Yes, a Fail to Close Report is  
sent because it occurs when the  
Closing Window stop time  
occurred.  
Restricted Opening and Closing  
Reports. In this case, Restricted  
Reports are sent without User ID.  
Opening/Closing Window does not  
affect this report. Windows do not  
prevent sending Restricted Opening  
and Closing Reports from being sent.  
Early or late designations are not  
added to Opening or Closing Reports  
when they are sent according to the  
rules for Restricted Opening or  
Closing Reports.  
•
If Disable O/C in Window is  
Yes, the Fail to Close Report is  
followed by Closing Late or  
F(orce) Close Late.  
This item determines if a Fail to Close Report is sent  
for this area. Use to determine if a user failed to arm  
the area before the Closing Window expires. Normal  
Opening and Closing Reports do not need to be  
programmed to use this feature.  
No  
Do not Restrict Opening and Closing  
Reports for this area.  
Regardless of programming in  
Authority Levels L## Restricted O/C,  
reports are not restricted in this area  
when this item is programmed as No.  
Note:  
Was Force Armed and Forced  
Close Events can still be sent to  
the central station if enabled in  
Routing when force arming the  
system.  
This item determines if this area can restrict Opening  
and Closing Report activity.  
A Restricted Opening Report refers to the control  
panel sending an Area Opening Report only when  
the area is disarmed after a non-fire alarm.  
A Restricted Closing Report refers to the control  
panel sending a Force Closed Report only when the  
area was master armed with Controlled points that  
were faulted during the arming sequence. The  
sequence of reports generated by a restricted closing  
is: Was Force Armed, Forced Point, and Force  
Closed.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 47  
To extend across midnight, you must use two  
windows:  
A# Perimeter O/C  
Default:  
No  
•
To suppress reports before midnight, use one  
window (for example, 20:00 start to 23:59 stop).  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
•
To suppress reports immediately after midnight,  
use another window (for example, 00:01 start to  
02:00 stop).  
Yes This area can send Perimeter Opening and  
Closing Reports.  
No  
This area cannot send Perimeter Opening  
and Closing Reports.  
2.9.6 Arming Features  
A# Two Man Rule  
This item determines if this area can send Perimeter  
Instant and Perimeter Delay Closing Reports and  
normal Opening Reports to the central station.  
Opening and Closing Windows do not suppress this  
event. Refer to the L## Perimeter O/C prompt on  
page 75  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Two valid unique passcodes are  
required to disarm the area.  
Needs modem format reporting. Some  
central station automation systems  
cannot process these reports.  
No  
A single passcode with a valid  
authority level can disarm the area.  
The D720 Keypad does not support the  
Two-Man Rule feature.  
A# Latest Close Time  
Default:  
00:00  
Use this parameter when disarming an area that is  
Master Armed. After recognizing the first valid  
passcode, the system requests a second passcode  
to disarm the area. If the entry delay expires before  
the entry of a second valid unique passcode, an  
alarm condition occurs. This function works only  
when you use Passcode Disarm.  
Selection:  
00:00 to 24:00  
Use to set a Latest Close Time boundary value for  
this area. If the Latest Close Time value is non-zero,  
the time of day specified with the Extend Close  
feature cannot be greater than or equal to this value.  
A zero value for A# Latest Close Time disables the  
feature for the area.  
When you are disarming an area with A#  
Two Man Rule set to Yes, the keypad  
waits for the time equal to the A# Exit  
Delay Time. If the second passcode is  
not entered before the prompt times out,  
the rule resets and waits for the first  
passcode again.  
Example: If A# Latest Close Time is set for 17:30,  
the user can extend the close time to as late as  
17:29.  
This prompt is used only when an O/C Window is  
assigned to an area. Make entries in 30-min  
increments using a 24-hour format. Use times that  
begin on the hour or the half-hour only. For example,  
enter 2:30 PM as 14:30. Enter 1:00 AM as 01:00. To  
set the Latest Close Time for midnight, use a value of  
24:00. The latest close time allowed by the Extend  
Close feature is 24:58, because of internal limitations  
in the control panel.  
If the area is already in an alarm  
condition, the first valid passcode entered  
after the alarm occurs silences the bell  
but does not disarm the area. Enter  
Code 2 appears on the display. A second  
valid unique passcode is necessary to  
disarm the area.  
The default entry of 00:00 disables the  
Latest Close Time feature for this area.  
This feature is not allowed for use with  
SIA CP-01 compliant installations.  
Consult the local authority having  
jurisdiction (AHJ) for proper usage. Refer  
to your control panel’s program entry  
guide for programming information.  
The control panel sets all windows for the next day  
when the control panel clock turns to midnight. The  
control panel must cross the midnight boundary  
before any changes in that default setting occur.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 48  
Parameter Setup Requirement:  
When the first digit of the second code is pressed,  
the following message appears. As each digit is  
pressed, an additional asterisk appears.  
Two Man Rule can be completed only by entering  
two valid unique passcodes with L## Passcode  
Disarm authority.  
To avoid unintended results for the end  
user of the system:  
•
Set CC# Scope to Area Wide for  
keypads assigned to areas with the  
Two Man Rule feature.  
A# Early Ambush  
•
Avoid setting the A# Two Man Rule  
to Yes in an area where A# Early  
Ambush is set to Yes.  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Use this feature in banks or other facilities  
that might require a higher level of  
security to gain access to a vault or other  
protected area.  
Yes  
Two valid passcodes are required to  
disarm the area within the time period  
specified in Early Ambush Timer. The  
second valid disarm passcode must  
be entered within a time limit. Refer  
to Early Ambush Timer on page  
140.  
D1255 Keypad  
After the first valid passcode is entered, the D1255  
replaces the scrolling DISARM NOW and the Point  
Text display with the SECOND CODE:.display  
If the second passcode is not entered  
within the time limit, the system  
generates a Duress Event based  
upon the primary user.  
When the user presses the first digit of the second  
code, the display changes to SECOND CODE: *.  
SECOND CODE: appears for 19 sec. If no digits are  
pressed, the display returns to normal and the area  
does not disarm. If a second code is entered, the  
area disarms and an Opening report is sent with the  
User ID of the first user. If the second code entered is  
the same as the first code, is invalid, or does not  
have L## Disarm authority, the keypad shows NO  
AUTHORITY and returns to idle text or entry delay.  
No  
A single pass code with a valid  
authority level can disarm the area.  
The Early Ambush disarming feature is intended for  
use when you disarm an area that is in the Master  
Armed state, but it can also be used with the  
Perimeter and Instant Armed states. After the first  
valid pass code is entered, the area is disarmed and  
the keypad displays the disarmed idle text normally.  
This function operates only when you use Passcode  
Disarm.  
D1260 Keypad  
In the D1260, after the first valid passcode is entered,  
the following message appears for 3 sec.  
If the second valid disarm pass code is entered, the  
D1255 Keypad shows CODE 2 VALIDATE and  
sounds the Watch Mode tone. Only the Watch Mode  
tone appears on the D720 Keypad.  
The D1260 Keypad sounds the Watch Mode tone  
and the following text appears.  
Then the next message appears requesting a second  
code.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 49  
Parameter Setup Requirement:  
To avoid the possibility of false alarms in  
Associate areas, do not use the A# Exit  
Restart feature in areas with A# Area  
Type set to Shared.  
The Early Ambush timer can be started and stopped  
only by pass codes with the L## Passcode Disarm  
authority.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
This prompt can be set to Yes or No.  
A# Arm No Exit  
To avoid unintended results for the end  
user of the system:  
• When a keypad is assigned to an area  
that has the Early Ambush feature  
enabled, set the CC# Scope value to  
Area Wide.  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
• If an area has A# Two Man Rule set  
to Yes, do not set A# Early Ambush  
to Yes.  
Yes  
No  
Switch the arming state to Perimeter  
if no Perimeter Delay point faults  
occurred.  
During an alarm, after the first pass code is entered,  
the Early Ambush timer still begins. A Cancel Report  
might be generated, depending upon the bell time,  
and the keypad displays Alarm Silenced normally. If  
the second valid disarm pass code is entered, the  
keypads indicate that the second pass code is valid.  
Refer to the Secondary Ambush Code prompt on  
page 140 for information about the unique behavior  
of the two pass codes.  
Keep the area in Master Arm if no  
Perimeter Delay point faults  
occurred.  
This parameter switches the arming state of an area  
from Master Armed to Perimeter Armed if no  
perimeter points with delay response were activated  
during the exit delay time. Only the final armed state  
is reported and displayed at the keypads.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
The A# Arm No Exit feature does not  
operate in areas with A# Area Type set  
to Shared.  
This feature is not allowed for use with  
SIA CP-01 compliant installations.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
A# Exit Restart  
A# Exit Restart can be set to Yes or No.  
A# Exit Warning  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Default:  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Delay armed points in this area  
restart the exit delay timer if violated  
during the exit delay time.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Pulse the alarm output for the last 10  
sec of the Exit Delay time.  
Delay armed points continue to count  
down normally if violated during the  
exit delay time.  
No  
Do not pulse the Alarm Bell output  
during the Exit Delay time.  
When enabled, the Alarm Bell output pulses on and  
off every 2 sec for the remaining 10 sec of the Exit  
Delay time.  
This feature must be disabled for UL Line  
Security/Encryption applications.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
A# Exit Warning must be set to Yes.  
When enabled, this feature activates when a  
controlled point with delay alarm response changes  
from normal to faulted and back to normal during the  
exit delay. When activated, if any controlled point in  
the same area with delay alarm response is faulted,  
the exit delay time restarts. The exit delay continues  
until it expires or the area changes arming states.  
This operation can occur only once in an arming  
cycle.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 50  
A# Entry Warning  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Pulse the alarm output for the last 10  
sec of the Entry Delay time.  
No  
Do not pulse the Alarm Bell output  
during the Entry Delay time.  
When enabled, the Alarm Bell output pulses on and  
off every 2 sec for the remaining 10 sec of the Entry  
Delay time.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
A# Entry Warning must be set to Yes.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 51  
2.10 Keypad (Command Center)  
This programming module contains three programming categories: Cmd Cntr Assignment, Area Text, and  
Custom Function.  
2.10.1 Keypad (Command Center) Assignment  
This programming category assigns a keypad to an area and determines if the keypad is supervised. The  
keypads are connected to the control panel using a two-wire serial data interface (SDI) bus.  
This bus can support up to eight supervised keypads, each with its own unique keypad address (CC) and  
corresponding DIP switch address settings. If the keypads are not supervised, you can install multiple keypads  
with the same DIP switch address setting for up to 32 unsupervised keypads.  
Cmd Center  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
DIP Switch Setting  
SDI  
CC#  
Address  
Number  
1
2
3
4
5
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Enter the keypad (CC) number for the SDI address you are programming. This number corresponds to the DIP  
switch address settings shown.  
CC# Supervised  
Keypads that share the same address  
setting display the same text and emit the  
same tones, regardless of which keypad’s  
keys are pressed.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
Trouble SDI # Reports are always  
reported as Area 1, Account 1 Events  
regardless of the area the SDI device is  
assigned.  
Ye Only one keypad can be installed for this CC  
SDI address.  
s
No More than one keypad can be installed using  
this CC SDI address with the same address  
DIP switch setting.  
When this prompt is Yes, you cannot  
have duplicate DIP switch settings.  
Supervise this SDI address and generate Trouble SDI  
Reports and local trouble annunciation if a problem  
occurs with this keypad or the SDI bus.  
When a D1260 Alpha V Keypad is  
assigned to a keypad address, you must  
program CC# Enhanced Command  
Center as Yes.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set CC#  
Supervised to Yes for the fire  
annunciation keypad.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 52  
CC# Area Assign  
The following prompt is visible only when  
you program CC## Scope to Custom. If  
you change the keypad scope selection  
to Custom from Panel Wide, Account, or  
Area, the settings from the previous CC#  
Scope selection become the default  
settings for the custom parameters in  
CC# A1 [through A8] in Scope. Before  
exiting from a custom program, check  
each area and ensure that it is enabled  
and disabled correctly.  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Blank is not a valid entry.  
Enter the area number where you are installing this  
keypad or keypads with this address and the same  
DIP switch settings.  
CC# Scope  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection:  
Panel Wide, Custom, No Keypad,  
Area, and Account  
Default:  
Refer to the preceding important  
note  
Panel  
Wide  
A panel-wide keypad can view  
information and perform Arming and  
Disarming functions for all areas in  
the control panel. A panel-wide  
keypad can cross account  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Include this area in the scope of this  
keypad.  
No  
Do not include this area in the scope  
of this keypad.  
boundaries. This is normally used  
with a master area.  
Determines whether any of the eight areas (Area 1 to  
Area 8) and Doors (Door 1 to Door 8) are included in  
the scope of this keypad for viewing status, arming or  
disarming, and controlling doors from the keypad.  
Account  
An Account keypad can view  
information, and perform Arming and  
Disarming functions for all areas with  
the same A# Acct Number, in Area  
Parameters. This is normally used for  
an associate area.  
CC# Entr Key Rly  
Default:  
Blank  
Area  
An area keypad is restricted to  
viewing information and Arming or  
Disarming functions for the area to  
which it is assigned.  
Selection:  
1 to 128, A, B, C, and Blank  
Blank  
The [ENTER] key is not used to  
activate a relay.  
Custom  
A custom keypad has no keypad  
restrictions.  
1 to 128,  
A, B, C  
Assign the relay number that  
activates when [ENTER] is pressed at  
this keypad after the user enters a  
valid pass code.  
No  
Keypad  
No keypad installed at this address.  
CALL FOR SERVICE display shows,  
indicating the control panel is not  
polling this address.  
Enter Key Relay: Program the relay number that  
activates momentarily for 10 sec when a user enters a  
valid pass code and presses the [ENTER] key on the  
keypad. Two events are generated when this function  
is used: RELAY ### SET with User ID, and RELAY  
### RESET without User ID. The system logs this  
action as two events.  
This program item is used to define the areas affected  
when an arming command is executed on this  
keypad, the areas this keypad can view, and the  
areas to which this keypad can move.  
Press the [SPACE] bar to scroll through the  
selections. Press [ENTER] when the correct selection  
appears in the display.  
•
Entering a valid code and pressing [ENTER]  
silences a ringing bell.  
•
Using CC# Entr Key Rly for a low-level access  
control strike on a door does not shunt a point.  
In applications where keypads include  
more than one area, active alarms in  
remote areas must be acknowledged  
before arming or disarming the local area.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 53  
CC# Assign Door  
When programmed to activate a relay, the  
[ENTER] key cannot be used for any  
other function.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
1 to 8, Blank  
Relays used for this function must not be  
shared with any other point, sensor reset,  
control panel, or bell functions. Sharing  
can cause errors in relay operation.  
Blank No door controller is assigned for adding  
tokens or the CLOSE DOOR # appears on  
the keypad.  
1 to 8 The door controller assigned to this keypad  
is used to read new tokens when the Add  
User Mode is initiated.  
CC# Entr Cycl Dr  
Default:  
No  
If the assigned door remains open and this keypad  
has the CC# Close Door Warning Tone set to Yes,  
the CLOSE DOOR # message appears on this  
keypad.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
The [ENTER] key is used to cycle the  
door programmed for CC Assign  
Door.  
• If a door is not programmed for this  
prompt and a door is not assigned to  
the area using the D# Entry Area in  
the RADAXS handler, 9210 NOT  
READY appears at this keypad when  
you attempt to add a user. The  
The [ENTER] key is not used to cycle  
the door.  
Enter Key Cycle Door: Program this prompt as Yes  
to start the door cycle sequence for the door number  
programmed in CC# Assign Door when a user  
enters a valid pass code and presses [ENTER]. This  
includes shunting the point assigned to the door.  
ACCESS GRANTED prints on the local printer and at  
the central station receiver, if programmed.  
message indicates that the control  
panel cannot start the Add User Mode  
until a door is assigned to this keypad.  
• Assigning a door to a keypad is not  
necessary for the user to control the  
door(s) using the Door Control  
function. Any door that is active can be  
controlled by a user who has the  
appropriate door control authority. The  
door control functions are available to  
a valid user at any keypad with access  
to the area where the door is  
• The service pass code cannot be used  
for the CC# Entr Cycl Dr application.  
• When programmed to activate a relay,  
the [ENTER] key cannot be used for  
any other function.  
• Relays used for this function must not  
be shared with any other point, sensor  
reset, control panel, or bell functions.  
Sharing can cause errors in relay  
operation.  
assigned.  
During the Add User Mode, tokens or  
cards, door control requests, and  
RTE/REX do not function. Put the Door  
Mode into an unlocked state before  
adding users if there is heavy activity for  
this door.  
• The door does not cycle if Entr Key  
Rly is programmed.  
• 9210 NOT READY appears at this  
keypad when you press [ENTER] if the  
D9210B is not programmed with a D#  
Entry Area (in the RADAXS handler)  
or if CC Assign Door does not have a  
door number assigned.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 54  
CC# Trouble Tone  
CC# Exit Tone  
Default:  
Yes  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Panel-wide trouble tones sound and  
visual displays show at this keypad.  
Yes  
No  
This keypad sounds entry tones.  
This keypad does not sound entry  
tones.  
No  
Panel-wide troubles do not sound.  
Visual displays still show.  
Determines whether this keypad, or any keypad with  
the same address setting, emits the exit delay tone  
during the delay arming of an area(s). Any keypad  
with a scope to arm this area can initiate the exit tone  
sequence.  
Determines whether this keypad, or any keypad with  
the same address setting, emits the panel-wide  
trouble tones (power, phone, SDI bus, and Zonex  
bus).  
This prompt allows you to manage the tone by  
keypad. Exit Tone can also be turned off when  
programming A# Exit Tone in Area Parameters.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set CC#  
Trouble Tone to Yes.  
The cadence and pitch of the exit tone increase for  
the last 10 sec of the exit delay time.  
Panel-wide trouble tones do not include  
Point Troubles, Buzz on Fault, or Close  
Door Now.  
This SIA CP-01 required feature is not  
supported on the D720 and D720B  
Keypads.  
Assign two CCs to the same area so one  
keypad emits the tone and another does  
not.  
Assign two CCs to the same area so one  
keypad emits the tone and another does  
not.  
CC# Entry Tone  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
CC# Exit Tone can be set to Yes or No.  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
CC# Arm Now Warn  
Yes  
No  
This keypad sounds entry tones.  
Default:  
No  
This keypad does not sound entry  
tones.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
This keypad activates a tone and  
displays PLEASE CLOSE NOW.  
Determines whether this keypad, or any keypad with  
the same address setting, emits the entry delay tone.  
Any Delay point within the area scope of this keypad  
starts the entry sequence.  
No  
This keypad does not activate the  
tone or display PLEASE CLOSE  
NOW.  
This prompt allows you to manage the  
tone by keypad. Entry Tone can also be  
turned off when programming your P##  
Entry Tone off in Point Index.  
Determines whether this keypad sounds a tone and  
displays the PLEASE CLOSE NOW warning on the  
keypad when a Closing Window activates, indicating  
the area automatically arms soon.  
Assign two CCs to the same area so one  
keypad emits the tone and another does  
not.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
CC# Entry Tone can be set to Yes or No.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 55  
CC# Close Door  
CC# Passcode Follows Scope  
Default:  
No  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes or No  
Yes  
This keypad sounds a tone and  
displays CLOSE DOOR #.  
Yes  
Master Arming allows a user to  
change the armed state of the areas  
within the scope of this keypad. If the  
areas in the scope are already at the  
intended armed state, they remain in  
that state.  
No  
This keypad does not sound the  
tone or activate the display.  
Determines whether this keypad sounds an audible  
tone and displays the CLOSE DOOR # warning on  
the keypad. This occurs when the door is physically  
held open past the shunt time and the extend time  
has a value greater than zero for the door assigned to  
this area in CC# Assign Door. Refer to the D9210B  
Program Entry Guide (P/N: 32207).  
•
If the area to which this keypad is  
assigned is armed, entering a  
valid pass code disarms this area  
and all other areas assigned to  
the scope of this keypad.  
•
If the area to which this keypad is  
assigned is disarmed, entering a  
valid pass code arms this area  
and all other areas assigned to  
the scope of this keypad.  
CC# EnhancCmdCtr  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
No  
Restricts the scope of the keypad to  
the Area programmed in CC# Area  
Assign for the purpose of executing  
L## Passcode Arm and  
Yes  
This keypad is a D1260 Alpha V  
Keypad.  
No  
This keypad is not a D1260 Alpha V  
Keypad.  
L## Passcode Disarm only.  
Use this program to determine if this keypad follows  
CC# Scope or if it only arms or disarms the area to  
which it is assigned. The user must have authority  
enabled in L## Passcode Arm and L## Passcode  
Disarm.This feature does not affect the Function List  
arming and disarming commands.  
When a D1260 Alpha V Keypad is installed at this  
keypad address, this item must be set to Yes.  
Reboot the system to enable an Alpha V  
keypad.  
To reboot the system, close and open the  
reset switch, labeled “S1 RESET,”  
located in the upper right corner of the  
control panel.  
Tokens and cards disarm according to  
this prompt. If this prompt is No, tokens  
disarm only the Area to which the CC# is  
assigned. The user must have disarming  
rights for tokens and cards programmed  
at the Disarm Level,. The user does not  
need disarming and arming authority for  
the keypad.  
You can use this prompt for a group of  
account-wide keypads that only arm the  
area to which they are assigned, even if  
the user has a pass code with arming  
authority rights in all areas.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 56  
CC# Scroll Lock  
CC# Abort Display  
Default:  
No  
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Prevents the idle system status text  
from scrolling automatically.  
Requires user intervention to  
advance.  
Yes  
No  
This keypad shows the Alarm  
Aborted message for all aborted  
alarms within its scope.  
This keypad does not show the  
Alarm Aborted message for all  
aborted alarms within its scope.  
No  
Allows the idle system status text to  
scroll automatically without user  
intervention  
This parameter enables or disables the ALARM NOT  
SENT message when an alarm is aborted before  
transmission occurs.  
Use this parameter to enable a special non-scrolling  
option for the idle system status display text on a  
keypad. This keypad mode requires the user to press  
the PREV or NEXT key on the keypad to unlock the  
display and begin scrolling through the system status  
displays.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
CC# Abort Display can be set to Yes or No.  
CC# Cancel Display  
CC# Menu Key Lock  
Default:  
Yes  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
This keypad shows the Cancel  
Report Sent message for all canceled  
alarms within its scope.  
Yes  
If set to Yes, the user is prompted to  
enter a pass code after pressing the  
Menu key on the keypad. The items  
programmed in the Menu List for this  
specific keypad are filtered by the  
user’s authority level. Only those  
items in the menu list for which the  
user has authority appear.  
This keypad does not show the  
Cancel Report Sent message for all  
canceled alarms within its scope.  
This parameter enables or disables the CANCEL RPT  
SENT display message when an alarm is canceled  
after transmission occurs. To show this message,  
Cancel Report must be set to Yes. Refer to Cancel  
Report on page 36.  
No  
If set to No, when the user presses  
the Menu key, all items that are  
programmed in the Menu List for the  
Command Center Address (Keypad  
Address) appear, regardless of the  
user’s authority level.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
CC# Cancel Display can be set to Yes or No.  
Determines if the Menu Key, when pressed, requires  
a pass code to access the functions.  
If this parameter is set to Yes, users must  
enter a pass code after pressing the  
Menu key. When the pass code is  
validated, only those functions for which  
the user has authority appear in the list. If  
a function in the Menu List is pass-code  
protected (refer to Keypad Functions in  
Section 2.11.2 User Interface on page)  
the user does not need to enter the pass  
code again.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 57  
Enter the text that appears when all areas sharing the  
same account number are master armed. The ACCT  
IS ON text appears at all keypads assigned to these  
areas, if more than one area has the same account  
number. The ACCT IS ON text also appears if only  
one area in the system is used. Refer to the prompts  
CC# Area Assign and Area # Acct Is On in Section  
2.10.1 Keypad (Command Center) Assignment on  
page 51. When all areas in the account are master  
armed, the Area # Is On text is replaced by the ACCT  
IS ON text if the area is armed before all other areas  
with the same account number.  
2.10.2 Area Text  
Use this programming category to create custom Idle  
Text displays for the keypads.  
Each display can be programmed with up  
to sixteen alphanumeric characters,  
including: A to Z, 0 to 9, ?, &, @, -, *,  
+, $, #, _, /.  
Characters not listed are invalid and  
cannot be used for text.  
Area  
Blank Entry  
A blank entry disables the ACCT IS ON display for  
this area. An account wide area shows the AREA # IS  
ON text instead of the ACCT IS ON text.  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Enter the area number you are programming.  
Unique ACCT IS ON Text  
Each area can have unique ACCT IS ON text, or you  
can program the same text in each area of the  
account so when all the areas in the account are  
armed, they all show the same text.  
Area# Is On  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Sixteen alphanumeric characters  
Selection:  
D1260 Alpha V Keypad  
Enter the text for this area that appears when the area  
is master armed or master instant armed and other  
areas sharing the same account number are not yet  
master armed. This display does not appear when the  
area is perimeter armed.  
Although it is not programmed in this area, the D1260  
Alpha V Keypad can display up to sixteen characters  
for an Area Name on line 1 of its display. The Area  
Text (Area # Is Off, Area # Not Ready, Area # Is On,  
and Acct # Is On) programmed in this module  
appears on line 2 of the D1260 Alpha V Keypad.  
When programming custom text, it should be logical  
to users viewing it on the D1260. For example, the  
Area Name Text can be programmed to display Front  
Office and the Area # Is Off text (programmed in this  
section) could be programmed to display Ready To  
Arm. The D1260 would then show on line 1 Front  
Office and on line 2, Ready To Arm.  
Area# Not Ready  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Sixteen alphanumeric characters  
Selection:  
Enter the text for this area that displays when the area  
is disarmed but points are faulted.  
Area# Is Off  
2.10.3 Custom Function  
Use custom functions to simplify complex keystroke  
sequences entered at the keypad. These items are  
similar to speed dialing on a telephone. When the  
custom function appears on the keypad, a user can  
execute a request by pressing [ENTER]. You can  
have up to sixteen custom functions and restrict their  
use by area and authority level.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Sixteen alphanumeric characters  
Selection:  
Enter the text for this area that displays when the area  
is disarmed and no points are faulted.  
Area# Acct Is On  
Each Custom Function ### item has sixteen  
characters of programmable text (CF### Text). When  
the Custom Function is assigned to the menu M##  
Function (refer to Section 2.12 Function List on page  
77) the user can press [PREV] or [NEXT] to scroll to  
CF### Text. The user accesses the menu by  
pressing [MENU] on the keypad.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Sixteen alphanumeric characters  
Selection:  
The user needs the appropriate authority level  
enabled for the L## C Function 128 to 143 in Section  
2.11 User Interface on page 60, to use the custom  
function.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 58  
Consider the scope of the keypad used to access the  
Custom Function. Each Custom Function is enabled  
in the function menu by M## CC Address 1 [through  
8] (refer to M## CC Address 1 [through 8] on page  
78). If the Custom Function is not assigned to a  
specific keypad address, it does not appear in the  
menu.  
The keystrokes simulate any sequence of keystrokes  
the user can perform at a keypad. You can program  
up to 32 keystrokes for each Custom Function.  
D5200 Data Entry  
Use the [↓] key on the D5200 to move the cursor to  
the first data entry line. To enter more than sixteen  
keystrokes, you must fill the first line of the data entry  
line before you move to the second line. If you make  
entries on the second line, and the first line has less  
than sixteen characters, the second line clears when  
you press [ENTER].  
Custom Function  
Default:  
128  
Selection:  
128 to 143  
Enter the Custom Function number you want to  
program. You can program up to sixteen Custom  
Functions, which are numbered 128 to 143.  
The scope of the keypad where you  
access the Function List can affect the  
way the Custom Function operates.  
CF### Text  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Figure 3: Softkey Locations on the D1260  
Keypad  
Selection:  
Sixteen alphanumeric characters.  
See Section 2.10.2 Area Text on  
page 57 for valid character entries.  
Determines the menu text displayed at the keypad for  
the custom function item. Use this text to represent  
the functions performed by this menu item.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CF### Key Strokes  
8
Table 25: CF### Key Strokes  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection Up to 32 characters: 0 to 9, A, B, C, D, E  
:
1
ABC  
JKL  
TUV  
0
DEF  
2
5
8
3
6
9
GHI  
MNO  
4
7
D1255  
Faceplate  
WXY  
PRS  
#
*
COMMAND  
ENTER  
Selection D1255 Key  
Label  
D1260 Key  
0 to 9  
0 to 9  
0 to 9  
[COMMAND ]  
A
B
[COMMAND]  
[PREV]  
NA  
(previous)  
1 - Softkey 1 (C1)  
2 - Softkey 2 (C2)  
3 - Softkey 3 (C3)  
4 - Softkey 4 (C4)  
5 - Softkey 5 (C5)  
6 - Softkey 6 (C6)  
7 - Softkey 7 (C7)  
8 - Softkey 8 (C8)  
C
[ESC]  
(escape)  
MENU  
YES  
NA  
D
[NEXT]  
NA  
E
[ENT] {enter}  
[#ENTER]  
(softkey 1)  
{softkey 2)  
(softkey 3)  
{softkey 4)  
(softkey 5)  
{softkey 6)  
(softkey 7)  
{softkey 8)  
C1*  
C2*  
C3*  
C4*  
C5*  
C6*  
C7*  
C8*  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
*
Softkey selections are stored as two keystrokes.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
•
EN | 59  
For example: The Change Display (COMMAND  
49) function has three sub-functions: Bright  
Display, Dim Display, and Date/Time Display.  
Programming Custom Function Keystrokes  
•
Find the command you want to execute in the  
User Interface section of the program record  
sheet. Single digit commands must be  
programmed with 9 as the second digit.  
-
-
-
To turn up the display, enter:  
[A][4][9][E]  
To dim the display, enter:  
[A][4][9][D][E]  
Table 26: CF### Custom Function Keystrokes  
To display time and date, enter:  
[A][4][9][B][E]  
Command  
Keystroke  
A19  
1 (Master arm area)  
2 (Perimeter instant arm)  
3 (Perimeter delay arm)  
6 (Watch Mode)  
•
Custom Functions can perform several tasks at  
one time. For example:  
A29  
A39  
A69  
−
To toggle relays 7, 8, and 9 in one Custom  
Function enter:  
7 (Special alert)  
A79  
[A] [5] [4] [7] [E] [E] [8] [E] [E] [9] [E] [E] [C]  
8 (Perimeter partial arm)  
9 ( Special alert)  
A89  
A99  
−
To add a temporary pass code, enter:  
[A] [5] [6] [3] [0] [E] [E] [9] [8] [7] [E] [E] [D] [E]  
[1] [E] [1] [E] [1] [E] [1] [E] [1] [E] [1] [E] [1] [E]  
[1] [E] [C]  
This adds user 30, pass code 987 with  
authority level 1 in all areas.  
0 (Bypass a point)  
A09  
•
•
When CF### Custom Function is programmed  
with P, the corresponding custom function  
number is passcode protected. The CF###  
Custom Function prompt is under GV2MAIN >  
User Interface > Cmd Center Functions. The  
passcode protected custom function can be  
added to a keypad’s function list by programming  
its number in the GV2MAIN > Function List > M#  
Function prompt.  
−
To delete the pass code, enter:  
[A] [5] [3] [3] [0] [E] [E] [E] [C]  
To program multiple-area Arming or Disarming  
functions, use keystroke sequences including  
COMMAND 50 (Move to Area) and  
COMMAND 1.  
128 to 143 Enable Custom Function 128  
through 143, (Menu Function only): This  
function determines if a pass code is needed to  
access a Custom Function from the menu list.  
ENTER PASSCODE (or Enter Passcode + Enter  
Key on the D1260) appears when this function is  
pass-code protected.  
Custom function cannot be used to  
change time (such as Daylight Saving  
Time). Use Skeds S## Function Codes  
13 and 14 to adjust for Daylight Saving  
Time (refer to S## Custom Function  
prompt in Section 5.2 Skeds on page  
115.  
If a command within the Custom Function  
is pass-code protected, ENTER  
Example 1  
Execute the third function in a keypad menu function  
list:  
PASSCODE appears at the keypad. The  
user must enter a valid pass code before  
proceeding with the rest of the Custom  
Function. If a pass code is not entered  
within 10 sec, the Custom Function times  
out and the display returns to idle text.  
D1255 CDDE  
D1260 C8C7C5  
The custom functions in Example 1 are  
not compatible between keypad types.  
Skeds cannot execute Custom Functions  
that are pass-code protected. The D720  
LED keypad does not support Custom  
Functions that are pass-code protected.  
Example 2  
Instant master Arm (CMD 11):  
D1255 A11  
Some functions cannot be entered directly  
because they are nested inside a higher-level  
function. To automatically execute these  
functions, you must add the appropriate  
keystrokes.  
D1260 A11  
The custom functions in Example 2 are  
compatible between keypad types.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 60  
2.11.2 Keypad Selections  
Programming choices in this section determine if  
keypad functions are disabled (blank), enabled (E), or  
passcode (P) restricted.  
The D9000GV2 control panel series uses  
separate keystrokes to program the  
custom functions that accurately  
represent the two separate user  
interfaces, the D1255 and D1260  
keypads.  
Press the [SPACE] bar to scroll through the  
selections. Press [ENTER] when the correct selection  
appears in the display.  
Custom functions written for the D1255  
that use the [PREV], [ESC], and [NEXT]  
keys do not work on the D1260.  
Table 27: Keypad Programming Choices  
Custom function written for the D1260  
that use the softkeys (located on the  
sides of the keypad display) do not work  
when executed from the D1255 keypad.  
Selection  
Description  
Blank  
Disable the function panel-wide.  
The keypad shows NO  
AUTHORITY if you access the  
function using a command or the  
Function List.  
Enable the function panel-wide.  
The function can be executed  
without entering a pass code.  
Pass code required. When the  
pass code is entered at the  
keypad, the control panel checks  
the user’s authority level. Refer to  
Section 2.11.4 Authority Level  
Selections on page 67.  
2.11 User Interface  
Define which functions can be used by each of the  
fourteen user authority levels. Each user can be  
assigned the same or different authority level by area.  
The user has rights in the area where the keypad is  
assigned, based on the authority level assigned to the  
user’s pass code for that area.  
E
P
When the pass code is entered at the keypad, the  
control panel checks the authority level. The control  
panel executes the function only in areas where the  
pass code has the authority to use the function.  
2.11.1 Commands  
Similar to command initiation used in other Bosch  
Security Systems, Inc. products, the Commands  
method provides continuity in the arming commands  
across product lines and makes an easy transition for  
dealers using other Bosch Security Systems, Inc.  
products. With commands, the end user presses  
[COMMAND] and then the numeral of the command  
to initiate. For example, [COMMAND][2] arms the  
perimeter of the area. Some prompts can be  
accessed only from a menu. These prompts are  
indicated by (Menu Function only). To access these  
functions, press [MENU], enter the function number,  
and use the [PREV] and [NEXT] keys to scroll through  
the choices.  
Refer to Section 2.11.4 Authority Level  
Selections on page 67 for a detailed  
description of the functions on the  
following pages. These parameters  
determine only if the authority level  
functions are pass-code protected.  
The D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Program Record Sheet  
(P/N: F01U003635) lists the commands available with  
the system. Command numbers are shown in the  
column labeled Command. If a particular function  
does not have a command number, it can be  
accessed only through the Function List.  
If you plan to use only commands to operate the  
system, and to arm and disarm by entering a pass  
code, you do not need to program Custom Function  
or Function List.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 61  
Perim Instant  
Master Arm Delay  
Default:  
P
Default:  
P
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
P
Pass code: Required for all users  
with Master Arm Delay enabled for  
their authority level.  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
4
Perimeter Instant  
Arm  
[COMMAND][2]  
E
Enable: A user does not need a pass  
Instant arms all perimeter points with point response  
that starts an instant alarm (refer to P## Pt Response  
in Section 4.2 Point Responses on page 92) in the  
area where the keypad is assigned. Entry and exit  
delays are not provided with this arming function.  
This function causes a Perimeter Delay point to act as  
a Perimeter Instant point.  
code to use [COMMAND][1].  
Blank  
Disable Master Arm Delay cannot be  
accessed in the function menu or  
started with a command even if this  
function is enabled for the user’s  
authority level.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
2
Master Arm Delay [COMMAND][1]  
This feature is not allowed in SIA CP-01  
compliant installations.  
Use this arming function to master arm disarmed  
areas. If enabled, the following arming choices are  
available to the user with this authority.  
Perim Delay  
Mstr Arm Inst  
Default:  
P
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
5
Perimeter Delay  
Arm  
[COMMAND][3]  
3
Master Arm  
Instant  
[COMMAND][1][1]  
Delay arms all Perimeter points in the area where the  
keypad is assigned. Entry and exit delays are  
provided with this Arming function. This function does  
not cause a Perimeter Instant point to act as a Delay  
point.  
Use this arming function to master arm instant areas  
that are disarmed. Entry and exit delays are not  
provided with this arming function. This causes a  
Perimeter and Interior Delay point to act as an Instant  
point.  
Watch Mode  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
Default:  
E
This feature is not allowed to be used  
with SIA CP-01 compliant installations.  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
6
Watch Mode  
[COMMAND][6]  
This function informs you when a perimeter point or  
interior point that is programmed as P## Watch Point  
is faulted while the area is disarmed. Interior points do  
not emit a Watch Tone if the area is perimeter armed.  
This function provides keypad audible or visual and  
optional relay activation (refer to A # Watch Mode in  
Section 2.13.1 Area Relays on page 79).  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 62  
Perim Partial  
View Memory  
Default:  
P
Default:  
E
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function Name  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function Name  
Function  
No.  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
7
Perimeter Partial  
Arm  
[COMMAND][8]  
9
View Event  
Memory  
[COMMAND][4][0]  
Use this function to arm normal perimeter points and  
force-bypass faulted perimeter points, regardless of  
their P## Bypassable setting. When these force-  
bypassed perimeter points return to normal, they  
automatically return to service, even if P## FA  
Returnable is set to No.  
Use this function to view prior alarm, trouble, and  
supervisory activity occurring since the last time the  
system armed. Event memory is not cleared until the  
area re-arms.  
View Pt Status  
Perimeter Partial arming has entry and exit delays.  
Default:  
E
Perim Partial ignores the A# FA Bypass  
Max entry in Section 2.9 Area  
Parameters on page 36.  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
10  
View Point Status (Menu function  
only)  
Local Only Reporting: No Closing  
Report is sent to the central station, but a  
Perimeter Delay Closing Event is  
generated in the event log.  
Use this function to view points assigned to the area  
where the keypad is assigned. This function shows  
point text and the electrical condition (normal, open,  
short, and missing) of each point in the area.  
View Area Stat  
Walk Test  
Default:  
P
Default:  
E
Selection: Blank, E, or P  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
8
View Area Status (Menu function  
only)  
11  
Walk Test  
[COMMAND][4][4]  
Use this function to view the armed status of all areas  
within the scope of the keypad assigned to this area.  
The armed states include A# AREA # IS OFF  
(disarmed), A# AREA # IS ON (master delay armed),  
ALL ON INSTANT (master instant armed), and AREA  
# PERIM ON (perimeter instant armed or perimeter  
delay armed). All area types, master, associate,  
regular, and shared can be viewed using this function.  
Use this function to test Controlled points in areas  
within the keypad’s scope without sending reports to  
the central station. 24-hour points cannot be tested  
using this Walk Test Mode.  
Fire Test  
Default:  
P
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
12  
Fire Test  
[COMMAND][5][8]  
Use this function to test 24-hour points in areas within  
the scope of the keypad where the function is  
entered. Controlled points, P## Type 1, 2, 3, cannot  
be tested using the Fire Walk Test Mode.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 63  
Send Report  
Chg Display  
Default:  
P
Default:  
E
Selection:  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
13  
Send Report  
[COMMAND][4][1]  
or  
[COMMAND][4][2]  
15  
Change Display  
[COMMAND][4][9]  
Use this function to select either a bright or dim  
display with loud or soft keypad warning tones. You  
can also choose the time and date display.  
Use this function to test the communication link  
between the control panel and the central station  
receiver(s). It can send a Test Report or a Status  
Report to the phone numbers programmed in  
Routing. The Test Report includes additional  
information if Expand Test Rpt is enabled in  
Section 2.1 Phone on page 11.  
Chg Time/Date  
Default:  
E
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
2.11.3 Access Control Functions  
Door Control  
16  
Change Time  
and Date  
[COMMAND][4][5]  
Default:  
P
Use this function to set the time and date in the  
control panel.  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Chg Passcode  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Default:  
P
14  
Door Control  
[COMMAND][4][6]  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
#14 Door Control [COMMAND][4][6])  
This top level display must be enabled for the user to  
access the cycle door, unlock door, and secure door  
functions (refer to Section 2.11.4 Authority Level  
Selections on page 67). Use this item when  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
17  
Change  
Passcodes  
[COMMAND][5][5]  
programming door control in your function menu.  
Use this function to change your pass code. This is a  
panel-wide function that can be executed from any  
keypad assigned to an area where the user has  
authority.  
Access Ctl Level  
Default:  
P
Refer to Section 2.11.4 Authority Level  
Selections on page 67 for a detailed  
description of the functions on the  
following pages. These parameters  
determine only if the authority level  
functions are pass-code protected.  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
37  
Access Control  
Levels  
(Menu function  
only)  
Shows the current on or off state of control levels 1  
through 14, pertaining to Access Control Only, (L##  
Access Level and L## Disarm Level). The user can  
toggle levels on and off and invalidate access control  
levels during an extended period. This change only  
affects the user’s token or cards; it does not affect  
keypad Door Control functions.  
Regardless of whether an E or a P is  
entered when a COMMAND 55 is  
performed, the keypad asks for the user’s  
current pass code first.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 64  
Add User  
View Log  
Default:  
P
Default:  
E
Selection:  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
18  
Add User  
[COMMAND][5][6]  
21  
View Log  
(Menu function  
only)  
Use this function to add or change pass codes, add or  
change tokens or cards and Sub-users, and add or  
change control panel authority levels (L##) by area.  
Use this function to view all of the system events,  
their time stamps, User IDs, or point numbers. User  
Name and Point Text are not stored in the event log,  
but they appear when the control panel matches them  
with the User ID ### and the Point ###.  
Del User  
Default:  
P
Each event appears on one line in the log. Any  
information related to that event appears on a  
separate line in the log.  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Because events in the log are not uniform in length,  
the control panel can store from 500 to 1000 events.  
19  
Delete User  
[COMMAND][5][3]  
Use this function to delete a user’s pass code and  
tokens or cards. It does not delete user names.  
Print Log  
Default:  
P
This function deletes the pass code,  
master user, and all sub-users  
associated with the user number.  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
22  
Print Event Log  
(Menu function  
only)  
Extend Close  
Use this function to print all the events stored in the  
control panel beginning at the start date and ending  
with the last event in the log.  
Default:  
P
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
User Cmd 7  
20  
Extend Close  
[COMMAND][5][1]  
Default:  
P
Use this function to change the expected closing time  
for the area. The window cannot be adjusted until the  
Close Early Begin time passes and the Closing  
Window is active.  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
23  
User COMMAND [COMMAND][7]  
7
Use this function to activate an alarm programmed in  
COMMAND 7 in the RADXPNTS Handler.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 65  
User Cmd 9  
Reset Sensors  
Default:  
E
Default:  
P
Selection:  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
27  
Reset Sensors  
[COMMAND][4][7]  
24  
User COMMAND [COMMAND][9]  
9
Use this function to activate the Reset Sensors  
function for Fire or Intrusion points programmed as  
P## Resettable in Section 4.1 Point Index on page  
101. Points within the scope of the keypad where the  
function is entered reset. Refer to Section 2.10.1  
Keypad (Command Center) Assignment on page 51.  
Use this function to activate an alarm programmed in  
COMMAND 9 in the RADXPNTS Handler.  
Bypass a Pt  
Default:  
P
Change Relay  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Default:  
P
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
25  
Bypass a Point  
[COMMAND][0]  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Use this function to bypass individual points that have  
P## Bypassable enabled. Points within the scope of  
the keypad can be bypassed where the function is  
entered (refer to Section 2.10.1 Keypad (Command  
Center) Assignment) on page 51.  
28  
Change Relays  
[COMMAND][5][4]  
Use this function to manually set and reset Relays 1  
through 128 (1 through 64 in a D7412GV2) that are  
installed in the system.  
The control panel ignores alarms and troubles, and  
does not display point faults when a point is  
bypassed.  
Remote Program  
Default:  
P
Unbypass a Pt  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Default:  
P
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
29  
Remote  
Programming  
[COMMAND][4][3]  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Use this function to start remote programming  
software (RPS) sessions. When the phone is ringing  
at the control panel, starting this function causes the  
control panel to seize the line.  
26  
Unbypass a Point [COMMAND][0][0]  
Use this function to unbypass individual points that  
are programmed either P## FA Retrnable or P##  
Bypass Returnable. Points within the scope of the  
keypad can be unbypassed where the function is  
entered (refer to Section 2.10.1 Keypad (Command  
Center) Assignment) on page 51. The control panel  
responds to alarms and troubles, and displays point  
faults when a point is unbypassed.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 66  
Move to Area  
Default Text  
Default:  
P
Default:  
P
Selection:  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function Name  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
30  
Move to Area  
[COMMAND][5][0]  
34  
Default Text  
[COMMAND][5][7]  
Use this function to switch the keypad’s assignment  
temporarily to a different area. This command can be  
used to perform any function that can be performed  
by a keypad assigned to the area in programming.  
Determining the armed state of an area using the  
programmed custom text might be difficult. Use this  
function to switch temporarily to the control panel  
default text, shown on the program record sheet.  
Users are limited to performing functions enabled by  
the authority level they have in the area to which the  
keypad is moved. After 15 sec of no activity at the  
keypad, the keypad reverts back to the originally  
programmed area.  
Change Skeds  
Default:  
P
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Display Rev  
35  
Change Skeds  
[COMMAND][5][2]  
Default:  
E
Execute this panel-wide function from any keypad  
assigned to an area where the user has authority.  
Use this function to change the S## Time from the  
keypad to make adjustments to Skeds.  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
32  
Display Software  
Revision  
[COMMAND][5][9]  
Invisible Walk Test  
Use this function to show the control panel’s software  
revision number in the keypad display.  
Default:  
P
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Service Walk  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Default:  
P
Selection:  
36  
Invisible Walk Test  
(Menu function only)  
Blank, E, or P  
This function allows a user with the L## Invisible  
Walk Test authority to test invisible interior or  
perimeter controlled points that are within the scope  
of the keypad, without sending reports to the central  
station. Invisible points must have the P## Invisible  
Pt function programmed Yes.  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
33  
Service Walk  
Test  
(Menu function  
only)  
Use this function to Walk Test all 246 points in the  
entire control panel regardless of the P## Type.  
The Service Walk Test is available on the  
D9412GV2 using the Service Menu  
[9][9][ENT]. The D7412GV2 does not  
include the Service Walk Test in the  
Service Menu. In the D7412GV2, the  
Service Walk Test function must be  
enabled in the Function List to access the  
Service Walk Test.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 67  
Custom Functions  
Authority Level  
C Function 128 [through 143]  
Default:  
1
Default:  
E
Selection:  
1 to 14  
Selection:  
Blank, E, or P  
Enter the number of the authority level you want to  
program. Authority Level 15 (Service Passcode)  
cannot be edited.  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
To determine the L## default values on  
pages 67 through 76, refer to the User  
Interface section for the GV2MAIN  
Handler in the program record sheet.  
128 through  
143  
Enable Custom  
Functions 128  
through 143  
(Menu function  
only)  
When enabled, Custom Function determines if a pass  
code is required when accessing a custom function  
from the menu list. ENTER PASSCODE (or Enter  
Passcode + Enter Key on the D1260) appears when  
this function is pass-code protected. If a command  
within the Custom Function is pass-code protected,  
the keypad displays ENTER PASSCODE (or Enter  
Passcode + Enter Key on the D1260) and waits for  
the user to enter a valid pass code before proceeding  
with the rest of the Custom Function. If a pass code is  
not entered within 10 sec, the Custom Function times  
out and the display returns to idle text.  
L## Disarm  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Disarm  
1
Use the disarming function to disarm areas that are  
master armed or perimeter armed. If enabled, the  
following disarming choices are available to the user  
with this authority:  
2.11.4 Authority Level Selections  
Use Section 2.11.4 Authority Level Selections on  
page 67 to determine which Authority Level can  
access keypad functions that are pass-code  
protected. Selecting Enable items in the Authority  
Level section is not necessary if the keypad function  
is disabled or enabled. Each individual function has  
two selections you can use for the authority level you  
are programming.  
•
DISARM ALL: Disarms all areas within the CC#  
Scope of the keypad being used by accessing  
the Function Menu and the authority level of the  
user performing the function.  
•
DISARM AREA: Disarms only the displayed  
area.  
Many options are available for arming  
and disarming. Selecting an option  
depends on A# Area Type and CC#  
Scope. Read the definitions of area type  
in Section 2.9 Area Parameters on page  
5 and CC# Scope in Section 2.10.1  
Keypad (Command Center) Assignment  
on page 51.  
Press the [SPACE] bar to scroll through the  
selections. Press [ENTER] when the correct selection  
appears in the display.  
Table 28: Authority Level Selections  
Authority  
Level  
Description  
Blank  
Disabled: This function is not  
authorized for the user who is  
assigned this authority level.  
E
Enabled: This function is  
authorized for the user who is  
assigned this authority level.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 68  
L## Master Arm Delay  
L## Perim Delay  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
Selection Blank or E  
:
Selection:  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
5
Perimeter Delay  
Arm  
[COMMAND][3]  
2
Master Arm  
Delay  
[COMMAND][1]  
Delay arm all Perimeter Delay point responses only in  
the area where the keypad is assigned.  
Master arms areas based on the CC# Scope of the  
keypad using an exit delay time.  
L## Watch Mode  
When this item is accessed through the Function List,  
Master Arm All allows the user to arm all areas  
according to the authority level of the user and within  
the CC# Scope of the keypad using an exit delay  
time.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
Selection:  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Arm Area arms only the area displayed. If COMMAND  
1 is used, it arms only the area where the keypad is  
assigned.  
6
Watch Mode  
[COMMAND][6]  
Initiate the Watch Mode in the area to which this  
keypad is assigned.  
L## Mstr Arm Inst  
L## Perim Partial  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
Selection: Blank or E  
Selection:  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
3
Master Arm  
Instant  
[COMMAND][1][1]  
Keystroke  
7
Perimeter Partial  
Arm  
[COMMAND][8]  
This authority level permission allows a user to  
execute the Master Arm Inst function. Refer to Mstr  
Arm Inst on page61.  
Partially arms only the area where the keypad is  
assigned.  
Arm Area arms only the area to which the keypad is  
assigned.  
This function ignores the A# FA Bypass  
Max entry in Area Parameters.  
If COMMAND 11 is used, it arms only the area where  
the keypad is assigned.  
Local Only Reporting: No Closing  
Report is sent to the central station, but a  
Perimeter Delay Closing Event is  
generated in the event log.  
Use COMMAND 11 carefully because all  
Perimeter and Interior points become  
Instant Armed.  
L## Perim Instant  
L## View Area Stat  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
4
Perimeter Instant [COMMAND][2]  
Arm  
8
View Area Status (Menu function  
only)  
Instant arm all Perimeter points, including Delayed  
points, only in the area where the keypad is assigned.  
View the current arm or disarm status and the not  
ready to arm status of all areas within the scope of the  
keypad in this area. The user needs arming and  
disarming authority.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 69  
•
If enabled in Routing, Walk Start and Walk End  
Reports are sent to the central station receiver at  
the beginning and end of the test.  
L## View Memory  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
To Walk Test a Door point connected to a  
D9210B Access Interface Module, open  
the door without activating the door  
sequence or allowing it to time out past  
the extended shunt time.  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
9
View Event  
Memory  
[COMMAND][4][0]  
View all memory events that occurred since the last  
time the system was armed for all areas within the  
scope of the keypad in this area.  
L## Fire Test  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
L## View Pt Status  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
12  
Fiire Test  
[COMMAND][5][8]  
Fire Walk Test all 24-hour points in the area where  
this keypad is assigned.  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
10  
View Point Status (Menu function  
only)  
One person can perform a Fire Walk Test without  
assistance. The following features come with the Fire  
Test Mode:  
View the current status of all points in the area to  
which this keypad is assigned.  
•
Battery powered control panel only. A Battery  
Test runs during the whole test to ensure that the  
battery capacity is capable of supporting the full  
load of the control panel if AC fails.  
L## Walk Test  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
-
This test includes a 2-sec Bell Test (Fire Bell  
relay) for each Fire point that is tested.  
Selection:  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
-
The test ends when all points are tested or  
the test times out after 20 min of no activity.  
11  
Walk Test  
[COMMAND][4][4]  
•
•
•
Local alarm annunciation and event printing; no  
reports are sent to the central station receiver.  
Walk Test all Interior or Perimeter Controlled points in  
the area to which this keypad is assigned.  
Automatic smoke detectors reset for all Fire  
points programmed with P## Resettable as Yes.  
The following features come with the Walk Test  
Mode:  
D1255 Keypad displays a sequential count and  
the text for the point after each point is activated  
and restored.  
•
Battery powered control panel only. A Battery  
Test runs during the whole test to ensure that the  
battery capacity is capable of supporting the full  
load of the control panel if AC fails.  
•
If enabled in Routing, Walk Start and Walk End  
Reports are sent to the central station receiver at  
the beginning and end of the test.  
-
This test includes 2-sec Bell Test when the  
Walk Test starts.  
A# Verify Time for Fire points that is  
programmed with Yes for P## Alarm  
Verify is ignored during the Fire Walk  
Test.  
-
The test ends when all points are tested or  
the test times out after 20 min of no activity.  
•
•
•
Local alarm annunciation and event printing; no  
reports are sent to the central station receiver.  
D1255 Keypad displays a sequential count, and  
text after each point is activated and restored.  
The keypad displays ALL PTS TESTED and an  
All Points Tested Event is sent to the central  
station receiver (if programmed) when the last  
point is tested.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 70  
Default: Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
L## Send Report  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
Selection:  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Cycle Door  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
(None)  
(Menu function  
only)  
13  
Send Report  
[COMMAND][4][1]  
or  
[COMMAND][4][2]  
Cycle Door (Menu Function only)  
Send a Test Report from any keypad assigned to an  
area where the user has authority.  
To cycle the doors, press number [1] through [8] on  
the keypad, corresponding to the door number. For  
example, pressing [2] and [ENTER] cycles door  
number 2, which is indicated by C in the display.  
Refer to “Cycle Door” in Table 29 on page 71.  
Access Control Functions  
Use the following functions to control the doors from  
the keypad. Users can have authority to access the  
Door Control and can use all or part of the functions  
within.  
Cycle Door allows the user with this authority level to  
access the CYCLE? 12345678 function.  
All doors display when this function is  
selected. This function does not follow  
the scope of the keypad.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
L## Door Control  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Unlock Door  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
(None)  
(Menu function  
only)  
Selection: Blank or E  
To unlock or relock a door, press number [1] through  
[8] on the keypad, correspoding to the door number  
(refer to “Unlock Door” in Table 29 on page 71). For  
example, pressing [2] and [ENTER] unlocks door  
number 2. The display indicates “U’ (for unlock door)  
with the door number. Select the same door number  
again and press [Enter] to relock the door.  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Door Control  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
14  
[COMMAND][4][6]  
This item only allows programming access to the  
following three sub-prompts. It does not affect the  
user’s access to Cycle Door, Unlock Door, and  
Secure Door.  
Unlock Door allows the user with this authority level to  
access the UNLOCK? 12345678 function.  
Cycle Door, Unlock Door, and Secure  
Door cannot be accessed through the  
Function List. Door Control must be  
added to the Function List to access the  
door control functions, or COMMAND 46  
can be used.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
Selection:  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
The following prompts are sub-functions of Door  
Control. They become visible in the D5200  
Programmer when you Enable Door Control and  
press [ENTER] on the D5200.  
(None)  
Secure Door  
(Menu function  
only)  
Press number [1] through [8] on the keypad,  
corresponding to the door number to secure or  
unsecure a door (refer to “Secure Door” in Table 29  
on page 71).For example, pressing [2] and [ENTER]  
secures door number 2, which is indicated by an X in  
the display.  
Cycle Door must be enabled for all three  
sub-functions to operate. If Cycle Door is  
disabled, all three sub-functions do not  
operate.  
Secure Door allows the user with this authority level  
to access the SECURE? 12345678 function.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 71  
General Functions  
L## Chg Display  
Table 29: L## Secure Door-Door Mode  
Definitions  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
Door State Definition  
Selection:  
Lock Door  
Normal Door: When a door is in the  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Lock Door state, one can initiate the  
door sequence using Skeds, CYCLE  
DOOR?, keypad functions, door  
requests, and valid token or card  
requests.  
No Access Allowed: When a door is  
in the Secure Door state, no access  
is allowed through the door until it is  
returned to the Lock Door state. The  
Secure Door state includes Sked and  
keypad functions.  
15  
Change Display  
[COMMAND][4][9]  
Change the display (bright display, dim display, and  
time display) in the area where this keypad is  
assigned.  
Secure  
Door  
L## Chg Time/Date  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
Selection:  
Unlock  
Door  
Free Access: When a door is in the  
Unlocked Door state, the door is  
already shunted and the door strike  
does not prevent the door from  
opening. In this state, the user does  
not need to activate a door request or  
present a valid token or card.  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
16  
Change Time  
and Date  
[COMMAND][4][5]  
Change the date and time for the control panel in this  
area.  
Cycle Door Momentary Access: This is a  
temporary Door Mode in which the  
door initiates the door sequence as if  
a valid token or card was read. This  
state occurs using the keypad and  
remote programming software (RPS).  
A sked cannot activate this state.  
L## Chg Passcode  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
Selection:  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
17  
Change  
[COMMAND][5][5]  
Passcodes  
L## Access Ctl Lvl  
Change a user pass code.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
L## Add User  
Selection:  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Selection:  
Keystroke  
37  
Access Control  
Levels  
(Menu function  
only)  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
18  
Add User  
[COMMAND][5][6]  
Changing the Access Control Level in  
any area affects all users and all doors  
associated with that level for all areas.  
Add or change users, add or change authority levels,  
add or change tokens or cards.  
9210 NOT READY appears if a door  
controller is not assigned to the keypad  
used to add or change tokens or cards.  
Refer to CC# Assign Door in Section  
2.10.1 Keypad (Command Center)  
Assignment on page 53.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 72  
L## Del User  
L## Print Log  
Default: Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Delete User  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Print Event Log  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
19  
[COMMAND][5][3]  
22  
(Menu function  
only)  
Delete users.  
Print all panel-wide events from the log to the printer  
in the area where the user is executing this function.  
Although an individual user (001 through  
249) can be deleted separately, use  
caution with this function. User pass  
codes, tokens or cards cannot be deleted  
individually within a group. (For example,  
User 001 has three additional sub-users  
that use the same authority levels for that  
group.) When dealing with an individual  
user, change that user’s token or pass  
code so that other users in the group do  
not need to be added again.  
This item can also be accessed using the  
Service Menu ([9][9][ENT]).  
L## User Cmd 7  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
L## Extend Close  
23  
User Command 7 [COMMAND][7]  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
This command can be used in Function Menu.  
Generate the alarm programmed at COMMAND 7 in  
the RADXPNTS Handler.  
Selection:  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
L## User Cmd 9  
20  
Extend Close  
[COMMAND][5][1]  
Change the closing time in the area where the  
function is entered.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
L## View Log  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank or E  
24  
User Command 9 [COMMAND][9]  
Selection:  
This command can be used in Function Menu.  
Generate the alarm programmed at COMMAND 9 in  
the RADXPNTS Handler.  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
21  
View Log  
(Menu function  
only)  
L## Bypass a Pt  
View all panel-wide events in the control panel’s  
memory log.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Bypass a Point  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
25  
[COMMAND][0]  
Bypass points with this authority level.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 73  
L## Unbypass a Pt  
L## Move to Area  
Default: Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
26  
Unbypass a Point [COMMAND][0][0]  
30  
Move to Area  
[COMMAND][5][0]  
Unbypass points with this authority level.  
Temporarily switch to a different area and perform  
keypad functions related to that area.  
L## Reset Sensors  
L## Display Rev  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
27  
Reset Sensors  
[COMMAND][4][7]  
32  
Display Software  
Revision  
[COMMAND][5][9]  
Reset sensors with this authority level.  
L## Change Relay  
Display the control panel model name and software  
revision. For example:  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
9412GV2 REV ##.##  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
28  
Change Relays  
[COMMAND][5][4]  
Manually activate or reset a system relay.  
Do not use the Chg Relays? function to  
toggle relays reserved for special  
functions. Special function relays are  
Area and Panel Wide Relay functions as  
well as relays assigned to CC# Entr Key  
Rly?  
L## Remote Program  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
29  
Remote  
[COMMAND][4][3]  
Programming  
Start a remote programming software (RPS) session  
when the phone rings at the control panel.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 74  
L## Service Walk  
L## Default Text  
Default: Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
33  
Service Walk  
Test  
(Menu function  
only)  
34  
Default Text  
[COMMAND][5][7]  
Temporarily show the armed state of the area using  
control panel default text, A# AREA # IS ON, A# NOT  
READY, A# AREA # IS OFF, and A# ACCOUNT IS  
ON.  
Start a Service Walk Test for all 24-hour Interior or  
Perimeter Controlled points in the control panel.  
Points are not included in this test if:  
•
•
•
Points are in an area that is already in a Walk  
Test Mode.  
L## Change Skeds  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Points are assigned to an area that is not enabled  
A# Area On.  
Selection: Blank or E  
Points are in an area that is Master or Perimeter  
armed.  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Change Skeds  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
35  
[COMMAND][5][2]  
When a Service Walk Test is initiated, one person can  
test all the points in the control panel without  
assistance. The following features are provided with  
the Service Test Mode:  
Change skeds that can be edited.  
Editing of skeds can be restricted by  
programming S## Time Edit? to No.  
•
•
•
•
•
Display indicates exactly how many points can be  
tested.  
Battery and bell tests do not occur during this  
Walk Test.  
L## Invisible Walk Test  
The test ends when all points are tested or the  
test times out after 20 min of inactivity.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Blank, or E  
Selection:  
Events print locally without alarm annunciation or  
reporting to the central station receiver.  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
D1255 Keypad displays a sequential count and  
the text for the point after each point is activated  
and restored.  
36  
Invisible Walk Test  
(Menu function only)  
Test all points that are programmed to be invisible  
and that are within the scope of the keypad without  
sending reports to the central station. Invisible points  
must be programmed P## Invisible Pt as Yes. This  
walk test mode can test 24-hour points and controlled  
points.  
•
•
The D1255 Keypad displays ALL PNTS TESTED.  
If enabled in Routing, Service Start and Service  
End are reported at the central station receiver for  
the beginning and end of the test.  
Point 128 and Point 248 appear as missing. This is  
normal. These points are used for supervising the  
Zonex 1 bus (Point 128) and Zonex 2 bus (Point 248).  
If the Zonex bus has a fault, these points indicate a  
short.  
Invisible Test? allows the user with this L## to start  
an invisible walk test for all 24-hour interior and  
posterior controlled points in the area to which this  
keypad is assigned. When an invisible test is started,  
one person can test invisible points without  
assistance.  
This function allows viewing of extra points. Extra  
points occur under two conditions: an extra point is  
wired electrically to the Zonex bus with a blank P###  
Point Index, or two Zonex devices exist for the same  
Zonex address.  
The following features are provided with the Invisible  
Test Mode:  
•
The display indicates exactly how many invisible  
points are assigned to the area.  
•
Battery and bell tests do not occur during this  
walk test.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 75  
•
•
•
The keypad shows point text when invisible points  
are tested.  
L## Restricted O/C  
Default: Refer to the program record sheet  
The test ends when all points are tested, or if the  
test times out after 10 min of no activity.  
Selection: Blank or E  
Local event printing occurs without alarm  
annunciation or reports sent to the central station  
receiver.  
Generates an Opening Report if a bell is ringing or a  
Closing Report when force or bypass arming. The  
area where this authority level is assigned must be  
programmed for restricted openings and closings  
(refer to the A# Restrictd O/C prompt in Section 2.9.5  
Open/Close Options on page 43.  
•
•
The D1255 Keypad shows a sequential count and  
text related to the point after each point is  
activated and restored.  
The keypad shows All PTS TESTED. An All  
Points Tested Event is sent to the central station  
receiver (if programmed) when the last point is  
tested.  
L## Perimeter O/C  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
•
Walk Start and Walk End Reports are sent to the  
central station receiver for the beginning and end  
of the test (if programmed in phone routing).  
Generates Perimeter Opening and Closing Reports if  
the area where this authority level is assigned sends  
Perimeter Opening and Closing Reports. Refer to the  
A# Perimeter O/C prompt on page 47 in Section  
2.9.5 Open/Close Options.  
Custom Functions  
L## C Function 128 [through 143]  
L## Send Duress  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
Selection: Blank or E  
Function  
No.  
Function Name  
Alternate  
Keystroke  
Generates a Duress Report if the area where this  
authority level is assigned sends duress. (Refer to the  
A# Duress Enable prompt on page 39 in Section  
2.9.5 Open/Close Options.)  
128 through  
143  
Enable Custom  
Function 128  
through 143  
(Menu function  
only)  
Execute the desired Custom Function.  
L## Passcode Arm  
Report Levels  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
L## Force Arm  
Selection: Blank or E  
Arm an area by entering a pass code and pressing  
[ENTER].  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank or E  
A user with this authority level can Force Arm.  
L## Passcode Disarm  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
L## Area O/C  
Selection: Blank or E  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Disarm an area by entering a pass code and pressing  
[ENTER].  
Selection: Blank or E  
Generates Opening and Closing Reports if the area  
where this authority level is assigned sends Opening  
and Closing Reports.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 76  
2.11.5 Access Control Levels  
Burglar bells are silenced in the local area  
when a user disarms with a token or card  
or presents the token or card during an  
alarm. The user must use a pass code to  
silence a Fire Bell. Cancel Reports are  
sent after a valid pass code or token or  
card silences the bell.  
L## Security Level  
Default:  
Selection:  
M
Refer to the program record sheet  
M, P, D, or Blank  
Users have access rights for this  
area when the area is in any armed  
state.  
Opening and Closing Reports are sent to  
the central station receiver if programmed.  
P
Users have access rights for this  
area when the area is Perimeter  
Armed or Disarmed but not while the  
area is Master Armed.  
For more information on programming  
this prompt for a shared area, refer to  
Access Control Readers Assigned to the  
Shared Area in Section 2.9.3 Shared-  
Area Characteristics on page 41.  
D
Users have access rights for this  
area only while it is disarmed.  
Blank  
Users do not have access rights to  
this area.  
L## Function Level  
Default:  
Selection:  
M
Refer to the program record sheet  
M, D, C, or Blank  
Security Level [TOKEN FUNCTION]  
When the user presents a token or card at the reader,  
access is granted only when the user has the  
authority to enter the area under certain armed  
conditions.  
Activate the custom function  
assigned to the door in this area  
while the area is Master Armed or  
Disarmed only.  
L## Disarm Level  
D
C
Activate the custom function  
assigned to the door in this area  
while the area is Disarmed only.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
I, D, or Blank  
Selection:  
User can activate the custom  
I
Users change the Master Armed  
state and Perimeter Armed state to  
Perimeter Instant. The armed state  
does not change in other areas, and  
the armed state does not change if  
the area is already in the perimeter  
instant or disarmed state. User  
needs access level for Master  
Armed (M) state.  
function assigned to the door in this  
area while the area is Master Armed,  
Perimeter Armed or Disarmed.  
Blank  
User cannot activate the custom  
function assigned to the door in this  
area.  
When a token or card can also disarm an  
area, the custom function starts after the  
area disarms.  
D
Users change the local area’s  
Master Armed state and Perimeter  
Armed state to the Disarm state.  
User needs access level for Master  
Armed (M) or Perimeter Armed (P)  
state. All areas within the scope of  
the keypad assigned to the D# CC#  
Scope in the access handler, and  
areas to which the user has disarm  
rights, disarm as programmed.  
A user does not require L## Security  
Level or L## Disarm Level authority to  
activate a custom function with a token or  
card.  
Tokens or cards that are used to execute  
Custom Functions must have a pass  
code assigned to the correspoinding  
User###.  
Blank  
Users do not have disarm rights in  
this area.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 77  
2.11.6 SIA Duress Passcode Options  
2.12 Function List  
GV2MAIN→USER INTERFACE→ Authority Levels  
→L## Disarm  
The Function List is accessed when the user presses  
[MENU] (or the key corresponding to menu on the  
D1260) while the keypad shows the idle text. Program  
as many as 32 M### Function(s).  
GV2MAIN→ USER INTERFACE→ Authority Levels  
→L## Send Duress  
Each CC # keypad address can display a combination  
of any of the 32 menu items. The D1255 displays one  
menu item at a time. The D1260 displays up to two  
menu items at a time. Each keypad address has one  
Function List. The function name shown in the  
Functions column in the program record sheet  
appears in the keypad display in capital letters. For  
example, WATCH MODE appears when you select  
#6 Watch Mode.  
GV2MAIN→ USER INTERFACE→ Authority Levels  
→L## Passcode Disarm  
General Programming Information  
User Authority Index 14 is programmed by default as  
a duress disarm profile. When Duress Option is  
configured with a value of 3, the SIA CP-01 compliant  
Duress Passcode feature is enabled. With Authority  
Index 14 assigned to a user passcode in an area, that  
user has the authority to disarm and send a duress  
event from that area.  
Menu Item  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
A Duress Disarm user authority index requires:  
L## Disarm set to E  
Selection: 1 to 32  
L## Send Duress set to E  
L## Passcode Disarm set to E  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
Enter the menu item number you are programming.  
The M## Function displays items sequentially in the  
order they are programmed. The M1 Function is the  
first function that appears in the menu and M32  
Function is the last function that appears when  
scrolling through the menu.  
Duress Types 1 and 2 (refer to Duress Type on page  
35) are not allowed for use in SIA CP-01 compliant  
installations. All duress-capable passcodes must be  
unique and cannot be derived from other passcodes.  
To facilitate this uniqueness, user Authority Index 14  
is preprogrammed from the factory as an example of  
duress disarm authority.  
Failing to program Menu Item 1 causes  
COMMAND DISABLED to appear in the  
keypad display.  
M## Function  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 30, 32 to 35, 37, and  
128 to 143  
Enter the function number indicated in the “#” column  
of the program record sheet or next to the function in  
Section 2.11 User Interface on page 60.  
Function numbers 128 to 143 are custom  
functions and show the text programmed  
for CF ### Text.  
There is no restriction on how many times  
you can assign a specific function to the  
menu. By assigning a specific function  
more than once, you can assign the same  
function at different keypads so that their  
order is different in different areas.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
•
EN | 78  
Relay Reports: When relay activity is reported to  
the receiver (refer to Section 2.3 Routing on page  
15), on-board relays are reported as follows:  
M## CC Address 1 [through 8]  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
A = 253  
B = 254  
C = 255  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
This menu item appears at this  
keypad address.  
The others report as 001 to 128. The Relay  
Report is RELAY SET RELAY # rrr when the  
relay is turned on and RELAY RESET RELAY #  
rrr when the relay is turned off. Relay Reports are  
also printed on the local printer and stored in the  
control panel memory log.  
No  
This menu item does not appear at  
this keypad address.  
Programming this prompt determines at which CC  
address setting this menu item appears.  
2.13 Relay Parameters  
•
Controlling Relays: Relays can activate  
depending upon conditions that exist with the  
control panel. In addition, the user can control  
relays by using the Chg Relay? function, Relay  
On/Relay Off skeds, and the Remote Account  
Manager.  
Relays provide dry contact (normally open or normally  
closed) outputs for LED annunciation and other  
applications as well as wet voltage outputs  
(12 VDC on or off) for basic alarm system functions  
(such as Bell Output or Reset Sensors). The  
applications are endless, but mainly, relays enhance  
a system’s capacity to perform output functions.  
Before programming your relays:  
•
Do not use the CHG RELAYS? function to toggle  
relays reserved for special functions. Special  
function relays are Area and Panel Wide Relay  
functions as well as relays assigned to CC Entr  
Key Rly and P## RlyResp Type.  
•
•
•
Panel-Wide Relays: These relays provide an  
output related to a panel-wide indication. For  
annunciation, these relays can indicate system-  
wide troubles for power and phone. They also  
provide an overall control panel summary of  
alarms, troubles, and supervisory conditions.  
•
Relay C is always on. Assigning any other relay  
(1 to 128, A or B) deactivates Relay C so this  
output can be used for other functions. When  
Relay C is programmed for A# Rest Sensors,  
power is always supplied from Terminal 8 of the  
control panel.  
Area Relays: These relays provide an output by  
the area to which the relay is assigned. An area  
can have its own bell and sensor reset  
indications. Relays can also indicate the area  
armed state and whether any off-normal  
conditions, such as a Force Arm, occurred.  
•
Relay Restoration: The status of relays after  
programming or resetting the control panel might  
restore automatically or require manual  
restoration. All relays are turned off after the  
control panel resets. The control panel checks  
certain relay functions every minute and resumes  
the correct state after the reset. Other relays must  
be manually set to the correct state using the  
Change Relay Function (COMMAND 54).  
On Board Relays: Three on-board 12 VDC  
voltage outputs provide power when activated on  
the control panel. These outputs are programmed  
at the factory as Relays A, B, and C. Typically,  
Relay A (Terminal 6) is used for the bell, Relay B  
(Terminal 7) is used for an alternate alarm output  
(such as another bell), and Relay C (Terminal 8)  
is used for Sensor Reset (Relays B and C require  
the optional D136 Relays).  
•
•
Off-Board Relays: The D9412GV2 can also  
control 128 (64 for the D7412GV2) dry-contact  
form C relays when up to sixteen optional D8129  
OctoRelay Modules are installed. These relays  
are used for Area Relay, Panel-Wide Relay, and  
Individual Point Fault Relays.  
Relay Follows Point: Relays can also be used to  
activate when a point programmed for P##  
RlyResp Type (refer to P## RlyResp Type on  
page 97) is off-normal or in an alarm condition.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 79  
A# Fire Bell  
Relay functions that resume the proper state  
within one minute:  
Default:  
A
Alarm Bell  
Perimeter Fault  
Summary Trouble  
Reset Sensors  
AC Fail  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Summary Fire  
Area Armed  
Fire Bell  
This voltage output relay activates and provides  
12 VDC output when a Fire point (P## Fire is Yes)  
assigned to this area activates an alarm.  
Summary Alarm  
Silent Alarm  
Area Fault  
Summary Fire Tbl  
Watch Mode  
Phone Fail  
Summary SupBurg  
Battery Trouble  
Communications Fail  
Summary SupFire  
Fire Time and Fire Pat must be  
programmed in Bell Parameters. This  
relay activates according to the bell  
pattern and remains active until the bell  
time expires. P## Silent Bell must be No  
in order for the bell to ring upon alarm.  
Relay functions that must be reset manually  
with Change Relay function (COMMAND 54):  
Fail To Close  
Duress  
Force Armed  
Log % Full  
Although Relay C is a valid entry for A#  
Fire Bell, do not program Relay C for this  
entry. Use Relay A for the A# Fire Bell.  
2.13.1 Area Relays  
Each area can be assigned a unique relay number for  
each of the events listed in this section.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set A#  
Fire Bell to a value other than Blank.  
Area  
Default:  
1
A# Reset Sensors  
Selection: 1 to 8  
Enter the area number you are programming.  
Default:  
C
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
A# Alarm Bell  
Default:  
A
Unlike the default relay for Alarm Bell and Fire Bell,  
this voltage-output relay (Relay C) de-activates for  
5 sec when the Reset Sensors? function is activated  
from the keypad or during a Fire Walk Test.  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
This voltage output relay activates and provides  
12 VDC output when a Non-fire point (P## Fire is No)  
assigned to this area activates an alarm.  
The Reset Sensors time converts from  
the  
5 sec default time to the time  
programmed in A# Verify Time (Section  
2.9 Area Parameters on page 5) when a  
point programmed for P## Alarm Verify  
(Section 4.1 Point Index on page 88)  
enters an alarm condition.  
A# Burg Time and A# Burg Pat must be  
programmed in Area or Bell Parameters.  
This relay activates according to the bell  
pattern and remains active until the bell  
time expires or a valid passcode is  
entered. P## Silent Bell must be No for  
the bell to ring upon alarm.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
Do not set A# Alarm Bell to blank. This feature is  
required for SIA CP-01 compliance.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 80  
A# Watch Mode  
Default: Blank  
When sharing one relay to reset sensors  
in two or more areas, you must program  
the following. Failure to do so causes  
TROUBLE PT ### for all point types  
programmed as P## Resettable.  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
This relay activates when a Controlled point  
•
CC # Scope must include all areas  
that share the relay.  
programmed for P## Watch Point is faulted in the  
specified area while the area is in Watch Mode and  
the point is not armed. It remains active for 2 sec after  
each point is faulted.  
•
L## Reset Sensors authority must be  
assigned to the pass code that  
activates the COMMAND 47 or Reset  
Sensor function.  
A# Area Armed  
•
A# Verify Time must be the same  
number of seconds for all areas that  
share the relay.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set A#  
Reset Sensors to a value other than  
Blank.  
This relay activates when the specified area becomes  
Master Armed. The exit delay must expire before the  
relay activates. The relay remains active until the area  
disarms. It does not deactivate during the entry delay  
time.  
A# Fail to Close  
Default: Blank  
If multiple areas use the same relay, the relay  
activates when all areas are armed. It deactivates  
when the first area disarms.  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
The A# Area Armed relay function can provide visual  
feedback at a key switch station. Attach a LED to the  
output of a D8129 Module programmed for this  
function.  
This relay activates when the Closing Window expires  
for the specified area. It remains active until midnight,  
another Closing Window starts, or the control panel  
resets, whichever occurs first. When Perimeter Relay  
(refer to page 142) is set to Yes, the A# Fail to Close  
prompt becomes A# Perimeter Relay when using  
firmware version 7.07 and later. Refer to Area 7 in  
Alternate Functions for A# Silent Alarm on page 81 for  
additional relay functions when using firmware version  
7.06 and earlier.  
Refer to Area 7 and Area 8 in Alternate Functions for  
A# Silent Alarm on page 81 for additional relay  
functions when using firmware version 7.06 or earlier.  
A# Area Fault  
Default:  
Blank  
A# Force Armed  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Default:  
Blank  
Activates whenever a controlled (P## Type 1, 2, 3  
only) Perimeter or Interior point is faulted. The relay  
remains active until all Perimeter and Interior points in  
the area are normal.  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
This relay activates when this area is Force Armed. It  
remains active until the area disarms or the control  
panel resets.  
Keyswitch area armed status with  
LEDs: Use a D8129 Module and connect  
an LED to indicate that the area is not  
ready to arm.  
If Force Bypassing is required during  
Perimeter Arming, this relay does not  
activate.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 81  
•
Area 5: Programming a non-zero value in the  
Silent Alarm Relay for Area 5 enables Ground  
A# Duress Relay  
Fault Detect on the D9412GV2 or D7412GV2  
Control Panel using firmware versions 7.01 and  
7.02 only. In version 7.03 and above, this setting  
is not used.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Activates when a Duress alarm is generated from a  
keypad assigned to the specified area.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, enable  
Ground Fault Detect.  
Burg Time needs a bell period  
programmed and A# Duress Enable  
must be Yes. This relay activates when  
the Burg Bell starts and deactivates when  
the Burg Bell time ends. The Burg Bell  
pattern has no effect on this relay  
function.  
Refer to Ground Fault Detect in the  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Operation and Installation  
Guide (P/N: F01U003641).  
•
Area 7: Perimeter Armed Relay, when enabled,  
turns the Fail to Close Relay function into a  
Perimeter Armed Relay function.  
A# Perim Fault  
To change the Fail to Close Relay into a  
Perimeter Armed Relay function, program 63 in  
the Silent Alarm Relay for Area 7. Set A# Fail to  
Close Relay to the area to be Perimeter Armed.  
Refer to Area 8 for additional information. This  
alternate function is replaced by the Perimeter  
Relay prompt (refer to page 142) in the GV2AUX  
handler for the D9412GV2 and D7412GV2 in  
firmware v7.07 and later.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Activates when a Controlled Perimeter point (P##  
Type 1) assigned to the specified area is faulted,  
regardless of the armed state of the area. This relay  
provides a steady output until all Perimeter points in  
the area return to normal.  
•
Area 8: Programming a value of 64 in the Silent  
Alarm Relay for Area 8 causes the Area Armed or  
Perimeter Armed Relay (refer to Area 7) to  
activate at the beginning of the exit delay time.  
This alternate function is replaced by the  
This relay does not activate on interior  
faults. To detect all area point faults,  
program all points as Perimeter points in  
the area where this relay is assigned.  
EarlyArmed Relay prompt (refer to page 142) in  
the GV2AUX handler for the D9412GV2 and  
D7412GV2 in firmware v7.07 and later.  
A# Silent Alarm  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
2.13.2 Panel-Wide Relays  
The following eleven relay options activate when they  
occur anywhere in the control panel. They are not  
restricted by area boundaries.  
This relay activates when a point assigned to the  
specified area and programmed for P## Silent Bell  
goes into alarm.  
AC Failure  
Alternate Functions for A# Silent Alarm  
Default:  
Blank  
•
Area 4: For time control, programming any value  
other than 60 in the Silent Alarm Relay for Area 4  
enables AC (traditional) time control. Entering a  
value of 60 for Area 4 disables AC time control  
and switches the time control to the on-board  
crystal. This alternate function is replaced by the  
CrystalTime Adj prompt (refer to page 142) in  
the GV2AUX handler for the D9412GV2 and  
D7412GV2 in firmware v7.07 and later.  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Activates when the control panel responds to an AC  
power failure as programmed in AC Fail Time in  
Section 2.5 Power Supervision on page 28. This relay  
automatically resets when AC power restores.  
Use this relay to create audible  
annunciation. Enable the keypad’s  
trouble sounders for all applications  
except commercial fire systems.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 82  
Battery Trouble  
Summary Fire  
Default: Blank  
Selection Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
:
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Activates when battery voltage falls below 85% of  
capacity (12.1 VDC) for a fully charged (13.8 VDC)  
battery, or when the battery is in a missing condition.  
This relay automatically resets when battery power  
restores.  
Enter the number of the relay that activates when any  
Fire point in the system (P## Type 0, P## Fire Yes)  
enters into alarm. This relay provides a steady output  
until all Fire points in the system return to normal.  
Refer to Fire Summary Sustain on page 139 for  
details on alternate operation.  
Use this relay to create audible  
annunciation. Enable the keypad’s  
trouble sounders for all applications  
except commercial fire systems.  
Summary Alarm  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Phone Fail  
Default:  
Blank  
Enter the number of the relay that activates when a  
Non-fire point enters into alarm. This relay provides a  
steady output until the alarm is acknowledged by a  
valid pass code, then cleared from alarm memory with  
an acknowledgment at the keypad.  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Activates when a telephone line failure occurs. A time  
must be entered in Ph Supv Time (refer to Section 2.2  
Phone Parameters on page 12) for this relay to  
activate. This relay resets automatically when restoral  
of the phone line(s) occurs.  
This relay does not activate for silent and  
invisible alarms.  
Comm Fail  
Summary Fire Tbl  
Default:  
Blank  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Activates when a control panel cannot communicate a  
report after making ten attempts to each routing  
destination. At the same time, COMM FAIL RT ##  
displays at the keypad. This relay automatically resets  
when a report is sent successfully.  
Activates when any Fire point in the control panel is in  
trouble, or if a Fire Supervision point is missing. This  
relay provides a steady output until all Fire points  
restore to a normal condition.  
Summary SupFire  
Use this relay to report primary digital  
report failure to an alternate  
communication device.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Log % Full  
Activates when any Fire Supervisory point in the  
control panel is in a supervisory condition (off-  
normal). This relay provides a steady output until all  
Fire Supervisory points are restored to a normal  
condition.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Enter the number of the relay that activates when the  
log reaches the programmed percentage of its  
capacity as programmed in the Log % Full prompt  
under GV2MAIN. This relay provides a steady output  
until a Get Log and Set Pointer is executed from the  
remote programming software (RPS).  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 2.0 GV2MAIN  
EN | 83  
Summary Trouble  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Activates when any Non-fire point in the control panel  
is in a trouble condition. This relay provides a steady  
output until the user at the keypad acknowledges the  
trouble.  
Summary SupBurg  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 128 (1 to 64 for  
D7412GV2), A, B, or C  
Activates when any Non-fire Supervisory point in the  
control panel is in a supervisory condition, or if a  
Supervisory Burg point is missing. This relay provides  
a steady output until the user at the keypad  
acknowledges the condition.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 3.0 RADXUSR1/RADXUSR2  
EN | 84  
This window does not affect tokens and  
cards. It only affects the pass code of the  
master user.  
3.0 RADXUSR1/RADXUSR2  
3.1  
Pass Code or Token Worksheet  
These programming items assign:  
When using the Add/Change User  
function at the keypad, the authority levels  
and the changes made affect the master  
user’s pass code and the entire group’s  
token or cards.  
•
•
•
a pass code to user groups 001 to 249,  
areas by authority level, and  
a User Group Window.  
Two handlers in the D5200 Programmer are used to  
program the users:  
When using the ACCESS CTL LVL  
function at the keypad, the whole group is  
affected by whether or not the level is on  
or off for access control functions only.  
•
•
RADXUSR1 Handler programs users 000 to 124.  
RADXUSR2 programs users 125 to 249  
(D9412GV2 only).  
When using the DELETE USER?  
3.1.1 User Groups  
function, the whole group is deleted. You  
cannot delete each user within the group  
individually. Use the ADD/CHG USER?  
function to change a user token or card  
instead of deleting the whole group.  
For the D9412GV2, there are 249 groups (99 groups  
for the D7412GV2) consisting of one user with a pass  
code and token (master) and three users with tokens  
or cards but not a pass code (sub-user). All users in  
the group share the same authority level as the  
master user.  
3.1.4 User Name  
Each user group can be assigned one U### Name.  
This name is logged and sent to the central station  
for all the users in the group. The user ID is used to  
differentiate which user’s token or card was  
executed.  
3.1.2 Pass Codes  
In a control panel with factory default settings, only  
the master user has an assigned pass code. A pass  
code can be three to six digits. Entering three digits in  
User ### chooses the user. Programming the U001  
Passcode assigns a pass code to the master user.  
Sub-users cannot use the pass code. Do not assign  
tokens or cards to User ID 0 (zero), which is reserved  
for the service pass code.  
When using a D1260 Keypad, User 249  
text is used for contact information text  
(such as telephone numbers). If a D1260  
is installed on the system, do not use  
User 249 for user ID information.  
Passcode Tamper  
3.1.5 Tokens and Cards  
If a user enters six consecutive invalid pass codes at  
the same keypad, the control panel sends a User  
Code Tamper report to the cental station. The invalid  
pass code count resets when a valid passcode is  
entered at the same keypad. Refer to R# Usr Code  
Tamper in Table 11 on page 18 for information on  
enabling this report.  
The master user assigned the pass code can also be  
assigned a token or card by programming the U###  
Mstr Site and U### Mstr Crd Data.  
Three more tokens or cards are assigned to the user  
group for sub-users using the U### SU# Site and  
U### SU# C/D.  
The passcode tamper condition is also reported in a  
manually initiated Extended Test Report and to RPS  
through control panel diagnostics. As a result, the  
tamper condition is reset after the successful  
completion of a manual report or when disconnecting  
from an RPS session. The tamper condition is not  
reset when the control panel reboots.  
3.1.3 User Group Window  
Use U### User Group to enable and disable the  
U### Passcode for up to eight different time periods  
throughout the day. Assign the number (1 to 8)  
programmed in U### User Group to a User  
Windows #. If the user is outside a window,  
COMMAND DISABLED appears on the keypad after  
the user enters the pass code and presses [ENTER].  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 3.0 RADXUSR1/RADXUSR2  
EN | 85  
3.1.6 Reporting and Logging  
Modem Format must be Yes for the following reports sent to the central station. Regardless of the reporting  
format, they log and print at the local printer as shown in Figure 4. Each sub-user is identified by the master  
user’s three-digit number plus an extension of 0, 1, 2, or 3. These numbers are called Sub-user ID Codes.  
shows all the users for User Group 122 as they would appear.  
Figure 4: User Group 122 Example  
Master User:  
ID 122.  
1
♦ CRD ID 122-0  
♦ Sub User -1: ID 122-1  
CRD ID 122-1  
2
♦ Sub User -2: ID 122-2.  
CRD ID 122-2  
♦ Sub User -3: ID 122-3.  
CRD ID 122-3  
1 - User pass code  
2 - User token or card  
In reporting systems using modem format, all three digits of the User ID Code are transmitted to  
the central station with appropriate reports. Central station automation computer systems can  
accept only Zonex and Comex style User IDs. Refer to Point/User Flag in Section 2.1 Phone on  
page 11.  
In BFSK, only one number is transmitted. This number represents a group of ten users as shown in Table 30.  
Users 100 through 249 do not report in BFSK format.  
Table 30: BSFK User Code Report  
User  
User  
User  
User  
User  
User  
User  
User  
User  
User  
Code  
Code  
Code  
Code  
Code  
Code  
Code  
Code  
Code  
Code  
000 to 009 010 to 019 020 to 029 030 to 039 040 to 049 050 to 059 060 to 069 070 to 079 080 to 089 090 to 099  
BFSK  
Report  
0
BFSK  
Report  
1
BFSK  
Report  
2
BFSK  
Report  
3
BFSK  
Report  
4
BFSK  
Report  
5
BFSK  
Report  
6
BFSK  
Report  
7
BFSK  
Report  
8
BFSK  
Report  
9
User ###  
Default:  
001  
Selection: 000 or 001 to 249 (001 to 099 for the D7412GV2)  
Enter the User number you are programming.  
User 000 is the Service Authority Level (Level 15). You cannot change the programming for user  
000.  
Only the Service Authority Level (User 000) can delete User 000. When a user other than User 000  
tries to delete the pass code for User 000, the keypad displays NOT IN USE.  
User 000 cannot be added or changed at the keypad whether it exists or not.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 3.0 RADXUSR1/RADXUSR2  
EN | 86  
U### Passcode  
U### User Group  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: Three to six digits ( 0 to 9)  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 8  
Enter three to six digits to enable a pass code for the  
master user in this group.  
Create a group of up to 249 users (99 for the  
D7412GV2) whose combinations can be enabled and  
disabled using an automatic user window. This is the  
number entered into the W# User Group for any  
active W# User Window. Multiple windows can be  
programmed for one user group (up to eight) within  
one 24-hour period. For example, if User Group 1  
has a window running from 8:00 AM (start time) to  
4:00 PM (stop time), the users for that group can use  
their pass codes only between that time. Between  
4:00 PM that day and 8:00 AM the next day, the  
users cannot use their pass codes.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, enter at  
least one Passcode.  
User I.D.000 is the reserved user for  
service personnel. The default service  
pass code is 123.  
The programmer does not allow you to  
enter any pass code number that might  
conflict with a duress pass code. The  
programmer reserves the actual duress  
pass code and the duress pass-code  
number plus 1, duress pass-code number  
plus 2, duress pass code-number minus  
1, and duress pass-code number minus  
2.  
To enable this user’s pass code at all  
times, leave U### User Group blank.  
User Group Window times cannot be changed from  
the keypad. When a window is assigned to a user  
group, the users in that group rely on the window to  
be active (within the start and stop times) for their  
pass codes to function. The only way to disable the  
window is by reprogramming the control panel from  
the D5200 or remote programming software (RPS).  
If Duress Type is set to 1, pass codes  
within a range of 1 for existing pass  
codes cannot be entered. If Duress Type  
is set to 2, pass codes within a range of 2  
cannot be entered. This rule applies even  
if duress is disabled. For example, with  
Duress Type set to 2, when a pass code  
of 654321 is entered, 654322, 654323,  
654320, and 654329 are reserved and  
are not available to other users.  
U### Area 1 [through Area 8] Auth  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: 1 to 14 or Blank  
Assign an authority level to the user for this area.  
Blank means the user has no authority in this area.  
The authority to silence a bell is granted  
to all pass codes regardless of their  
To meet UL 864 requirements, assign a  
valid authority level to the Passcode to  
silence bells.  
authority level assignments. A user pass  
code can silence a Fire or Burg bell as  
long as any authority level is assigned to  
the area where the bell can be silenced.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 3.0 RADXUSR1/RADXUSR2  
EN | 87  
Converting hexadecimal to decimal: If  
U### Name  
your card label contains letters as well as  
numbers, the number is hexadecimal.*  
Convert the hexadecimal number to  
decimal using your calculator. If you  
cannot convert in this way, use the reader  
and the Add/Chg User? Function to add  
the tokens or cards.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Sixteen alphanumeric characters  
Selection:  
Enter Alphabetic-characters A to Z in capital letters  
Period (.), comma (,), percent (%), parentheses [()],  
equal (=), greater or less than (< >), exclamation (!),  
braces ({}), apostrophe (’), carat (^), grave accent (`),  
tilde (~), semi-colon (;), and colon (:) are not allowed.  
Perform the following test to confirm that  
you can convert properly:  
Enter up to sixteen characters of text for this user  
group.  
Use 319EB0 as the hexadecimal number.  
On your calculator, press [HEX]. Enter all  
the hexadecimal characters into the  
calculator. Press [DEC] and your  
hexadecimal characters convert to the  
following eight digits: 03251888. The site  
number is 032. Enter it in U### Mstr  
Site. Your card data is 51888. Enter it into  
U### Mstr Crd Data.  
Programming this group with a  
departmental, team, or function name  
identifies all the users in this group in a  
function related manner, such as  
ENGINEERING.  
Card Data Format  
The D9412GV2/D7412GV2 and D9210B Controller  
comply with the 26-bit Wiegand card data format. In  
essence, the format consists of 26 bits (3.2 bytes) of  
data. The first bit is used for the even parity. The next  
8 bits (first byte) is used for the U### Site Code. The  
next 16 bits (second and third byte) are used for the  
U### Card Data. The last bit is used for the odd  
parity.  
*
A hexadecimal number can contain all numerals. If the  
code does not work, try converting the number from  
hexadecimal to decimal.  
Always tag your tokens before adding  
them to the system so you do not mix  
them up. Use the CRD ID ###-# number  
to index them.  
As long as the reader and the tokens or cards you  
use are compatible with 26-bit Wiegand format, they  
function with this system.  
U### Mstr Crd Data  
Default: Blank  
Use only the readers identified as being compatible  
with the D9210B door control module. Refer to the  
D9210B Operation and Installation Guide (P/N:  
32206) for information on these readers.  
Selection: 00000 = (0) to 65534 or Blank  
(65535)  
Master User ### Card Data: Enter the remaining  
five decimal numbers on the back of the token or  
card. This is the second and third byte (bits 10  
through 25) of data for a 26-bit Wiegand card. This is  
called the card data.  
For more information, refer to the Security Industry  
Association (SIA) Access Control 26-bit Wiegand  
Reader Interface Standard.  
You must program U### Mstr Site before  
programming this prompt.  
U### Mstr Site  
Default:  
Blank  
U### SU1 through SU3 Site  
Selection:  
000 = (0) to 254 or Blank (255)  
Master User ### Site Data: Enter the first three  
decimal numbers on the back of the token or card.  
This is the first byte (bits 2 through 9) of data for a  
26-bit Wiegand card. This is called the site number.  
Tokens and cards with a site code of 255 are not  
compatible with the D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Control  
Panels.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: 000 = (0) to 254 or Blank (255)  
Sub-users one through three site data.  
U### SU1 through SU3 C/D  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
00000 = (0) to 65534 or Blank  
(65535)  
Card data for sub-users one through three.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 88  
Point Index  
Default:  
4.0 RADXPNTS  
1
4.1  
Point Index  
Selection: 1 to 31  
Use this programming module to construct  
personality types for points used in the system. The  
Index numbers are used in Point Assignments. Each  
unique point index number determines the control  
panel’s responses to specific conditions occurring on  
the Protective points.  
The number of the point personality you are  
programming. You can define up to 31 individual  
personalities.  
The NEW RECORD program contains default entries  
and descriptions that match RPS defaults for point  
indexes. Refer to the D9412GV2/D7412GV2  
Program Record Sheet (P/N: F01U003635) for  
defaults.  
P## Type  
Default:  
Selection:  
P ## Type  
0
Refer to the program record sheet  
0 to 9, or 11  
Description  
24-hour: A 24-hour point is not turned on and off from a keypad. 24-hour points are armed all  
the time, and can be used for fire protection (refer to the P ## Fire Point prompt in Section 4.2  
Point Responses on page 92), panic, medical, and police alerts.  
24-hour protection for fire doors, roof hatches, and so on. Instead of programming this type of  
protection as a 24-hour point, consider using a Perimeter point type with a Point Response of  
9 to E. 24-hour points do not show faults when an arming function is entered, but Perimeter  
points do. When programming this type of protection, consider also using the Buzz on Fault  
and Local While Disarmed options.  
1
Perimeter: Perimeter points are armed with all arming functions. Points programmed as  
perimeter can also be armed as a group (using Perimeter-Arming functions) separately from  
points programmed as interior. This lets the user partially arm the system to establish  
Perimeter protection while occupying the interior of the protected premises.  
Perimeter points can be programmed to activate entry delay time. If the point activates entry  
delay, it can also activate an entry tone.  
When a Perimeter point is programmed for entry delay, entry delay time is always provided. If  
the area is in entry delay when a second Perimeter point is faulted, the control panel  
compares the remaining entry delay time to the time programmed for the second Perimeter  
point. If the second Perimeter point’s entry delay time is less than the remaining time, it  
shortens the entry delay time.  
Perimeter points programmed for an instant point response, generate an alarm immediately  
when faulted, even during entry or exit delay.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 89  
P ## Type  
Selection  
Description  
2
Interior: Interior points are armed only by master arming the area. They are not armed when  
using Perimeter Arming functions. These points are typically used to monitor interior detection  
devices such as interior doors, motion detectors, photoelectric beams, and carpet mats.  
Instant Interior Points: Interior points are usually programmed for an instant alarm (refer to  
Section 4.2 Point Responses on page 92). Points programmed for instant alarms generate  
alarms immediately, even during entry or exit delay.  
Delayed Interior Points: Interior points can be programmed for a delayed point response. A  
delayed response means that if the point is faulted while the area is armed, it activates entry  
delay. It does not generate an alarm until entry delay expires.  
When an Interior point is programmed for entry delay, entry delay time is always provided. If  
the area is in entry delay when a fault occurs for the Interior point, the control panel compares  
the remaining entry delay time to the time programmed for the Interior point. If the Interior  
point’s entry delay time is less than the remaining time, it shortens the entry delay time.  
Delayed points can also activate an entry tone at the keypad (refer to the P## Ent Tone Off  
prompt in Section 4.2 Point Responses on page 92).  
In some cases, you might need to create an Interior point that causes an instant alarm if the  
entry delay is not started first. Use Interior Follower to create this type of protection.  
Interior Follower: Interior Follower points are armed only by master arming the area. They are  
not armed when using Perimeter-Arming functions.  
3
An Interior Follower point does not create an alarm if it has a fault while the area is in entry  
delay. An Interior Follower does not change the amount of remaining entry delay time.  
If no entry delay is in effect when a fault occurs for the Interior Follower, it creates an instant  
alarm.  
You must program a delayed Point Response (4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) for an Interior Follower point.  
The control panel ignores the entry in P## Entry Delay for an Interior Follower point.  
Note:  
Increasing the debounce count for Interior Follower points might be necessary to prevent  
Interior Follower points from entering into alarm before the control panel recognizes that a  
Perimeter Delay point was faulted. Program the Interior Follower’s debounce for one  
number higher than the debounce count on Perimeter delay  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 90  
P ## Type  
Description  
4*  
Keyswitch Maintained: Program P## Pt Response as 1. Do not connect initiating devices to  
a Keyswitch point.  
Normal:  
Short:  
Open:  
The area is disarmed.  
When this point changes from normal to open, the area arms.  
A short is a trouble when the area is disarmed. A short is an alarm when the  
area is armed. When this point changes from shorted to normal or open, it  
restores.  
Program Point Response as 2, the point responds as follows:  
Normal:  
Open:  
When this point changes from open to normal, the area arms.  
The area is disarmed.  
Short:  
A short is a trouble when the area is disarmed. A short is an alarm when the  
area is armed. When this point changes from shorted to normal or open, it  
restores.  
Trouble and Restoral Reports are not sent if Local While Disarmed is Yes.  
Alarm and Restoral Reports are not sent if Local While Armed is Yes.  
5*  
Keyswitch Momentary: Used for area arming and disarming. Point Response must be  
programmed 1. Do not connect initiating devices to a Keyswitch point.  
When this point momentarily changes from normal to shorted to normal, it  
toggles the armed state of the area.  
N→S→N:  
Open:  
An open is a trouble while the point is disarmed. An open is an alarm while  
the point is armed.  
When this point changes from open to normal, it restores.  
Trouble and Restoral Reports are not sent if Local Disarmed is Yes.  
6*  
Open/Close Point: Used for point arming and disarming. Point Response must be  
programmed 1. Local bells are silenced through the keypad.  
Normal:  
Open:  
The point is armed and sends a Point Closing Report. A Point Closing Report  
is not sent if Local Armed is Yes.  
An open is an alarm when the point is armed. An open is a trouble when the  
point is disarmed. Alarm and Restoral Reports are not sent if Local  
Disarmed is Yes.  
Short:  
The point is disarmed and sends a Point Opening Report. A Point Opening  
Report is not sent if Local Armed is Yes.  
* Keyswitch Points: Special rules apply to points used for Keyswitch functions. These special point types do not  
respond the same way to the point response entry as Point Types 1, 2, and 3. Responses for Keyswitch point types are  
described in Section 4.2 Point Responses on page 92..  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 91  
P ## Type  
Selection  
Description  
7*  
D279 (O/C Non-Priority): The D279 provides point arming and disarming independent of the  
area arm state. A non-priority D279 point arm state does not affect the area arm state. Point  
Response must be programmed 1. Local bells are silenced through the keypad. For bell  
control at the D279, use P## Type 8.  
Open the W1 jumper on the D279 to send Point Opening and Point Closing Reports. If the  
D279’s W1 jumper is closed, no Open or Close Report is sent, regardless of control panel  
programming.  
Normal:  
The point is armed and sends a Point Closing Report. Point Closing Report is  
not sent if Local Armed is Yes.  
Open:  
The point is disarmed and sends a Point Opening Report. A Point Opening  
Report is not sent if Local Armed is Yes.  
Short:  
A short is an alarm when the point is armed. A short is a trouble when the  
point is disarmed. Alarm and Restoral Reports are not sent if Local  
Disarmed is Yes.  
8*  
D279 (O/C Priority): The D279 provides point arming and disarming independent of the  
area’s arming state. A priority D279 point must be armed before an area can be armed.  
Program Point Response as 2.  
Open the W1 jumper on the D279 to send area Opening and Closing Reports as programmed  
in Area Parameters and to provide bell control. If the D279’s W1 jumper is closed, no Area  
Open or Area Close Report is sent, and alarm bells can only be silenced from a keypad, no  
matter how the control panel is programmed.  
Normal:  
Open:  
When this point changes from open to normal, the area arms.  
The area is disarmed. The alarm bell silences if an alarm occurred while the  
area was armed.  
Short:  
A short is a trouble while the area is disarmed. A short is an alarm while the  
area is armed. When this point changes from shorted to normal or open, it  
restores.  
9*  
Easikey: This point is programmed for access. Program Point Response as 1. If the system  
is Master Armed or Perimeter Armed (with or without delays), presenting a valid token to the  
Easikey reader shorts the point and disarms its assigned area. Presenting a valid token in a  
disarmed state does not clear trouble or alarm memory or rearm the area.  
11  
Aux AC Supervision: This point type monitors the AC power of an auxiliary power supply.  
When the point is in an off-normal state, the control panel waits for the time programmed in  
AC Fail Time before generating a Point Trouble. If P## Fire Point is set to Yes, the off-  
normal condition results in a Fire Trouble. This point type does not use P## Point Response;  
therefore, no alarm condition occurs.  
* Keyswitch Points. Special rules apply to points used for Keyswitch functions. These special point types do not  
respond the same way to the point response entry as Point Types 1, 2, and 3. Responses for keyswitch point types are  
described in Section 4.2 Point Responses on page 92.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 92  
Alarm Verification: A Fire point can delay an alarm  
by the length of time programmed in A# Verify Time  
in the Area Parameters. Combined with A#  
Resettable, a Fire point also resets the electrical  
circuit for the amount of time programmed.  
4.2  
Point Responses  
4.2.1 Applications for Point Responses 9,  
D, and E:  
Combine Point Responses 9, D, and E with  
Perimeter point types to create more flexible 24-hour  
protection. Unlike 24-hour points, a faulted Perimeter  
point with a Point Response of D and E displays at  
the keypad when arming. Like a 24-hour point, a  
point programmed this way can generate alarms  
whether the area is armed or disarmed.  
Reset Sensor: A fire device that requires resetting  
can be manually reset using the reset sensor relay  
for the area to which it is assigned.  
Fire Walk: Use the Fire Walk function to test Fire  
points in the system. The Fire Walk Test  
automatically resets each point for 5 sec when the  
point is activated, and rings the Fire Bell for 2 sec.  
Combining Point Response 9 with the Local While  
Disarmed feature provides off-site reporting when the  
area is armed, but only local alarm annunciation  
when the area is disarmed.  
To provide an audible tone for a restored  
Fire Supervisory point, use P## RlyResp  
Type 1 and connect the corresponding  
relay to a visual annunciator.  
Combining Point Response 9 with the Local While  
Armed feature provides off-site reporting when the  
area is disarmed, but only local alarm annunciation  
when the area is armed.  
Point Response E: Use this setting for Zonex or  
ASIC motion detectors. The control panel can report  
troubles while Master Armed.  
Point Response F: Does not sound at local keypads  
but activates P## RlyResp Type 1 and keypad  
faults. To annunciate the off-normal state at a  
keypad, program Disp as Dvc as Yes and optionally  
set BuzzOn Fault as 1 or 2. This point response  
does not generate alarms or activate an alarm relay.  
Point Response 8, 9, A, B, and C: These point  
responses provide supervisory (24-hour) reporting.  
4.2.2 Characteristics of a Fire Point:  
Reporting: When a group of events occurs, the  
control panel routes and prints out Fire Reports first.  
Visual Annunciation: FIRE TROUBLES continues  
to scroll until the trouble clears. When acknowledged,  
a FIRE TROUBLE scroll notifies the end user that a  
Fire point, or group of Fire points, is still in trouble.  
Panel-Wide Relays, Summary Fire, and Summary  
Fire Tbl activate if a relay is assigned when any Fire  
point enters into alarm or is in trouble.  
Audible Annunciation: A Fire point activates the  
A# Fire Bell relay programmed in Relay Parameters.  
The amount of time and the pattern of the relay  
activation is programmed by area in Bell  
Parameters, A# Fire Time, and A# Fire Pat.  
Supervisory: A Fire point can send a Fire  
Supervisory Report and activate the Summary Fire  
Sup and Summary Fire Tbl, Panel-Wide Relays with  
a
P## Response of 8-9-A-B-C.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 93  
P## Pt Response  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: 0 to F  
Controlled (Non-24-Hour Points)  
Point Response  
0
I
1
I
2
I
3
I
4
D
I
5
D
I
6
I
7
I
8
D
D
9
I
A
I
B
I
C
I
D
I
E
F
Armed  
Open  
Short  
Open  
Short  
T
I
Armed  
I
I
I
I
D
D
T
I
I
I
I
I
Disarmed  
Disarmed  
T
T
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
T
T
I
T
I
24-Hour Points  
Point Response  
Open  
0
I
1
T
I
2
I
3
T
T
4
I
5
6
I
7
T
8
S
T
9
T
S
A
S
B
S
C
S
S
D
E
F
Short  
I
T
T
Key:  
I = Instant alarm  
D = Delayed alarm  
T = Trouble  
S = Supervisory  
Blank = Audible or visual response  
Example of Controlled point:  
Point Type = 1  
Point Response = 8  
Perimeter point with delayed alarm response when  
armed (opened or shorted) and no response when  
disarmed.  
Example of 24-hour point:  
Point Type = 0  
Point Response = 8  
24-hour point with supervisory response when open  
and a trouble response when shorted.  
With Supervisory Pt Response  
(S = Supervisory), the BFSK format does  
not transmit fire supervisory or Non-fire  
Supervisory Events. Modem format must  
be used with Supervisory Point  
Responses.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 94  
P## Entry Delay  
P## Ent Tone Off  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Selection: 5 sec to 600 sec  
Yes or No  
Use this option to enter the amount of entry delay  
time that a user has after faulting a Controlled point  
(P## Type 1, 2, 3) with a delayed response (D) (P##  
Pt Response) of 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. DISARM NOW  
appears for the duration of the time programmed  
when the point is faulted in the delay condition.  
Disables the entry delay tone when  
this perimeter point is faulted.  
This is intended for use with points  
set to P## Type 1 (Perimeter).  
No  
A tone sounds at keypads when this  
point starts entry delay.  
The D1255 alternates between DISARM  
NOW and the point text of the point that  
caused the area to enter into entry delay.  
This option enables and disables the entry delay  
warning tone for this point.  
Do not set points to No if they are actually  
used to notify the user to disarm the  
system. The possibility of false alarms  
increases if the entry delay warning is not  
used.  
If this time expires before disarming, or if the point is  
configured with an instant response (I), an alarm  
occurs.  
Make entries in 5 sec increments. The  
programmer does not allow off-increment  
entries.  
Entry Tone can also be turned off when  
programming your CC Entry Tone, in  
Section 2.10 Keypad (Command Center)  
on page 51, that allows you to manage  
the tone by keypad.  
When the control panel is in Entry Delay, entering a  
valid Passcode disarms the system as soon as the  
last digit of the Passcode is entered. No other keys  
are required. When the control panel is in Exit Delay  
or is armed, entering a valid Passcode must be  
followed by the [ENTER] or [ENT] key.  
You might want to disable the entry tone  
in high security applications where you do  
not want to annunciate entry delay.  
If another Perimeter or Interior Follower  
Delay point trips while the area is already  
in entry delay, the control panel adjusts  
the delay time to the Delay point with the  
least amount of delay time.  
P## Silent Bell  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
When a user enters an area, a Perimeter  
point is faulted and the entry delay starts.  
If an interior point must fault during entry  
delay to allow the user to disarm the area  
at a keypad, program P## Type as 3  
(Interior Follower).  
Activate the Silent Alarm Relay when  
this point enters into alarm. Keypads  
do not sound the alarm tone for Non-  
fire points.  
No  
Activate either the Fire Bell relay or  
Alarm Bell relay and sound the alarm  
tone at keypads when this point  
enters into alarm. If this is a Fire  
point, it activates the Fire Bell relay  
programmed in Relay Parameters.  
Otherwise, it activates the Alarm Bell  
relay. The amount of time and  
pattern of the relay activation is  
programmed by area in Bell  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
P## Entry Delay must be between 30 sec and  
240 sec.  
Parameters.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set this  
parameter to No.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 95  
If you want this point to ring the bell  
because the message failed to reach the  
central station receiver, program P##  
Audible After 2 Failures as Yes.  
When a point programmed for P## Silent  
Bell is faulted, the timer for the A# Burg  
Time starts, even though the bell is not  
yet ringing. As much as 3 min can elapse  
before the second attempt fails. Ensure  
that A# Burg Time is programmed to  
provide the amount of bell time you need,  
minus the additional 3 min that might  
elapse before the bell actually begins to  
ring.  
P## Ring Til Rst  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
The relay programmed to provide  
fire alarm output for this point cannot  
be de-activated until the point  
restores to normal.  
P## Invisible Pt  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Yes or No  
No  
The relay programmed to provide  
fire alarm output for this point can be  
de-activated before the point  
restores to normal.  
Keypads do not display alarm  
activity from this point.  
No  
Activity from this point is visible at  
the keypads.  
Use this option to determine if the bell continues to  
ring until the Fire Bell time expires. The point returns  
to a normal condition when the user acknowledges  
the alarm to silence the bell.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set this  
parameter to No.  
If the point restores and the fire alarm is  
not silenced from the keypad, the fire  
alarm output continues until Fire Bell time  
expires. If the point does not restore, the  
fire alarm output continues even after bell  
time expires.  
Use this option to determine whether the point  
appears in the keypad display upon an alarm  
condition. For LED keypads, the LED does not  
illuminate upon an alarm condition. Point text  
appears and annunciation is made for Invisible points  
programmed for a trouble condition in point response.  
Use this option for fire applications to  
meet the requirement that audible alarms  
cannot be silenced until the fault condition  
clears or the Fire Bell time expires.  
To prevent the keypad alarm tone and the  
A# Burg Alarm bell from sounding,  
program P## Silent Bell as Yes.  
P## Audible After 2 Failures  
If a user enters a valid pass code while a  
bell is ringing for an invisible alarm, the  
keypad shows ALARM SILENCED.  
Default:  
No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
A# Burg Alarm relay activates after  
two failed attempts.  
P## Silent points do not cause the  
A# Burg Alarm relay to activate even  
if the report does not get to the  
central station receiver.  
When set to Yes, if the report fails to reach the  
central station after two attempts, a silent alarm rings  
the A## Burg Alarm bell. A silent alarm is generated  
when a point with P## Silent set to Yes is faulted  
while armed.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 96  
P## Buzz On Fault  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Selection  
Blank, 1 to 3  
Operation for Controlled Points  
(Point Types 1, 2, and 3)  
Operation for 24-hour, Fire and Aux AC  
Supervision Points (Point Types 0 and  
11)  
Blank  
1
The point buzzes at the keypad only if it enters  
into the trouble condition indicated in the P##  
Point Response.  
Same as as operation for controlled points  
The point generates a Buzz Until Restore at the The point generates a Buzz Until Restore at  
keypad for any fault condition while the point the keypad for any fault condition  
is disarmed. The buzz continues until the point regardless of the armed state. The buzz  
restores and the user acknowledges the  
condition using a pass code or COMMAND 4.  
The point must be normal before the user can  
silence the buzz.  
continues until the point restores and the  
user acknowledges the condition using a  
pass code or COMMAND 4. The point must  
be normal before the user can silence the  
buzz.  
2
3
The point buzzes at the keypad for any fault  
condition when the point is disarmed. The  
user can silence the buzz before the point  
returns to normal.  
The point buzzes at the keypad for any fault  
condition regardless of the armed state.  
The point does not need to be normal before  
the user can silence the buzz.  
The point buzzes at the keypad for any fault  
condition when the area is disarmed. The user  
cannot silence this buzz, but it silences  
The point buzzes at the keypad for any fault  
condition regardless of the armed state.  
The user cannot silence this buzz, but it  
silences automatically when the point is  
automatically when the point is restored. If the  
fault condition results in a trouble response, the restored. If the fault condition results in a  
keypad continues to buzz even after the user  
acknowledges the condition if the fault is still  
present.  
trouble response, the keypad continues to  
buzz even after the user acknowledges the  
condition if the fault is still present.  
Points bypassed (by the user, Sked, Swinger Bypass, or RPS) do not generate a Buzz On Fault  
condition at the keypad.  
The buzz does not automatically stop when the point is restored when using Option 1 or 2. The user  
must acknowledge the buzz before the buzz stops. However, when using Option 3, the buzz stops  
automatically when the point restores to normal without user intervention.  
P## Watch Point  
Default: Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
Activates Watch Mode responses if  
the point is faulted while the control  
panel is in Watch Mode.  
No  
Does not activate Watch Mode  
responses for this point.  
Use this option to allow a Controlled point to generate  
a watch tone while the area is disarmed and not  
faulted to a trouble or alarm condition.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 97  
P## RlyResp Type  
P## Disp as Dvc  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Blank, 1 to 2  
Blank  
Point state does not affect the  
operation of the corresponding relay.  
Yes  
Display CHECK DEVICE when this  
point is off-normal.  
1
Relay Follows Point: The relay  
corresponding with this point  
activates when the point is faulted to  
any off-normal condition, even if the  
point is bypassed. The relay  
automatically resets when the point  
returns to normal.  
No  
Do not display CHECK DEVICE  
when this point is off-normal.  
Use P## Disp as Dvc to cause the keypad to display  
CHECK DEVICE when a point is off-normal or is  
acknowledged after going into alarm.  
Use this function for devices with a dry  
contact output that faults a point when  
the device is in a trouble condition.  
2
Relay Latches: The relay  
corresponding with this point latches  
when the point enters into an alarm  
condition. This relay provides a  
steady output until the alarm is  
P## Local While Disarmed  
acknowledged by a valid pass code,  
then cleared from alarm memory with  
an acknowledgment from the keypad.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
Suppress Alarm, Trouble and  
Use this option to cause a relay (1 to 127 for  
D9412GV2; 1 to 64 for D7412GV2) to respond when  
a corresponding point with the same number (1 to  
127) is faulted. This requires connecting D8129  
OctoRelays to Zonex Bus 1 and Zonex Bus 2  
(D9412GV2 only). Refer to the address settings on  
the back of the D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Program  
Record Sheet  
Restoral* Reports from this point  
while the area to which it is assigned  
is disarmed.  
No  
Send event reports occurring from  
this point while the area is disarmed.  
* Transmission of Restoral Reports continues if the alarm,  
trouble, or bypass (by Sked, RPS, or Swinger bypass)  
condition occurred when the area disarmed, and the point  
restored.  
(P/N: F01U003635).  
Point 128 is reserved for use other than  
an actual point. Only the first 127 points  
can have an associated relay. Relays are  
not available for Points 129 to 247.  
To meet UL 864 requirements for  
Central Station and Remote Station  
applications, set this parameter to No.  
Use this option to allow a Controlled point (P## Type  
1, 2, 3), to report Alarms, Troubles, and Restoral  
Reports only when the area is armed. This prompt  
does not affect local annunciation.  
Do not use the Chg Relays? function to  
toggle relays reserved for special  
functions. Special function relays are  
Area and Panel Wide Relay functions as  
well as relays assigned to CC Entr Key  
Rly and P## RlyResp Type.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 98  
Local While Disarmed suppresses all  
reports from 24-hour points. Do not use  
P## Type 0 for this prompt. Remember  
that this option works only for Disarmed  
points, and a Type 0 is a 24-hour Always  
Armed point. Instead, choose any type  
other than 0, and use a point response  
that reports an alarm, whether or not the  
point is armed. For instance, P## Type 1  
and P## Response 9 reports an alarm on  
an open or a short (I) whether the area is  
armed or not.  
Local While Armed suppresses all reports  
from 24-hour points. Do not use P## Type  
0 for this prompt. This setting works only  
for disarmed points. Type 0 is a 24-hour,  
always armed point. Choose any Type  
other than 0, and use a point response  
that reports an alarm whether or not the  
point is armed. For instance, P## Type 1  
and P## Response 9 reports an alarm on  
a trouble or a short whether or not the  
area is disarmed.  
Local While Armed affects Keyswitch  
Points. This prompt suppresses  
keyswitch (alarms, troubles, and  
restorals) and D279 (opening, closing,  
troubles, and restorals). Do not use this  
parameter for controlled points that arm  
or disarm.  
Local While Disarmed affects Keyswitch  
points. This prompt suppresses  
keyswitch (troubles and restorals) and  
D279 (alarms, troubles, and restorals).  
Do not use this parameter for these  
applications.  
P## Local While Armed  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
P## Disable Rst  
Default:  
No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
Suppress Alarm, Trouble and  
Yes  
Enable Restoral Reports from this  
Restoral* Reports from this point  
while the area to which it is assigned  
is armed.  
point.  
No  
Disable Restoral Reports from this  
point.  
No  
Report events occurring from this  
point while the area is armed.  
To meet UL 864 requirements for  
Central Station and Remote Station  
applications, set this parameter to No.  
* Transmission of Restoral Reports continues if the alarm,  
trouble, or bypass (by Sked, RPS, or Swinger bypass)  
condition occurred when the area disarmed, and the point  
restored.  
Use this option to disable any Restoral Reports from  
this point after it returns to normal from an alarm or  
trouble condition.  
To meet UL 864 requirements for  
Central Station and Remote Station  
applications, set this parameter to No.  
P## FA Retrnable  
Default:  
No  
Allows a controlled point (P## Type 1, 2, 3), to report  
Alarms, Troubles, and Restoral Reports only when  
the area is disarmed. This prompt does not affect  
local annunciation.  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
This point automatically returns to the  
system when it restores to normal.  
This point stays out of the system  
until the area is disarmed.  
Use this option to allow points that were force armed  
out of the area to return back to the armed state when  
they become normal again without having to disarm  
the system.  
Use on loading dock doors, that must  
remain open until loading is completed.  
After the loading dock door is closed, the  
point detects any subsequent opening  
and reports an alarm.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 99  
Bypassing a 24-hour point: When a 24-hour point or  
24-hour Supervisory point is bypassed, 24 HOUR  
BYPASS scrolls continuously at the keypad.  
P## BP Retrnable  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Bypassing a Fire Point: FIRE BYPASS scrolls to  
indicate that a 24-hour Fire point or a Fire Supervisory  
point is bypassed.  
Yes or No  
This point automatically returns to  
the system when the area is  
disarmed.  
Alternative to a 24-hour Point: For  
alarm capability of a 24-hour point  
without the continuous scrolling, use a  
Perimeter point with a Point Response of  
9 to E.  
No  
This point stays out of the system  
through arming and disarming  
cycles.  
Use this option to return a point that was bypassed,  
force armed, or swinger bypassed back into the  
system when the area to which this point is assigned  
is disarmed. This option applies to all point types.  
If the P## Bypassable option is set to  
Yes, a point can be bypassed in several  
ways. Refer to Table 31.  
Set this item to No for Interlock points.  
Table 31: Bypassing a Point  
When the point cannot return to the  
system through disarming, the point must  
be manually unbypassed using the  
Unbypass?, keypad function, Sked  
Functions 4 and 5, or remote  
Bypass with:  
Report sent:  
Keypad using the Bypass?  
function  
Command Bypass  
Keypad using Command 0  
Sked Function 3  
Command Bypass  
Sked Bypass  
programming software (RPS).  
Remote programming software  
(RPS)  
RPS Bypass  
For Force Armed points to remain  
bypassed, ensure that P## FA Retrnable  
is set to No.  
RPS Bypass is sent at the end of the RPS session.  
If the P## Swinger Byps option is set  
to Yes, a point is automatically bypassed  
after the fourth alarm or trouble report is  
sent. A swinger Bypass report is sent at  
the same time.  
P## Bypassable  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Programming Bypassable as Yes for  
Cross Points can cause missed Cross-  
Point alarms. For example, if Points 1  
and 2 were programmed as Cross Points  
and Point 1 was Bypassed or Force  
Armed, Point 2 cannot generate an Alarm  
Cross Point Event. Point 2 can; however,  
generate an Unverified or Alarm Event  
depending on how the point was faulted.  
Be careful when using this feature with  
Cross Point applications.  
This point can be bypassed and  
force armed.  
No  
This point cannot be bypassed or  
force armed from the keypad or  
remote programming software  
(RPS); however, it can be force  
armed by automatic arming at the  
end of the Closing Window (refer to  
the A# Auto Close prompt in  
Section 2.9.5 Open/Close Options  
on page 43 or by a Sked  
programmed to arm the area.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set this  
parameter to No.  
Use this option to allow this point to be bypassed or  
force armed.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 100  
P## Swinger Byps  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
P## Defer BP Report  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
Enable Swinger Bypass for this point.  
Send a Point Bypass Report with the  
Closing Report instead of a  
Disable Swinger Bypass for this  
point.  
Command Bypass Report when a  
user bypasses the point.  
To meet UL requirements, set this  
parameter to No.  
No  
Do not defer Bypass Reports.  
Use this option to prevent P## Type (0 to F) points  
that are bypassed by the user (COMMAND BYPASS)  
from occurring until the area is armed. When the area  
is armed, the bypassed points and any point being  
bypassed during the arming sequence report as  
POINT BYPASS along with the Closing Report.  
Use the P## Swinger Byps parameter to allow the  
control panel to bypass automatically a point that  
reports two or more alarm or trouble events within the  
same arm cycle. The maximum number of faults  
allowed on a point is set in the Swinger Count  
prompt (refer to page 141).  
When P## Defer BP Report is set to Yes  
and Closing Reports are suppressed by  
using Closing Windows, the deferred  
Bypass Reports are not sent.  
The control panel reports a Swinger Bypass when the  
Swinger Count is reached and P## Report Bypass at  
Occurrence is set to Yes. If the point has a partial  
count (less than the Swinger Count number of events  
during an hour), the count is reset to zero.  
Bypass Reports for 24-hour points do not  
report If P## Report Bypass at  
Occurrence and P## Defer Bypass  
Report are both set to No.  
P## Bypassable does not need to be  
programmed as Yes for swinger bypass  
to work.  
To report the bypass at occurrence and  
when the area is armed, program P##  
Report Bypass at Occurrence and P##  
Defer Bypass Report as Yes. A  
Command Bypass Report is sent as soon  
as the user manually bypasses a point,  
and a supplemental Point Bypass Report  
is sent with the Closing Report.  
A Swinger Shunted point returns to the  
system if P## BP Returnable? is Yes. If  
not, return the point to the system  
through manual unbypass or  
[COMMAND][0][0]. Refer to P## BP  
Retrnable in the program entry guide for  
additional information.  
P## Cross Point  
P## Report Bypass at Occurrence  
Default:  
No  
Default:  
No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
This point is a Cross Point.  
Yes  
No  
Send a Command Bypass Report  
This point is not a Cross Point.  
when the point is bypassed.  
Do not send a Command Bypass  
Report when the point is bypassed.  
Do not use Cross points for Fire points.  
Send a Command Bypass Report as soon as a user  
bypasses the point from the keypad. Enable this  
option for all Bypassable 24-hour points. You can also  
report a bypassed point at the time the area is armed.  
Refer to P## Defer BP Report on page 100.  
The P## Cross Point option is designed to reduce  
false alarms. To achieve this, program two or more  
points within a Cross Point Group with this prompt  
enabled. The Cross point feature is available only on  
points where P## Pt Response is set to a value that  
generates an instant alarm response.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 101  
The Cross Point feature does not activate when a  
P## Alarm Verify  
fault occurs on Controlled points (Point Types 1, 2  
and 3) in the disarmed, entry delay, or exit delay  
states. Refer to Section 6.9 Cross Point Parameters  
on page 142 for additional programming requirements  
to program the Cross Point Timer.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
Enable alarm verification on this  
point.  
If an abort window delay is needed for the cross zone  
alarms, all cross zone points in the group must have  
P## Alarm Abort (refer to page 102)set to Yes.  
Alarm verification points must be  
programmed as resettable.  
The Cross Point function applies only to  
Instant Alarm conditions. It does not  
apply to Trouble or Supervisory  
conditions.  
No  
Disable alarm verification on this  
point.  
Use this option only with Fire points to designate them  
for alarm verification.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
When an Alarm Verification point enters into alarm,  
the control panel removes power to all Resettable  
points for the duration programmed in A# Verify Time  
in Section 2.9 Area Parameters on page 36. If the  
point (or another Resettable point in the area) is still  
faulted, or returns to a faulted state within 60 sec after  
the initial verification time reset, an alarm is  
generated.  
P## Cross Point can be set to Yes or No.  
P## Fire Point  
Default:  
No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
This point is a Fire point.  
During a Fire Walk Test the reset time is  
5 sec. The time programmed in A# Verify  
Time is ignored.  
This point is not a Fire point.  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set this  
parameter to Yes for all applicable Fire  
points.  
P## Resettable  
Use this option to make a 24-hour point a Fire point.  
This option makes this point the highest priority event  
in the control panel when an alarm occurs for both  
reporting and displaying on the keypad. Refer to  
Section 4.2.2 Characteristics of a Fire Point on page  
92.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
This point is reset by the Reset  
Sensor? function and during the  
alarm verification sequence.  
This point is not resettable.  
You should dedicate a fire annunciation  
device to all your Fire points if they are  
assigned to a single area in a multiple  
area system. Special red keypads and  
annunciators with specific keys for fire  
systems are designed for this type of  
application (D1256RB and D1257RB).  
To meet UL 864 requirements, set this  
parameter to Yes for applicable  
resettable points.  
Use this option if this is a Powered point that requires  
interruption of power to reset a latched alarm  
condition. The Resettable point option is typically  
used with smoke detectors and glass break detectors.  
Do not use the Cross point function for  
Fire points.  
When initiated (either through a Fire Walk Test or the  
keypad’s Reset Sensor? function) or when the remote  
programming software (RPS) interrupts power to the  
device for 5 sec, a Sensor Reset report is sent to the  
central station receiver.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 102  
4.3  
Point Assignments  
When a sensor reset occurs, the control  
panel does not accept alarms from any  
points with P## Resettable programmed  
as Yes. During the 5-sec reset time,  
alarms from these points are ignored.  
These entries assign point indexes to Points 1 to 127,  
129 to 247 for the D9412GV2 and Points 1 to 75 for  
the D7412GV2, and assign the points to the areas.  
Also included in this section are parameters used to  
set the point’s debounce count, BFSK/Relay (for use  
when transmitting in BFSK or assigning relays to  
follow alarms for a group of points), and custom  
keypad and report text for each point.  
Do not mix fire and intrusion devices on  
the same powered loop.  
P## Alarm Abort  
Point Number  
Default:  
Yes  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Selection: 1 to 127, 129 to 247  
Yes  
If the point goes into an alarm  
condition, the system delays the  
alarm report for the amount of time  
specified in the control panel-wide  
parameter Abort Window.  
Enter the point number you are programming. When  
transmitting in Modem IIIa2, the three-digit point  
number is reported to the D6500 or D6600. When  
transmitting in BFSK, you must assign a zone number  
in BFSK/Relay.  
No  
If the point goes into an alarm  
condition, alarm reports are sent  
immediately.  
Point number 128 is reserved for  
supervising Zonex 1.  
Point number 248 is reserved for  
supervising Zonex 2.  
This parameter allows points with the associated  
Point Index to delay a Burglar Alarm (non-fire) event  
for the time period specified in the Abort Window. An  
alarm is aborted by performing an alarm silence  
operation at a keypad showing the burglar alarm  
condition before this time elapses.  
P### Point Index  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
When an alarm is successfully aborted, the keypad  
shows an optional ALARM NOT SENT message and  
no event is sent or written in the control panel event  
log. Refer to CC# Abort Display on page 56.  
Selection: Blank (00) to 31  
This entry selects one of the 31 P## Index codes that  
define the point’s characteristics and determines how  
the control panel responds to various point conditions.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
Blank (00) disables the point.  
P## Alarm Abort can be set to Yes or No.  
Missing Point Report  
If a Point Index is assigned to a point that has an  
incorrect address or that is not connected to the point  
bus, a Missing Point Report occurs.  
This feature does not apply to Fire Alarms  
or invisible point alarms.  
When a POPIT is missing, the control panel  
generates the following responses based on the point  
type:  
•
•
Fire points generate missing trouble responses.  
Non-fire 24-hour points generate missing alarm  
responses.  
•
Non-fire, non 24-hour points generate missing  
alarm responses while armed, and trouble  
responses while disarmed. Exception: Non-fire,  
non-24-hour points with a point response of 9 to  
D generate a missing alarm response while  
disarmed.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 103  
POPIT modules monitor their sensor loops for three  
P### BFSK/Relay  
conditions: loop normal, loop open, and loop shorted.  
They send reports on these three conditions to the  
control panel. The control panel uses point  
programming to interpret the sensor loop information  
sent by the POPITs and to make the appropriate  
system response.  
Default:  
Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: 0 to 9  
Use this option to:  
•
Determine the point number sent in BFSK format  
when this point is faulted.  
P### Area Assign  
•
Activate a relay when the point is faulted, even if  
the control panel is programmed for Modem IIIa2  
reporting format. Refer to Table 32.  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
BFSK/Relays do not activate for Fire  
Supervisory or Non-Fire Supervisory  
points.  
The areas are numbered 1 to 8. Select the area  
number to which the point is assigned.  
P### Debounce  
Table 32: P### BFSK/Relay Codes/Relays  
Default:  
2
Selection 1 to 15  
:
Faults Relay  
D8129 on  
Zonex Bus 2  
for D9412GV2*  
D8129 on  
Zonex Bus 1  
for D7412GV2*  
1
.300 sec  
.600 sec  
.900 sec  
1.2 sec  
1.5 sec  
1.8 sec  
2.1 sec  
2.4 sec  
2.7 sec  
3.0 sec  
3.3 sec  
3.6 sec  
3.9 sec  
4.2 sec  
4.5 sec  
2
BFSK Code  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
9
3
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
4
5
6
7
8
9
* Address setting = 1 (on), 2 (off), 3 (on), 4 (on)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Local annunciation on the keypads, Local  
Printer reports, and the View Log show  
the actual point number (1 to 247), not  
the BFSK report code  
Do not assign a BFSK or relay to Invisible  
points. To avoid activating one of the  
associated relays, program this prompt  
as 0.  
The debounce count is the number of times the  
control panel scans a point before generating an  
alarm. Scan cycles are 300 ms.  
On the D9412GV2, do not use Relays 73  
through 80 for Area or Panel-Wide Relay  
function when this prompt is enabled for  
the corresponding points. Refer to Table  
32.  
For appropriate settings consult the manufacturer’s  
instructions for the device connected to this point.  
Use an entry of two or higher. Interior  
Follower points need a Debounce value  
of at least three.  
On the D7412GV2, do not use Relays 9  
through 16 for Area or Panel-Wide Relay  
function when this prompt is enabled for  
the corresponding points. Refer to Table  
32.  
Door points assigned to D9210B  
modules need a Debounce value of at  
least four.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 104  
4.4  
COMMAND 7 and COMMAND 9  
Two relays can activate when this point  
enters into alarm if the P## Rly Resp  
Type for this point is programmed.  
These entries assign point indexes, BFSK report  
code, BFSK relay that activates, and the text for the  
COMMAND 7 and COMMAND 9 keypad functions.  
Use these codes to activate relays on the  
D8129 OctoRelay (or C8137 Transmitter  
Interface). You can assign the same code  
to several points providing a summary  
zone alarm output. When the point enters  
into alarm, the relay activates. When the  
alarm is acknowledged and is no longer  
scrolling in the keypad display, the relay  
resets.  
CMD7 Point Index  
Default:  
31  
Selection: Blank (00) to 31  
This entry selects one of the 31 P## Index codes that  
define how the control panel reacts when a  
COMMAND 7 is initiated.  
The point index code used for  
COMMAND 7 must not be used for any  
other points on the system.  
P### Point Text  
Default: Refer to the program record sheet  
Selection: Up to sixteen alphanumeric  
characters  
If the point index for COMMAND 7 has  
Fire points programmed as Yes, this  
causes access control doors to unlock if  
Fire Unlock is also programmed as Yes.  
Refer to the D9210B Program Entry  
Guide  
Enter alphabetic characters (A to Z) in capital letters.  
Enter up to sixteen characters of text to describe the  
point. This point text is shown at keypads, if the point  
is programmed as visible, and sent to the D6500 or  
D6600 when transmitting in Modem IIIa2 format (if it is  
a reporting point).  
(P/N: 32207).  
Include the point number in custom point text. This  
helps the user when viewing events, creating  
bypasses, and so on. It can also simplify  
troubleshooting.  
CMD7 BFSK/Relay  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
0 to 9  
When a D1260 Keypad is installed on the  
system, the point text for Points 240 to  
247 can be used for Area Name Text for  
Areas 1 to 8, respectively. Refer to Table  
33:  
This entry selects one of the digits shown for reporting  
in BFSK or for activating relays 73 to 80 (on the  
D9412GV2) or relays 9 to 16 (for the D7412GV2)  
when COMMAND 7 is initiated (refer to the  
P### BFSK/Relay prompt on page 103).  
COMMAND 7 does not activate the  
Summary Fire Alarm relay.  
Table 33: Point Text for Points 240 to 247  
Point Text Corresponding Area Name Text  
CMD7 Point Text  
Point 240  
Point 241  
Point 242  
Point 243  
Point 244  
Point 245  
Point 246  
Point 247  
Area 1  
Area 2  
Area 3  
Area 4  
Area 5  
Area 6  
Area 7  
Area 8  
Default:  
[COMMAND][7]  
Selection: Up to sixteen alphanumeric  
characters  
Enter alphabetic characters A to Z in capital letters  
Enter up to sixteen characters of text to describe the  
point. This point text appears at keypads (if the point  
is programmed as visible) and sent to the D6500 or  
D6600 when transmitting in Modem IIIa2 format (if it is  
a reporting point).  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 4.0 RADXPNTS  
EN | 105  
CMD9 Point Index  
Default:  
31  
Selection: Blank (00) to 31  
This entry selects one of the 31 P## Index codes that  
define how the control panel reacts when a  
COMMAND 9 is initiated.  
The point index code used for  
COMMAND 7 and COMMAND 9 must not  
be used for any other points on the  
system.  
If the point index for COMMAND 9 has  
Fire points programmed as Yes, this  
causes access control doors to unlock if  
Fire Unlock is also programmed as Yes.  
Refer to the D9210B Program Entry  
Guide  
(P/N: 32207).  
CMD9 BFSK/Relay  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
0 to 9  
The value in this entry selects one of the digits shown  
for reporting in BFSK or for activating relays 73 to 80  
(on the D9412GV2) or relays 9 to 16 (for the  
D7412GV2) when a COMMAND 9 is initiated (refer to  
the P### BFSK/Relay prompt in Section 4.3 Point  
Assignments on page 103).  
COMMAND 9 does not activate the  
Summary Fire Alarm relay.  
CMD9 Point Text  
Default:  
[COMMAND][9]  
Selection:  
Up to sixteen alphanumeric  
characters  
Enter alphabetic characters (A to Z) in capital letters  
Enter up to sixteen characters of text to describe the  
point. This point text is displayed at keypads (if the  
point is programmed as visible) and sent to the D6500  
or D6600 when transmitting in Modem IIIa2 format (if it  
is a reporting point).  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 106  
Table 34: Window Selections  
5.0 RADXSKED  
5.1  
Windows  
Selectio  
n
Sked # Windo  
w
Sked # Windo  
w
Use this programming module to define the windows  
for Opening and Closing and User Access.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
55  
Open  
Open  
Open  
Open  
Open  
Open  
Open  
Open  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
56  
Close  
Close  
Close  
Close  
Close  
Close  
Close  
Close  
5.1.1 Opening and Closing  
Use these windows to set a schedule for disarming  
and arming. The disarming and arming schedules  
have several independent features:  
•
•
•
•
•
Suppress normal Opening or Closing Reports  
when A# Disable O/C in Windows is  
programmed as Yes.  
Generate a Fail to Open Report if the area is not  
disarmed on schedule when A# Fail To Open is  
programmed as Yes.  
Window  
Provide a warning tone and a PLEASE CLOSE  
NOW display at the keypad when it is time to arm  
the area.  
Default:  
1
Selection: 1 to 8  
Enter the window number you want to program.  
Generate a Fail to Close Report if the area is not  
armed on schedule when A# Fail To Close is  
programmed as Yes.  
W# Sunday  
Automatically arm the area at the end of the  
Closing Window when A# Auto Close is  
programmed as Yes.  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Activate this window on Sundays.  
Opening and closing schedules can be set up  
independently. For example, if you want to use  
features provided only by Closing Windows, leave  
times blank in the Opening Windows prompts and  
program Closing Window times.  
No  
Do not activate this window on  
Sundays.  
This prompt and the next six day-of-the-week  
prompts select the days of the week the Opening and  
Closing windows are active.  
A worksheet is provided at the end of this section for  
your convenience. Following the worksheet are  
examples of programmming Opening and Closing  
Windows for particular applications (refer to Table 38  
on page 112 through Table 42 on page 113).  
Exceptions:  
To prevent the windows from activating on certain  
days of the year, program Xept Holiday as Yes, and  
enable at least one Holiday Index. When Xept  
Holiday is Yes, the window executes on the days of  
the week programmed unless the Holiday Index  
designates the date as a holiday.  
About the program record sheet: A column labeled  
Sked # is found in the program record sheet provided  
with the control panel. The numbers in that column  
appear in D6500 and D6600 reports and local printer  
reports when the window Begin Time executes.  
If Opening and Closing Windows are only needed on  
certain days of the year, do not program the windows  
to execute on any days of the week. Instead,  
program Xept Holiday as No and select a Holiday  
Index with the days of the year you want the window  
to be active.  
Window selections 1 through 8 correspond with odd-  
numbered Skeds 41 through 55 for Open Window  
and correspond with even numbered Skeds 42  
through 56 for Close Window. For example, when the  
Opening Window for Window 1 executes, a Sked 41  
Executed event is generated. Refer to Table 34.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 107  
•
If Disable O/C in Window is set to No and the  
area is disarmed at any time, an Opening Event  
is sent without an Early to Open or Late to Open  
modifier.  
W# Monday  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Disarming the area between the Open Window Start  
and open Window Stop times creates a local event in  
the control panel event log, but does not send the  
Opening Report to the central station.  
W# Tuesday  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Disarming the area between the Open Window Stop  
time and before the next window’s Open Early Begin  
time (or midnight, whichever is earlier) generates an  
Opening Event with a Late to Open modifier.  
W# Wednesday  
Default:  
No  
When configuring multiple windows to operate on the  
same day, ensure that they are added to the system  
in chronological order. For example, if three windows  
are programmed to execute on Tuesday, Window 1  
(W1) must occur before Window 2 (W2), and Window  
2 must occur before Window 3 (W3).  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
W# Thursday  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Avoid programming the Open Early Begin  
time before a time that is between  
another window’s Open Window Start  
and Open Window Stop times.  
W# Friday  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Do not program a window to cross the  
midnight boundary.  
W# Saturday  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Disabled windows have a blank beginning time. If the  
entry for this prompt is blank, but times are  
programmed for Open Window Start and Open  
Window Stop, the window is disabled.  
W# Open Early Begin  
Default:  
00:00  
To disable the window, all hours and minutes spaces  
must be blank.  
Selection:  
HH:MM (hours and minutes)  
00:00 to 23:59  
Make time entries using a 24-hour clock.  
For example:  
Open Early Begin: This program item is one of three  
required to create an Opening Window. To finish  
programming an Opening Window, Open Window  
Start and Open Window Stop must be programmed.  
Midnight is entered as 00:00  
7:00 AM is entered as 07:00  
2:45 PM is entered as 14:45  
11:59 PM is entered as 23:59  
The time programmed in the W# Open Early Begin  
field is the earliest time that the user is allowed to  
open an area before the Opening Window Start time.  
If Opening and Closing Reports are enabled,  
disarming the area between midnight and the open  
Early Begin time generates an Opening Report.  
Reboot the control panel to activate today’s window,  
if the window needs to activate on the same day you  
program it.  
•
If A# Disable O/C in Window is set to Yes and  
the area is disarmed between the Open Early  
Begin time and the Open Window Start time, the  
Opening event is sent with an Early to Open  
modifier. If the Open Early Begin time is the  
same as the Open Window Start time, no  
Opening Event is sent.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 108  
W# Open Window Start  
Make time entries using a 24-hour clock.  
For example:  
Default:  
00: 00  
Midnight is entered as 00:00  
7:00 AM is entered as 07:00  
2:45 PM is entered as 14:45  
11:59 PM is entered as 23:59  
Selection:  
HH:MM (hours and minutes)  
Enter the time you want the control panel to start the  
Opening Window. The window goes into effect at the  
beginning of the minute.  
This program item is one of three required to create  
an Opening Window. To program an Opening  
Window, Open Early Begin and Open Window Start  
must also be programmed.  
Make time entries using a 24-hour clock.  
For example:  
Midnight is entered as 00:00  
7:00 AM is entered as 07:00  
2:45 PM is entered as 14:45  
11:59 PM is entered as 23:59  
If the area is not disarmed by the time the Open  
Window Stop time expires, the control panel  
generates a Fail to Open Report if A# Fail to Open is  
enabled in Area-Wide Parameters.  
This program item is one of three required to create  
an Opening Window. To program an Opening  
Window, Open Early Begin and Open Window Stop  
must also be programmed. Refer to the W# Open  
Early Begin prompt on page 107 for explanations of  
report features.  
Opening Reports generated between the Open  
Window Start time and Open Window Stop time can  
be suppressed by programming A# Disable O/C in  
Window as Yes. Refer to the W# Open Early Begin  
prompt on page 107 for additional explanations of  
report features.  
W# Open Window Stop  
Do not use a time of 23:59 as a window  
stop time unless another window begins  
on the next day at 00:00.  
Default:  
00: 00  
Selection: HH:MM (hours and minutes)  
Fail to Open Reports are not sent for  
windows that stop at 23:59.  
Enter the time you want the control panel to end the  
Opening Window. The window stops at the end of the  
minute.  
Figure 5: Example Opening Window Timeline (using two Opening Windows on same day)  
8
4
1
3
6
9
5
7
2
1 - Areas disarmed between midnight and 6 AM  
generate Opening Reports.  
6 - Areas that are disarmed between 1 PM and 2  
PM generate Early to Open Reports.  
2 - Areas disarmed between 6 AM and 7 AM  
generate Early to Open Reports.  
3 - If the area is disarmed between 7 AM and 8 AM  
regular Opening Reports are generated. If  
Disable O/C in Window is programmed Yes the  
Opening Report is not sent to the central station.  
4 - If the area is not disarmed by 8:01 AM, a Fail to  
Open Event is generated if Fail to Open is  
programmed Yes in Opening and Closing  
Options.  
7 - If the area is disarmed between 2 PM and 3  
PM regular Opening Reports are generated. If  
Disable O/C in Window is programmed Yes,  
the Opening Report is not transmitted to the  
central station.  
8 - If the area is not disarmed by 3:01 PM, a Fail to  
Open Event is generated if Fail to Open is  
programmed Yes in Opening and Closing  
Options.  
9 - If the user disarms the area between 3:01 PM  
and 11:59 PM, a Late to Open Event is  
generated.  
5 - If the user disarms the area between 8:01 AM  
and 12:59, PM a Late to Open Event is  
generated.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 109  
Table 35: Programming for Two Same Day Opening Windows (refer to Figure 5)  
Open  
Close  
Start  
Early  
Begin  
Early  
Begin  
eXcept On  
Holiday  
Holiday  
Index  
W#  
Day of Week  
Area(s)  
Start  
Stop  
Stop  
1
S M T W T F  
06: 00  
07 : 00  
08: 00  
Yes / No  
1
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
S
2
S M T W T F  
13 : 00  
14 : 00  
15 : 00  
Yes / No  
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
S
Do not program a single window to cross the midnight boundary. The window stop time must be later than the  
window start time. To program a window that effectively crosses the midnight boundary, you must program two  
windows.  
For example, to program windows for an area that opens between 11:30 PM and 12:30 AM, five days a week,  
use two windows as shown in Table 36.  
Table 36: Programming to Link Two Days over Midnight*  
Open  
Close  
Start  
Early  
Begin  
Early  
Begin  
eXcept On  
Holiday  
Holiday  
Index  
W#  
Day of Week  
Area(s)  
Start  
Stop  
Stop  
1
S M T W T F  
S
22 : 00  
00 : 00  
23 : 30  
23 : 59  
Yes No  
1
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
2
S M T W T F  
00 : 00  
00 : 30  
Yes No  
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
S
* The setting for midnight is 00:00.  
sent without the Early to Close or late to Close  
modifiers.  
W# Close Early Begin  
Arming the area between the Close Window Start  
and Close Window Stop times creates a local event  
in the control panel event log, but does not send the  
Closing Report to the central station.  
Default:  
00: 00  
Selection:  
HH:MM (hours and minutes)  
00:00 to 23:59  
Close Early Begin: This program item is one of  
Arming the area after the Close Window Stop time  
and before the next window’s Close Early Begin time  
(or midnight, whichever is earlier) generates a  
Closing Event with a Late to Close modifier.  
three required to create a Closing Window. To finish  
programming a Closing Window, Close Window Start  
and Close Window Stop must be programmed.  
The time programmed in the Close Early Begin field  
is the earliest time the user can close an area before  
the Closing Window Start time. If Opening and  
Closing Reports are enabled, arming the area  
between midnight and the Close Early Begin time  
generates a Closing Report. Additionally:  
When configuring multiple windows to operate on the  
same day, ensure that they are added to the system  
in chronological order. For example, if three windows  
are programmed to execute on Tuesday, Window 1  
(W1) must occur before Window 2 (W2), and Window  
2 must occur before Window 3 (W3).  
•
If A# Disable O/C in Window is set to Yes and  
the area is armed between the Close Early Begin  
time and the Close Window Start time, the  
Closing Event is sent with an Early to Close  
modifier. If the Close Early Begin time is the  
same as the Close Window Start time, no Closing  
Event is sent.  
Avoid programming the Open Early Begin  
time before a time that is between  
another window’s Open Window Start  
and Open Window Stop times.  
Disabled windows have a blank beginning time. If the  
entry for this prompt is blank, but times are  
programmed for Close Window Start and Close  
Window Stop, the window is disabled.  
•
If A# Disable O/C in Window is set to No and  
the area is armed at any time, a Closing Event is  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 110  
To disable the window, both the hours and minutes  
spaces must be blank.  
W# Close Window Stop  
Default: 00: 00  
00:00 is midnight, 23:59 is 11:59 PM. Make entries  
using a 24-hour clock (for example, 7:00 AM is  
entered as 07:00, 2:45 PM is entered as 14:45).  
Selection: HH:MM (hours and minutes)  
Enter the time that you want the control panel to end  
the Closing Window. The window stops at the end of  
the minute.  
If the window must activate on the same day as it is  
programmed, reboot the control panel to activate the  
window immediately.  
00:00 is midnight, 23:59 is 11:59 PM. Make entries  
using a 24-hour clock (for example, 7:00 AM is  
entered as 07:00, 2:45 PM is entered as 14:45).  
W# Close Window Start  
Default:  
00: 00  
This program item is one of three required to create a  
Closing Window. To program a Closing Window,  
Close Early Begin and Close Window Start must also  
be programmed.  
Selection:  
HH:MM (hours and minutes)  
Enter the time that you want the control panel to start  
the Closing Window. The window goes into effect at  
the beginning of the minute.  
If the area is not armed by the time the Close  
Window Stop time expires, the control panel  
generates a Fail to Close Report if enabled in Fail To  
Close.  
00:00 is midnight, 23:59 is 11:59 PM. Make entries  
using a 24-hour clock (for example, 7:00 AM is  
entered as 07:00, 2:45 PM is entered as 14:45).  
This program item is one of three required to create a  
Closing Window. To program a Closing Window,  
Close Early Begin and Close Window Stop must also  
be programmed.  
Closing Reports generated between the Close  
Window Start time and Close Window Stop time can  
be suppressed by programming Disable O/C in  
Window as Yes. Refer to the W# Close Early Begin  
prompt for other explanations of report features.  
If the area is not armed when the Close Window Start  
time comes, a warning tone sounds and PLEASE  
CLOSE NOW appears at the keypad. To temporarily  
silence the tone, press the [ESC] key on the keypad.  
The warning tone restarts in 10 min if the area is not  
armed.  
Do not use a time of 23:59 as a window stop time  
unless the window continues on the next day at  
00:00. Fail to Close Reports are not sent, and the  
Auto Close feature does not work for windows that  
stop at 23:59.  
Refer to the W# Close Early Begin prompt in this  
section for explanations of report features.  
Do not program a single window to cross the  
midnight boundary. The window stop time must be  
later than the window start time. To program a  
window that effectively crosses the midnight  
boundary, you must program two windows.  
For example, to program windows for an area that  
closes between 11:30 PM and 12:30 AM, five days a  
week, use two windows as shown in Table 37.  
Table 37: Programming Example: Linking Two Closing Windows over Midnight  
Open  
Close  
Early  
Begi  
n
eXcept  
On  
Holiday  
Star  
t
Sto  
p
Early  
Begin  
Holiday  
Index  
W#  
Day of Week  
Area(s)  
Start  
Stop  
1
S M T W T F  
S
22 : 00  
00 : 00  
23 : 30  
23 : 59  
Yes No  
1
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
2
S M T W T F  
00 : 00  
00 : 30  
Yes No  
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
S
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 111  
W# Xept Holiday  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
W# Holiday 1  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
Do not activate this window on  
holidays.  
Yes  
Use Holiday Index 1 with this  
window.  
To use this selection, the window  
must be programmed to activate on  
at least one day of the week and a  
Holiday Index must be enabled.  
No  
Do not use Holiday Index 1 with this  
window.  
W# Holiday 2  
No  
A holiday does not prevent this  
window from activating.  
Default:  
No  
Selection: Yes or No  
You also use this selection if  
Yes  
No  
Use Holiday Index 2 with this window.  
Opening or Closing Windows are  
needed only on certain days of the  
year. Do not program the windows to  
execute on any days of the week.  
Instead, program Xept Holiday as  
No, and select at least one Holiday  
Index with the days of the year you  
want the window to be active.  
Do not use Holiday Index 2 with this  
window.  
W# Holiday 3  
Default:  
No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Determine if the window is disabled on holidays, or is  
active only on holidays.  
Yes  
No  
Use Holiday Index 3 with this window.  
Do not use Holiday Index 3 with this  
window.  
To prevent the windows from activating on certain  
days of the year, program Xept Holiday as Yes, and  
enable at least one Holiday Index. When Xept  
Holiday is programmed as Yes, the window  
executes on the days of the week programmed  
unless the date is designated as a Holiday by the  
Holiday Index(es) selected.  
W# Holiday 4  
Default:  
No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
Use Holiday Index 4 with this window.  
Holiday Indexes for O/C Windows  
Do not use Holiday Index 4 with this  
window.  
You can enable up to four Holiday Indexes for use  
with Opening/Closing Windows. Enable at least one  
Holiday Index if W# Xept Holiday is programmed as  
Yes for this window, or if you want this window to  
activate only on specific dates. Holidays are  
programmed in Section 5.3 Holiday Indexes on page  
124.  
W# Area 1 [through 8]  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Activate the window in the area  
number (#) specified.  
No  
Disable the window in the area  
number (#) specified.  
Eight separate program items determine whether a  
particular window activates in each of the eight areas  
of the control panel.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 112  
Table 38: Opening and Closing Windows Worksheet  
Open  
Start  
Close  
Start  
eXcept  
On  
Holiday  
Early  
Begin  
Early  
Begin  
Holiday  
Index  
W#  
Day of Week  
Area(s)  
Stop  
Stop  
1
S M T W T F  
S
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
Yes No  
Yes No  
Yes No  
Yes No  
Yes No  
Yes No  
Yes No  
Yes No  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S M T W T F  
S
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
S M T W T F  
S
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
S M T W T F  
S
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
S M T W T F  
S
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
S M T W T F  
S
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
S M T W T F  
S
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
S M T W T F  
S
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
_ _ : _  
_
Table 39: Opening and Closing Windows  
The column below briefly describes how  
to activate an Opening—Closing  
Window.  
Use the guidelines shown in the other  
columns to choose the appropriate  
entries.  
eXcept  
On  
Holiday  
Holiday  
Index  
Day of Week  
Areas  
Program at least Day(s) of the week  
No  
None  
Program at least  
one day Yes.  
one area Yes.  
Program at least Day(s) of the week, but not on holidays  
one day Yes.  
Yes  
Select at  
least one  
Index  
Program at least  
one area Yes.  
Program at least Day(s) of the Week, plus holidays  
one day Yes.  
No  
No  
Select at  
least one  
Index  
Select at  
least one  
Index  
Program at least  
one area Yes.  
All days must be Only on holidays  
programmed No.  
Program at least  
one area Yes.  
Table 40: Normal Store Hours*  
Open  
Close  
Start  
eXcept  
On  
Holiday  
Early  
Begin  
Early  
Begin  
Holiday  
Index  
W#  
Day of Week  
Area(s)  
Start  
Stop  
Stop  
1
S M T W T F  
S
04: 00  
05 : 00  
06: 00  
20: 00  
00: 00  
23 : 00 23: 59  
Yes No  
1
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
2
S M T W T F  
S
_ _ : _ _  
_ _ : _ _  
_ _ : _  
_
00 : 00 01 : 00 Yes No  
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
* Monday to Friday, Opening between 5 AM and 6 AM. Closing between 11 PM and 1 AM.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 113  
Table 41: Delivery Schedule*  
Open  
Close  
eXcept  
On  
Early  
Begin  
Early  
Holiday  
Index  
W#  
Day of Week  
Holiday  
Area(s)  
Start  
Stop  
Begin  
Start  
Stop  
3
S M T W T F  
02 : 30  
02 : 45  
03 : 00  
03 : 05  
03: 15  
03: 30  
Yes No  
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
S
00 : 00 01 : 00 Yes No  
Day(s) of the week, but not on holidays Yes  
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
Program at least  
one day Yes.  
Select at  
least one  
index  
Program at least  
one area Yes.  
* Monday and Wednesday, In between 2:45 AM and 3:00 AM. Out between 3:15 AM and 3:30 AM.  
Another alternative for delivery schedules is to automatically bypass specific points using skeds.  
Table 42: Monthly Auditor’s Schedule*  
Open  
Close  
eXcept  
On  
Early  
Begin  
Early  
Holiday  
Index  
W#  
Day of Week  
Holiday  
Area(s)  
Start  
Stop  
Begin  
Start  
Stop  
4
S M T W T F  
S
07 : 00  
08 : 00  
08 : 30  
14 : 00  
14: 30  
17: 00  
Yes No  
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
All days must be  
programmed No.  
Only on holidays  
No  
Select at  
least one  
index  
Program at least  
one area Yes.  
* Sunday, In between 8:00 AM and 8:30 AM. Out between 2:30 PM and 5:00 PM..  
5.1.2 User Group Windows  
User Windows #  
In this section, you can create up to eight User Group  
periods where the pass codes for the group chosen is  
enabled. One user group can have multiple windows  
assigned to it over a 24-hour period. Refer to the  
U### User Group prompt in Section 3.1 Pass Code  
or Token Worksheet to assign individuals to a group.  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Enter the User Windows number you want to  
program.  
When you assign a U### User Group to one of the  
eight windows, all pass codes for the group are  
enabled ONLY for the period between the Enable  
Time and Disable Time for assigned User Windows  
#.  
UW# User Group  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 8  
Enter the number programmed for the group of users  
in the U### User Group prompt. This group has its  
user pass codes enabled or disabled when this  
window runs.  
If a user is not assigned to a U### User Group or  
the number programmed for the user for U### User  
Group is not assigned to a User Windows #, the  
pass code for that user is enabled all the time.  
A User Group can be assigned to more  
than one window in a 24-hour period, but  
the windows must not overlap or exceed  
the midnight boundary.  
User Group Windows do not affect the  
users token or card access authority. To  
enable/disable tokens, the Sked Function  
Access Levels On/Off must be used.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 114  
UW# Sunday  
UW# Group Enable  
Default:  
No  
Default:  
00:00  
HH:MM (hours and minutes)  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
This prompt, and the next six day of the week  
prompts, select the days of the week that the User  
Group Window is active.  
This prompt must be programmed if this  
User Group Window is assigned to a user  
group.  
Refer to the W# Sunday prompt in  
Section 5.1.1 Opening and Closing on  
page 106 for more information about  
programming this prompt.  
Enter the time of day when the window starts.  
Beginning at this time, users assigned to this  
window’s group can use their pass codes. The  
window goes into effect at the beginning of the  
minute. Make entries using a 24-hour clock (for  
example, 7:00 AM is entered as 07:00, 2:45 PM is  
entered as 14:45).  
UW# Monday  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
If the window must activate on the same day that you  
program it, reboot the control panel to activate it  
immediately.  
UW# Tuesday  
Default:  
No  
Yes or No  
UW# Group Disable  
Selection:  
Default:  
00:00  
UW# Wednesday  
Selection:  
HH:MM (hours and minutes)  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
This prompt must be programmed if this  
User Group Window is assigned to a user  
group.  
UW# Thursday  
Default:  
No  
Enter the time of day when the window ends. This  
time marks the end of the period in which users  
assigned to this window’s group can use their pass  
codes. The window stops at the end of the minute.  
Make entries using a 24-hour clock (for example,  
7:00 AM is entered as 07:00, 2:45 PM is entered as  
14:45).  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
UW# Friday  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
To disable the window, both the hours and minutes  
spaces must be blank.  
UW# Saturday  
Default:  
No  
Yes or No  
Do not program a single window to cross the  
midnight boundary. The window stop time must be  
later than the window start time.  
Selection:  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 115  
Each sked can be programmed with up to four  
5.1.3 Holiday Indexes for User Group Windows  
Holiday Indexes. The Holiday Indexes can execute  
the sked on the holidays as well as on the date or  
day(s) of the week, or, they can prevent the sked  
from executing on the holidays (refer to S## Xept  
Holiday prompt in this section ).  
You can enable up to four Holiday Indexes to use  
with User Group Windows. Enable at least one  
Holiday Index if UW# Xept Holiday is programmed  
as Yes for this user window, or if you want this  
window to activate only on specific dates. Holidays  
are programmed in Holiday Indexes. Refer to Section  
5.3 Holiday Indexes on page 124 for programming  
information.  
Sked Number  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 40  
UW# Xept Holiday  
Enter the number of the sked you are programming.  
Default:  
No  
S## TimeEdit  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Determine if the window is disabled on holidays, or is  
active only on holidays. Use the instructions provided  
in the W# Xept Holiday prompt on page 111.  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes or No  
The user can edit the time of this  
sked from the keypad and  
UW# Holiday 1 [through 4]  
determines if this sked appears in  
the CHG SKED display.  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
No  
The user cannot edit the time of this  
sked from the keypad and the sked  
does not appear in the CHG SKED  
display.  
The selected holiday index can be  
used by users in the User Group  
window.  
Select whether the user can edit the time of this sked  
from the keypad.  
No  
The selected holiday index does not  
apply to users in this User Group.  
5.2  
Skeds  
Use the Skeds module to program the control panel  
to automatically execute functions that are otherwise  
started by the end user at the keypad. Each sked can  
be programmed to occur at a specific time on a  
specific date or day of the week. Up to 40 Skeds can  
be programmed.  
A sked can be edited from the keypad if S## Time  
Edit? is Yes. The date and time can be changed  
using the Change Sked function.  
Each sked number can be programmed with one of  
24 functions for the S## Function Code. In addition  
to the function, a choice must be made as to what is  
affected by the function. For example, when choosing  
Function 2 (Disarm Sked), the disarming is the  
function and the selected areas are what is affected.  
The functions and their associated parameters are  
listed in the Sked Function Code Table in the  
D9412GV/D7412GV2 Program Record Sheet  
(P/N: F01U003635), and they are explained in detail  
following the S## Function Code prompt on page  
116.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 116  
After you program the parameter choices associated  
with the Sked function, press [EXIT GROUP] to  
continue programming the sked for date, day of week,  
time, and holiday.  
S## Function Code  
Enter the function code you want this sked to execute.  
Sked Function 12 is reserved and is not a valid entry.  
The D5200 Programmer automatically retrieves the  
appropriate sub-menu when the user enters a  
function code. Refer to the following examples:  
•
Example 1: When Function Code 1 (Arm Area) is  
entered, the S## Area 1 [through 8] prompt  
appears.  
•
Example 2: When Function Code 3 (Bypass a  
Point) is entered, the S## Point Number prompt  
appears.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: 1 to 11, 13 to 24, 28, 29  
Arm Area: This function simulates  
the Master Arm Delay keypad  
function. Entries in the S## Area #  
prompts define the area(s) this sked  
arms. The sked can arm multiple  
areas. If any point is faulted when the  
sked executes, it is force armed  
regardless of the A# FA Bypass Max  
setting.  
1
Yes  
No  
Arm Area #.  
Default: No  
Do not arm  
Area #.  
Selections: Yes or No  
Enable the sked to arm the  
areas indicated with Yes.  
Disarm Area: This function emulates  
the DISARM #? or DISARM ALL?  
keypad function list options. Entries in  
the S## Area # prompts define the  
area(s) this sked disarms. The sked  
can disarm multiple areas.  
2
3
Yes  
No  
Disarm Area #.  
Default: No  
Do not disarm  
Area #.  
Selection: Yes or No  
Enable the sked to disarm the  
areas indicated with Yes.  
Bypass a Point: This function  
emulates the Bypass Pt? keypad  
function. The entry in the S## Point  
Number prompt defines the point this  
sked bypasses. The point can be  
bypassed only if Bypassable is  
programmed Yes in the point index  
assigned to the point. The bypass is  
reported if the Bypass Reports is  
enabled by the point index settings  
assigned to the point. The sked can  
bypass one point.  
Blank (0)  
No point is  
bypassed  
1 to 127,  
129 to  
247  
Default: Blank  
Point to bypass  
Selections: Blank, 1 to 127,  
129 to 247 for D9412GV2,  
1 to 75 for D7412GV2  
Enter the number of the point  
the sked bypasses.  
Unbypass a Point: This function  
emulates the Unbypass Pt? keypad  
function. The entry in the S## Point  
Number prompt defines the point this  
sked unbypasses. The sked can  
unbypass one point.  
4
Blank (0)  
No point is  
unbypassed.  
1 to 127,  
129 to  
247  
Default: Blank  
Point to  
unbypass.  
Selections: Blank, 1 to 127,  
129 to 247 for D9412GV2,  
1 to 75 for D7412GV2  
Enter the number of the point  
the sked unbypasses.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 117  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: 1 to 11, 13 to 24, 28, 29  
Unbypass All Points: This function  
is not available as a keypad function.  
The entry in the S## Area # prompt  
defines the area(s) where the sked  
unbypasses all points. The sked  
unbypasses all points in the area,  
regardless of how they were  
Yes  
No  
5
Unbypass all  
points in Area #.  
Default: No  
Do not  
unbypass all  
points in  
Area #.  
Selection: Yes or No  
Select Yes to unbypass all  
points in the areas indicated.  
bypassed. This sked can unbypass  
all points in multiple areas.  
Relay On: This function emulates  
the Chg Relay keypad function to  
turn relays on. The entry in the S##  
Relay Number prompt defines the  
specific relay this sked activates.  
The sked can activate one relay.  
6
Blank  
No relay is  
activated.  
Default: Blank  
1 to 128  
Relay to  
activate.  
Selections: Blank,  
1 to 128 for D9412GV2,  
1 to 64 for D7412GV2  
Enter the number of the relay  
the sked activates  
Relay Off: This function emulates  
the Chg Relay? keypad function to  
turn relays off. The entry in the S##  
Relay Number prompt defines the  
relay this sked turns off. The sked  
can turn off only relays that are set  
by a sked. The sked can turn off one  
relay.  
7
Blank  
No relay is  
turned off.  
Default: Blank  
1 to 128  
Relay to turn off.  
Selections: Blank,  
1 to 128 for D9412GV2,  
1 to 64 for D7412GV2  
Enter the number of the relay  
that turns the sked off.  
8
All Relays Off: This function is not available as a keypad function. This sked function turns off all  
relays that are turned on by a sked. This is a panel-wide function.  
No other parameters require input for this option.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 118  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: 1 to 11, 13 to 24, 28, 29  
Test Report: This function emulates  
the Test Report? sub-function of the  
Send Report? keypad function  
([COMMAND][4][1]). This function  
generates a Test Report only from  
Area 1 but contains panel-wide status  
information. The report is sent to the  
phone(s) programmed for Test and  
Status Reports in Section 2.3.8  
Dialing Attempts on page 16.  
9
Yes  
No  
Defer the Test  
Report.  
Default: No  
Send the Test  
Report on  
schedule.  
Selection: Yes or No  
Enable sked to defer the Test  
Report  
Yes  
No  
Send the Test  
Report every hour.  
Default: No  
Send the Test  
Report only as  
scheduled.  
If Expand Test Rpt in Phone  
Selection: Yes or No  
parameters is programmed as Yes,  
the Test Report also includes all off-  
normal states for events listed in Test  
Reports (refer to Table 13 on page  
20) and some events listed in  
Select Yes to send the Test  
Report every hour.  
Diagnostic Reports (refer to the  
footnotes with Table 14 on page 20)  
The Test Report can be deferred if  
any other report was sent since the  
last Test Report. To defer the Test  
Report, program S## Defer Test.  
The Test Report can be sent every  
hour beginning at the time scheduled  
in S## Time. To send a Test Report  
every hour, program S## Hourly Rpt.  
To meet UL 864  
requirements, use the  
Sked function to meet the  
daily Test Report  
requirement.  
Status Report: This function  
10  
Yes  
No  
Defer the Status  
Report.  
generates a Status Report for each  
area that is enabled. The report is  
sent to the phone(s) programmed for  
Test and Status Reports in Routing.  
Default: No  
Send the Status  
Report on  
schedule.  
Selection: Yes or No  
Enable sked to defer the  
Status Report.  
The Status Report can be deferred if  
any other report was sent since the  
last Status Report. To defer the  
Status Report, program S## Defer  
Status.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 119  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
1 to 11, 13 to 24, 28, 29  
11  
Execute Custom Func: This  
function emulates any of the custom  
functions assigned to the keypad  
that can be executed by a user from  
the keypad. When a sked executes  
a custom function, it is subject to  
the scope of the selected keypad.  
Cmd Center and Custom Func  
prompts appear after entering  
Function Code 11. Both entries are  
required.  
Blank  
(0)  
No keypad is  
specified for  
Custom Function  
activation.  
Default: Blank (0)  
Selections: Blank (0), 1 to 8  
Identify the specific keypad  
(CC #) where the Custom  
Function is entered. Only one  
keypad can be assigned for  
this sked function.  
1 to 8  
Command center  
(keypad) address  
specified for  
Custom Function  
activation.  
Blank  
(0)  
No Custom  
Function is  
activated.  
Default: Blank (0)  
Selections: Blank (0),  
128 to 143 for D9412GV2,  
128 to 131 for D7412GV2  
128 to  
143  
Custom Function  
to activate.  
Enter the custom function this  
sked executes.  
Avoid having multiple functions occur at the same time at the same address. Functions can clash  
and the effect on the control panel is unpredictable.  
Ensure that the Custom Function being executed or any of the commands nested inside the  
Custom Function are not pass-code protected.  
Do not program multiple skeds to execute at the same keypad during the same time.  
Do not program skeds to execute at times when a user is likely to be executing functions at the  
keypad. If it is necessary to do so, there are two ways to work around the situation:  
1. Program CC at the beginning of the Custom Function Key Strokes entry. This aborts the user’s  
function and allows the sked to execute.  
2. Program the sked to execute at an address (Cmd Center) with no keypad physically attached to  
it. The CC # must be assigned to an area and have the appropriate scope programmed.  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: 1 to 11, 13 to 24, 28, 29  
13 Adjust Time Forward One Hour: This sked function is used to make adjustments to the control  
panel’s clock. A typical application is to program this to go into effect at 2:00 AM on the date that  
Daylight Saving Time begins (during the springtime). No Time Change Report is sent or logged, but the  
new time appears in the next report logged.  
No other parameters require input for this option.  
14 Adjust Time Backward One Hour: This sked function is used to make adjustments to the control  
panel’s clock. A typical application is to program this to go into effect at 2:00 AM on the date that  
Daylight Saving Time ends (during the fall). This function can operate only once in a day, even if  
multiple Skeds with this function are programmed. No Time Change Report is sent or logged, but the  
new time appears in the next report logged.  
There are no other parameters that require input for this option.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 120  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
1 to 11, 13 to 24, 28, 29  
Sound Watch Tone at  
15  
Ye Watch tone sounds  
Default: Blank  
Command Center (Keypad): This  
function sounds the Watch Tone  
at the keypad address  
programmed in Parameter 1. The  
Watch Tone sounds at all  
keypads with the address  
programmed. Press [ESC] to  
silence the tone.  
s
at this keypad.  
Selection: Yes or No  
Watch tone does  
not sound at this  
keypad.  
No  
Enable the sked to beep the keypad  
programmed Yes.  
Sound Watch Tone defines the  
keypad address where the Watch  
Tone sounds. Enter the specific  
address at the S## Cmd Center  
prompt.  
Access Control Level On: This  
function emulates the ACCESS  
CMD LEVEL command that  
determines whether a user’s  
token or card level is ENABLED?,  
allowing access granted rights.  
This affects all doors that this  
user is assigned to with this  
specific authority level.  
16  
Ye Enable Access  
Default: No  
s
Control Level #  
Selection: Yes or No  
Do not enable  
Access Control  
Level #.  
No  
Activate a sked, which enables the  
Access Level(s) 1 through 14 with  
Yes.  
The D9412GV2 supports eight doors; the D7412GV2 supports two doors.  
To regulate a user’s access for certain doors, assign the user a different authority level # with the  
same authority functions enabled. For example, a user can be assigned Authority Level 1 for  
Door 1 and Authority Level 2 for the remaining doors. You can enable or disable Authority Level 1  
for Door 1 without affecting his authority level for Doors 2 through 8).  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: 1 to 11, 13 to 24, 28, 29  
Access Control Level Off:  
This function emulates the  
ACCESS CMD LEVEL  
command that determines  
whether a user’s token or card  
level is disabled. This function  
allows access to be turned off  
for the levels programmed.  
17  
Yes  
No  
Turn off access for  
level #.  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Do not turn off  
access for level #.  
The first parameter enables the sked  
to turn off access for Levels 1 through  
14.  
Unlock Door: This function  
emulates the UNLOCK?  
12345678 keypad function for  
unlocking a door.  
18  
Yes  
No  
Unlock Door #.  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Do not unlock  
Door #.  
Enable the sked to unlock the doors  
programmed Yes.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 121  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection: 1 to 11, 13 to 24, 28, 29  
Secure Door: This function  
emulates the SECURE?  
12345678 keypad function for  
securing a door.  
19  
Yes  
No  
Secure Door #.  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Do not secure  
Door #.  
Enable the sked to return the doors  
programmed Yes to the secured  
state.  
Lock Door: This function  
returns an unlocked (Function  
18) or secured (Function 19)  
door to a normal locked door  
state.  
20  
21  
Yes  
No  
Lock Door #.  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Do not lock Door  
#.  
Enable the sked to lock the doors  
programmed as Yes and return them  
to the normal Door Mode.  
Access Authority Events  
On: The control panel can log  
Access Granted Events when  
a valid token, RTE, REX, or  
Unlock Door event is detected  
for a specific door. These  
events can be directed to print  
at a local printer or send a  
report remotely through phone  
routing. This sked enables  
Access Granted Events to be  
reported for Door #.  
Yes  
No  
Enable the  
sending of Access  
Granted Events  
for Door #.  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Do not enable the  
sending of Access  
Granted Events  
for Door #.  
This parameter enables the sending  
of Access Granted Events for Door #.  
Access Authority Events  
Off: The control panel can log  
Access Granted Events when  
a valid token, RTE, REX, or  
Unlock Door Event is detected  
for a specific door. These  
events can be directed to print  
at a local printer or send a  
report remotely through phone  
routing. This sked disables  
Access Granted Events to be  
reported for Door #.  
22  
Yes  
No  
Disable the  
sending of Access  
Granted Events  
for Door #.  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
This parameter disables the sending  
of Access Granted Events for Door #.  
Do not disable the  
sending of Access  
Granted Events  
for Door #.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 122  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
1 to 11, 13 to 24, 28, 29  
No Entry Events On: The  
control panel can log No Entry  
Events when an invalid token is Default: No  
detected for a specific door. No  
Entry Events include No Entry-  
Secured, No Entry-Interlock, No  
Entry-Unknown ID, and No  
Entry-Level. These events can  
be directed to print at a local  
printer or send a report remotely  
through phone routing. This  
sked enables No Entry Events  
to be reported for Door #.  
23  
Yes  
No  
Enable the sending  
of No Entry Events  
for Door #.  
Selection: Yes or No  
Do not enable the  
sending of No  
Entry Events for  
Door #.  
This parameter enables the sending  
of No Entry Events for Door #.  
No Entry Events Off: The  
24  
Yes  
No  
Enable the  
control panel can log No Entry  
Events when an invalid token is  
detected for a specific door. No  
Entry Events include No Entry-  
Secured, No Entry-Interlock, No  
Entry-Unknown ID, and No  
Entry-Level. These events can  
be directed to print at a local  
printer or send a report remotely  
through phone routing. This  
sked disables No Entry Events  
to be reported for Door #.  
reporting of No  
Entry Events for  
Door #.  
Default: No  
Selection: Yes or No  
Do not enable the  
reporting of No  
Entry Events for  
Door #.  
This parameter disables the sending  
of No Entry Events for Door #.  
28 Expanded Off-Normal Test Report: To generate this event, one or more points must be in an off-  
normal state at the time the sked executes. In addition, any system trouble that is active also  
generates an Expanded Off-Normal Test Report. Expanded Off-Normal Test Reports include the Off  
Normal Test Report Event as well as the supplementary event at the time the report is generated.  
The Event Log shows only a Test Report Event.  
If none of these conditions exists at the time the sked executes, only a Sked Executed Event is  
generated and the Off-Normal Test Report is not sent.  
29 Non-Expanded Off-Normal Test Report: Non-Expanded Off-Normal Test Report Events are only  
sent when any point is in the off-normal state from any area, but only sends the Off Normal Test  
Report Event. Any system trouble that is active also generates a Non-Expanded Off-Normal Test  
Report.  
The Event Log only shows a Test Report Event.  
If none of these conditions exist at the time the sked executes, only a Sked Executed Event is  
generated and the Non-Expanded Off-Normal Test Report is not sent.  
To meet UL 864 daily Test Report requirements (when using two phone lines), you must still use  
Sked Function Code 9, Test Report and program it to occur on a daily basis as per AHJ  
requirements.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 123  
Exceptions:  
S## Time  
To prevent the sked from activating on certain days  
of the year, program Xept Holiday as Yes, and  
enable at least one Holiday Index. When Xept  
Holiday is programmed as Yes, the window  
executes on the days of the week programmed  
unless the date is designated as a holiday by the  
Holiday Index selected.  
Default:  
00:00  
Selection: HH:MM (hours and minutes)  
Enter the time that the sked executes. Make entries  
using a 24-hour clock (for example, 7:00 AM is  
entered as 07:00, 2:45 PM is entered as 14:45).  
Disabled skeds can have a blank time; however, to  
ensure that a sked is fully disabled, enter  
[COMMAND][5][2] (Change Skeds function) and  
select DISABLE?.  
If a sked is only needed on certain days of the year,  
do not program the sked to execute on specific days  
of the week. Instead, program Xept Holiday as No,  
and select a Holiday Index with the dates you want  
the window to be active.  
To program a time:  
1. Press the two digits representing the hour.  
2. The cursor advances past the colon (:) in the  
display.  
3. Press the two digits representing the minutes.  
4. Press [ENTER].  
To meet UL 864 requirements for  
Central Station and Remote Station  
applications, program each day of the  
week to Yes for the required Test  
Report Sked.  
S## Date  
S## Monday  
Default:  
_ _ / _ _  
Default:  
No  
Selection: MM/DD (month and date)  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Enter the date that the sked executes.  
S## Tuesday  
Disabled skeds have a blank date. If you copy the  
control panel and the entry for this prompt is blank,  
but dates were programmed before, the sked can be  
disabled from the keypad using the Change Skeds  
function.  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
S## Wednesday  
To program a date:  
Default:  
No  
1. Press the two digits representing the hour.  
2. The cursor advances past the colon (:) in the  
display.  
3. Press the two digits representing the minutes.  
4. Press [ENTER].  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
S## Thursday  
Default:  
No  
S## Sunday  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
S## Friday  
Yes or No  
Default:  
No  
Activate this sked on Sundays.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
No  
Do not activate this sked on  
Sundays.  
S## Saturday  
This prompt and the next six prompts select the days  
of the week when the sked is active.  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 124  
S## Xept Holiday  
5.3  
Holiday Indexes  
This programming module has two sections:  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Add/Change/Delete and View Holidays. Use the  
Add/Change/Delete section to program the Holiday  
Indexes. The View Holidays section is a view-only  
section provided for your convenience. Use View  
Holidays to review the dates programmed in the  
Holiday Indexes.  
Yes or No  
Prevent this sked from operating on  
the holidays identified in the specific  
Holiday Index(es) used with this  
sked. Specific Holiday Indexes are  
selected in this programming section  
and programmed in the next  
5.3.1 Add/Change/Delete  
Program the dates for each of the Holiday Indexes.  
You can program up to four Holiday Indexes in the  
control panel. Within each index, you can select up to  
365 dates to be designated as holidays.  
programming module.  
No  
This sked operates on holidays  
programmed in the Holiday  
Index(es) used with this sked.  
The Holiday Indexes function independently of each  
other. The same day can be programmed in all four  
schedules. Holiday Indexes are used in programming  
O/C Windows, User Access Windows, and skeds.  
If no days of the week are programmed, this sked  
operates only on the holidays programmed in the  
Holiday Index(es) used with this sked. This sked also  
operates if the holiday falls on a day of the week that  
is programmed.  
Date  
S## Holiday 1  
Default:  
_ _ / _ _  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
MM/DD (month and date)  
Selection: Yes or No  
This entry selects the month and day you are  
designating as a holiday.  
Yes  
No  
Use Holiday Index 1 with this sked.  
To program a date:  
Do not use Holiday Index 1 with this  
sked.  
1. Press the two digits representing the month.  
The cursor advances past the slash (/) in the  
display.  
S## Holiday 2  
2. Press the two digits representing the day of the  
month.  
3. Press [ENTER].  
Default:  
No  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
To delete a date:  
1. At the Date prompt, enter the month and day you  
want to delete and press [ENTER].  
2. Advance to the holiday index number that you  
want to delete the date from. Change the entry to  
No. Press [ENTER].  
S## Holiday 3  
Default:  
No  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
S## Holiday 4  
If you want the date completely removed as a  
Holiday, it must be programmed as No for all of  
the Holiday Index # entries.  
Default:  
No  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
Holiday Index 1  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Use this date in Holiday Index 1.  
No  
Do not use this date in Holiday  
Index 1.  
Holiday Index 2  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 5.0 RADXSKED  
EN | 125  
Holiday Index 3  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Holiday Index 4  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
5.3.2 View Holidays  
The View Holidays section is a view only section  
provided for your convenience. Use View Holidays to  
review the dates you programmed into each of the  
Holiday Indexes.  
You can view the first 100 dates programmed in each  
of the indexes.  
Index 1 Days  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Enter group or press [↓] key  
Press [ENTER GROUP] to view the dates  
programmed in Holiday Index 1.  
Press [↓] key to advance to the next Holiday Index.  
Index 2 Days  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Enter group or press [↓] key  
Index 3 Days  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Enter group or press [↓] key  
Index 4 Days  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Enter group or press [↓] key  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 126  
6.3  
SDI Automation  
6.0 GV2AUX  
SDI automation defines the characteristics of a serial  
interface module (SIM) when used with home or  
business automation software. The SIM is a two-way  
SDI to a serial communication module that allows the  
control panels to send and receive information to and  
from an external software program.  
6.1  
Introduction  
The GV2AUX Handler is used primarily for  
programming Enhanced Communication capabilities  
for the 9000GV2 Series Control Panels.  
“Enhanced communications” represents the ability to  
provide new communication functions for the control  
panels using the SDI bus including:  
The SIM can be a D9133, DX4010i, or  
DX4020 (configured to emulate serial  
communication).  
•
Routing control panel events to a network  
interface module (NIM).  
This automation protocol allows external software  
programs to interact and perform functions such as:  
A network interface module (NIM) can be  
a D9133TTL-E or a DX4020.  
•
•
•
arming and disarming areas,  
changing user pass codes and names, and  
turning relays on and off.  
•
Communicating with remote programming  
software (RPS) using a network interface module  
(NIM).  
The items described in this section allow some  
simple configuration options. To receive the SIM  
automation protocol; however, you must contact  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Technical Support at  
(888) 886-6189.  
•
Communicating with a remote or local automatic  
software package.  
6.2  
RPS and D5200 Handler  
Requirements  
Enable SDI Auto  
In order to program the GV2AUX parameters for the  
control panels, you must use RPS version 3.8 or  
higher and a handler called GV2AUX. To add the  
GV2AUX Handler to your D5200 Programmer, call  
the Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Handler Update  
System at  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Enable Automation software.  
Disable Automation software.  
No  
Changing this item to Yes enables the automation  
address (SDI Address 80).  
(800) 657-4584.  
This handler currently has six sections:  
Baud Rate  
•
•
•
•
SDI Automation  
SDI RPS Parameters  
Enhanced Communications  
Default:  
9600  
Selection:  
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14.4  
K
SDI RPS/Enhanced Communication  
Configuration  
This item determines the baud rate between the  
serial interface module (SIM) and the external  
hardware connected to it. Since the SDI bus  
communicates at 9600 baud, keep this prompt at  
9600 baud. Pressing the [SPACE] bar on the D5200  
toggles through the available options.  
•
•
Miscellaneous  
Cross Point Parameters  
The handler required for these options is GV2AUX  
version 1.0 and above. It is available on the Handler  
Update System at Bosch Security Systems, Inc.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 127  
Parity/Stop  
DTR Control  
Default:  
Selection:  
No/1  
No/1  
Default:  
Selection:  
On  
On  
No/1, No/2, Odd/1, Even/1  
No parity, 1 stop bit  
No parity, 2 stop bits  
Odd parity, 1 stop bit  
Even parity, 1 stop bit  
On, AutoD, Off  
Sets DTR to on (hardware control).  
Sets this to Auto DTR.  
No/2  
AutoD  
Off  
Odd/1  
Sets DTR off (hardware control).  
Even/1  
This item determines how the Data Terminal Ready  
(DTR) Control parameters are defined for the D9133.  
Pressing the [SPACE] bar on the D5200 toggles  
through the available options.  
This prompt addresses two items: parity and the  
number of stop bits. Pressing the [SPACE] bar on the  
D5200 toggles through the available options.  
Status Rate  
9133 Supervision  
Default:  
Selection:  
0
0
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
0 to 255  
Yes or No  
Status information is sent only when  
requested.  
Supervise the serial interface  
module (SIM).  
1 to 255  
Status information is sent at the  
interval programmed.  
No  
Do not supervise the serial interface  
module (SIM).  
This item determines whether the serial interface  
module (SIM) is supervised or not. If the SIM is  
supervised, disconnecting the SIM from the control  
panel creates a Trouble SDI 80 Event and the  
keypad annunciates a trouble tone (if programmed)  
and displays SERVC SDI 80.  
If the Status Rate is set to a value less  
than 10, and 1 to 6 SDI devices are  
connected to the system, the fastest the  
control panel can send the status  
information is in approximately 1 sec. If  
more than six SDI devices are connected  
to the control panel, the fastest the  
control panel can send the information is  
in approximately 1.5 sec to 2 sec.  
Trouble SDI 80 Reports are always sent  
using the account number for Area 1.  
This item determines how often the default status  
information is sent to the serial interface module  
(SIM). The status information includes:  
RTS Control  
Default:  
Selection:  
On  
On  
•
•
The current point status (normal or off-normal),  
On, AutoX, Off, AutoR  
Sets RTS to on (hardware control).  
The control panel’s area status (Master Armed,  
Master Instant Armed, Perimeter Delay Armed,  
Perimeter Instant Armed, Disarmed, Area Entry  
Delay, Perimeter Entry Delay, Area Exit Delay,  
and Perimeter Exit Delay)  
AutoX  
Automatically enables Xon/Xoff  
(software control).  
Off  
Sets RTS off (hardware control).  
Sets this to Auto RTS.  
•
•
The control panel status (AC Fail, Battery  
Missing, AC Restore, Battery Low, and so on)  
AutoR  
Relay status (relay on or relay off)  
This item determines how the Request To Send  
(RTS) Control parameters are defined for the serial  
interface module (SIM). Pressing the [SPACE] bar on  
the D5200 toggles through the available options.  
Entries are in 100 millisecond increments. If a 5 is  
entered, the status information is sent every 500  
milliseconds (or 0.5 sec). An entry of 10 equals 1 sec.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 128  
6.4  
SDI RPS Parameters  
6.4.1 User Interface Modifications for  
COMMAND 43  
Configure remote programming software (RPS)  
parameters when communicating over a private local-  
area network (LAN) or wide-area network (WAN). To  
allow RPS to communicate with a control panel over  
a LAN or WAN, an SDI-Ethernet two-way network  
interface module (NIM) and an RPS (version 3.8 or  
higher) are required. The computer on which RPS is  
installed needs a network card. See your information  
systems administrator for network requirements.  
COMMAND 43 can communicate with RPS by a  
network path. Figure 6 on page 26 shows the  
structure of COMMAND 43.  
Pressing the [ESC] key during the display of  
CONTACT RPS?, ANSWER NOW?, RPS VIA  
PHONE?, or RPS VIA NETWORK? exits the user to  
Idle Text.  
Enable SDI RPS  
This section allows you to:  
•
Define the RPS parameters necessary to  
communicate by an external modem that can be  
connected to a D9133DC Direct Connect  
Programming Module.  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes or No  
Enable RPS sessions over the SDI  
bus.  
•
•
Provide for local programming by a DX4010i or  
D9133DC Serial Interface Module.  
No  
Do not enable RPS sessions over  
the SDI bus.  
Provide remote programming by a Conettix  
DX4020 or D9133TTL-E Ethernet Network  
Interface Module.  
Enable SDI RPS determines if the control panel  
allows RPS communications over the SDI bus. This  
item must be set to Yes if you plan to use the  
external modem configuration, a private LAN or  
WAN, or local RPS programming.  
•
Provide enhanced route paths for event reporting  
through a network using a DX4020 Network  
Interface Module.  
Although not listed in this section, RPS checks for the  
RPS pass code (refer to Section 2.7 RPS Parameters  
on page 32), Datalock Code, and control panel type  
to determine if this RPS session should continue.  
If the reset pin is in the locked position,  
local RPS programming is allowed even  
if this prompt is set to No.  
When Enable SDI RPS is configured to  
allow for local programming, Jumper 8 in  
the SIM must be shorted or closed,  
power must be removed and reapplied  
after changing the address, and a  
standard serial null-modem cable is  
required.  
The RPS via Phone? prompt (Figure 6  
on page 129), if selected, contacts RPS  
by the control panel phone line and not  
the external modem. Users cannot start  
an RPS session by the external modem.  
If you are using an external modem, RPS  
sessions can be started only by  
programming Answer Armed and Answer  
Disarmed (to a value greater than 0) or  
by setting RPS Line Monitor to Yes  
(refer to Section 6.4.2 Using an External  
Modem on page 130).  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 129  
Using this function allows the control panel, after  
Call Back Enabled  
verifying the RPS pass code, to provide an additional  
level of security. Before allowing any upload or  
download, it ends the SDI RPS session and then  
reconnects with RPS using one of the following:  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
When the control panel hears the  
correct RPS password (refer to RPS  
Passcode in Section 2.7 RPS  
Parameters on page 32), it ends the  
SDI RPS session and then  
•
The RPS IP Address (Enable Ext Modem must  
be set to No)  
•
The RPS Dial String (Enable Ext Modem must  
be set to Yes)  
reconnects to RPS using the RPS IP  
Address if Enable Ext Modem is set  
to No.  
Do not enable RPS Call Back when using  
an external modem.  
If Enable Ext Modem is set to Yes,  
the control panel re-establishes  
communication with RPS using the  
RPS Dial String. This ensures that  
the control panel communicates only  
with valid RPS units.  
No  
The SDI RPS session starts  
immediately; no call-back is  
required. The control panel can  
engage in SDI RPS sessions  
regardless of the originating location.  
Figure 6: COMMAND 43 Flow Chart  
1
4
3
6
2
11  
11  
9
9
10  
7
11  
10  
8
5
1 - COMMAND 43  
7 - Begins RPS session over the network  
2 - Contact RPS?  
8 - Seizes phone line and begins RPS session  
3 - RPS via Phone?  
4 - Seizes phone line and calls RPS  
5 - Answer now?  
9 - [PREV]  
10 - [NEXT]  
11 - [ENT]  
6 - RPS by network?  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 130  
RPS IP Address 1  
Default:  
Selection: 0 to 255  
0 to 255  
Enter the first three digits of the IP  
RPS Port Number  
Default: 7700  
0
Selection: 1 to 65535  
This prompt specifies the destination port for  
address. Leading zeros are not  
required.  
outgoing RPS session requests to the IP address  
specified in RPS IP Address #.  
6.4.2 Using an External Modem  
This prompt and the next three prompts determine  
the IP address for RPS.  
Through the use of a standard, off-the-shelf modem  
(capable of communicating at 9600 baud) and a  
D9133DC connected directly to the control panel,  
RPS can communicate with a D9412GV2 or  
D7412GV2 at speeds of up to 9600 baud.  
An IP address has four fields. Each field has a range  
of 0 to 255. For example, an IP address is expressed  
as 110.227.64.190. (Refer to igure 7.) The D5200  
programmer divides the IP Address into four  
programmable fields. Contact your network  
administrator to determine the IP address to which  
the RPS computer is connected.  
Both the U.S.Robotics V.92 56 K Modem  
(model No. 5686, includes V.92 and V.90  
56 K standard technology) and the Best  
Data Smart One V.92/V.44 56 K External  
Data/Fax Modem (model # 56SX-92) are  
recommended for use as external  
igure 7: RPS IP Address Prompts  
modems (connected to the control panel)  
based on compatibility testing by Bosch  
Security Systems, Inc. Other modules  
were not tested or were incompatible.  
110.227.64.190  
RPS IP Address 1  
RPS IP Address 2  
RPS IP Address 3  
RPS IP Address 4  
The seven prompts on page 134 help to configure the  
requirements necessary to connect an external  
modem to a D9412GV2 or D7412GV2 Control Panel  
using a D9133DC. This configuration allows  
communication with RPS at 9600 baud because data  
is routed through the SDI bus.  
Set RPS IP Address to 0 if Enable Ext  
Modem is set to Yes.  
Use a separate phone line if an external  
modem is being connected to the control  
panel by a D9133DC Direct Connect  
Programming Module. If obtaining a  
different phone line from the line used by  
the control panel is impossible, ensure  
that the control panel is wired in front of  
any premises phone and the external  
modem devices so that full line seizure is  
maintained. Also, ensure that the  
RPS IP Address 2  
Default:  
0
Selection:  
0 to 255  
Refer to RPS IP Address 1.  
RPS IP Address 3  
following items are programmed in  
Default:  
0
Section 2.7 RPS Parameters on page 32:  
Selection:  
0 to 255  
•
•
•
•
•
Answer Armed = Blank or 0  
Answer Disarmed = Blank or 0  
RPS Line Monitor = No  
Refer to RPS IP Address 1.  
RPS IP Address 4  
Default:  
0
RPS Call Back = No  
Selection:  
0 to 255  
RPS Phone number = Blank  
Refer to RPS IP Address 1.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 131  
5. Type [A][T][E][0][Enter]. This eliminates echo,  
making all user input from this point forward  
When using an external modem, initialize  
it using the following HyperTerminal  
procedure on your computer. The  
HyperTerminal procedures can vary,  
depending upon the operating system.  
invisible on the screen.  
6. Type [A][T][&][W][0][Enter] to write the  
configuration to modem memory. The modem  
profile is saved to a file upon disconnection or  
power loss.  
The external modem is connected to the D9133DC  
Direct Connect Programming Module that is  
connected to the SDI bus using SDI Address 88.  
Refer to Figure 9 on page 132. A standard serial  
cable is required to connect the D9133DC to the  
external modem.  
1. In Windows®, open the HyperTerminal  
application. Select:  
Programs→Accessories→Communications  
2. Connect the modem to an available COM port.  
3. With the modem connected, select the  
appropriate COM port within HyperTerminal.  
Refer to  
If you are using an external modem for  
RPS communications, the enhanced  
communications and RPS functions using  
a NIM are disabled.  
Figure 8.  
4. Set the baud rate of the modem to 9600.  
For Best Data Smart One V.92:  
Type [A][T][S][3][7][=][9][Enter]  
For US Robotics:  
Type [A][T][&][N][6][Enter]  
For other modems, consult the  
instructions provided with the device for  
the correct text string.  
Figure 8: Com Port Selection within HyperTerminal  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 132  
Figure 9: External Modem Connection  
F01U003643B  
LEDs Off When Normal  
YEL  
D9412GV2  
Charging Status  
SDI Connector  
Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter  
Refer to D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Approved Applications Compliance Guide (P/N: F01U003639___)  
RED Low Battery  
12.1 VDC  
-
For System Wiring Diagram, Issue  
A
Reset Pin  
Disable all except Battery  
Charging and Programming  
Refer to D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Approved Applications Compliance Guide (P/N: F01U003639___)  
For Compatible Smoke Detectors  
10.2 VDC - Battery Load Shed  
PERIPHERAL DEVIC  
ED  
E
CONNECTIONS  
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS  
CLASS TRANSFORMER  
16.5 VAC 40 VA 60 Hz  
Model 1640  
2
The Power Supply provides  
a
maximum of 1.4 Amps for the Control Panel and all  
R
POWER  
+
A
B
Accessory Devices. For System Loading, refer to D9412GV2/D7412GV2  
Operation and Installation Guide (P/N: F01U003641___).  
D
Internally Fused Do not short  
-
Requires Unswitched Outlet  
All external connections except Terminal  
5
(battery positive) are inherently power  
YELLOW  
GREEN  
DATA BUS  
DATA BUS  
Do not share with other equipment  
limited. Requirements for battery standby time might reduce allowable output.  
CAUTION:  
See D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Operation and Installation Guide  
(P/N: F01U003641) for Power Requirements relating to Terminals  
+
AUX POWER  
6
and  
7
.
BATTERY NEGATIVE ONLY  
WARNING!  
B
N
LACK  
.F.P.A.  
COMMON  
CAUTION: Avoid damage to Panel.  
Multi-Battery installation requires  
Model D122 Dual Battery Harness.  
Battery: Replace every  
3
to  
years with Model D126, 12  
Amp Hr Lead Acid Battery  
Do not connect 24  
V
to terminals.  
5
7
V
Maximum charging current 1.4  
BATTERY POSITIVE ONLY  
A
Improper installation can be  
hazard.  
a
fire  
ZONEX OUT  
1
Style 3.5  
Signaling  
Line  
This equipment should be installed in accordance with the NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code)  
PROGRAMMABLE  
ALARM OUTPUTS  
Terminals  
RELAY  
RELAY  
RELAY  
A
B
C
and NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code) for Local, Central Station, Remote Station, Proprietary and  
Household Fire Warning Systems and under the limits of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction  
(National Fire Protection Association, Battermarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269). Printed information  
describing proper installation, operation, testing, maintenance, evacuation planning and repair  
service is to be provided with this equipment.  
C
ircuits  
ZONEX IN  
1
2
6
and  
7
ZONEX OUT  
26  
25  
24  
SWITCHED AUX  
Terminal  
D9412GV2 Control/Communicator is UL Listed For Central Station, Local, Remote Station and  
Household Fire Alarm, and Central Station, Local, Police Station Connect, Household Burglar Alarm  
and Encrypted Line Security when communicating via  
ZONEX IN  
2
+
8
a
network.  
System is intended to be checked by Qualified Technician at least every  
The types of initiating circuits the panel has been approved for are A, M, W, SS.  
a
3
years.  
ZONEX POWER  
COMMON  
VOLTAGE RANGES  
Open  
Normal  
Short  
3.7  
-
-
-
5.0 VDC  
ZONEX COMMON 23  
EARTH GROUND  
2.0  
0.0  
3.0 VDC  
1.3 VDC  
GROUND FAULT DETECT  
Enabled  
Point  
1
Point  
2
Point  
3
Point  
4
Point  
5
Point  
6
Point  
7
Point  
8
Point  
8
D5200  
PROG CON  
S3 Option  
N
Disabled  
Closed  
=
1KW EOL  
ON when  
co mmu nicat ing  
OFF when idle  
PHONE  
LED  
Normal Operation  
RE D  
Open =AB-12 UL  
Bell Box 220 KW  
PH ONE LINE SEIZED  
TIP  
RING  
TELCO CORD  
MODEL D161  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
GRN  
DX4010i  
or  
D9133DC  
1 - PC running Remote Programming Software  
(RPS)  
2 - Modem  
3 - PSTN  
4 - D9412GV2/D7412GV2 Control Panel  
5 - Standard null modem cable  
6 - SDI bus  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 133  
To use an off-the-shelf external modem and a D9133DC serial module to connect to the control  
panel using RPS, use the following settings:  
1. GV2AUX\ENHANCED COMM\Enhanced Comm\No  
2. GV2AUX\SDI RPS PARAMETERS\Enable SDI RPS\Yes  
3. GV2AUX\SDI RPS PARAMETERS\Callback Enabled\No  
4. GV2AUX\SDI RPS PARAMETERS\RPS IP Address 1-4\0  
5. GV2AUX\SDI RPS PARAMETERS\Enable Ext Modem\Yes  
6. GV2AUX\SDI RPS PARAMETERS\Answer Armed\1 to 15  
7. GV2AUX\SDI RPS PARAMETERS\Answer Disarmed\1 to 15  
8. GV2AUX\SDI RPS PARAMETERS\RPS Line Monitor\No  
9. GV2AUX\SDI RPS PARAMETERS\Seize Relay\No  
10. GV2AUX\SDI RPS PARAMETERS\Modem Init String\ATE0  
11. GV2AUX\SDI RPS PARAMETERS\RPS Dial String\ (blank)  
12. GV2AUX\SDIRPS/ENHANCED CONF\Baud Rate\9600  
13. GV2AUX\SDIRPS/ENHANCED CONF\Parity/Stop No\1  
14. GV2AUX\SDIRPS/ENHANCED CONF\RTS Control\ON  
15. GV2AUX\SDIRPS/ENHANCED CONF\DTR Control\ON  
16. GV2AUX\SDIRPS/ENHANCED CONF\9133 Supervision\No  
17. GV2MAIN\PANEL WIDE PARAMETER\Enhanced Routing\RG1 Primary SDI\No  
18. GV2MAIN\PANEL WIDE PARAMETER\Enhanced Routing\RG1 Backup SDI\No  
19. GV2MAIN\PANEL WIDE PARAMETER\Enhanced Routing\RG2 Primary SDI\No  
20. GV2MAIN\PANEL WIDE PARAMETER\Enhanced Routing\RG2 Backup SDI\No  
21. GV2MAIN\PANEL WIDE PARAMETER\Enhanced Routing\RG3 Primary SDI\No  
22. GV2MAIN\PANEL WIDE PARAMETER\Enhanced Routing\RG3 Backup SDI\No  
23. GV2MAIN\PANEL WIDE PARAMETER\Enhanced Routing\RG4 Primary SDI\No  
24. GV2MAIN\PANEL WIDE PARAMETER\Enhanced Routing\RG4 Backup SDI\No  
25. The control panel reset pin can be up or down.  
26. The modem at the control panel location must be set for 9600 baud and echo off. This  
information must be written to the modem configuration area. Hyperterminal can be used to  
send the following Hayes modem commands (refer to the modem’s manual for command  
syntax):  
•
•
•
ATS37=9 (set baud rate to 9600)  
ATE0 (eliminate echo)  
AT&W0 (write configuration to modem memory, not echoed)  
27. Ensure that the modem at RPS is set up for 9600 baud.  
28. From the control panel communication window on RPS, connect by modem at 9600 baud.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 134  
Enable Ext Modem  
RPS Line Monitor  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Default:  
No  
Yes or No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Enable SDI Address 88 for use with  
an external modem.  
Not used. Keep this item set to No.  
Seize Relay  
No  
Disable SDI Address 88 for use with  
an external modem.  
Default:  
No  
Setting this item to Yes instructs the control panel  
that SDI Address 88 is enabled for use with an  
external modem. For further information on Local  
RPS programming, refer to the RPS Installation and  
Operation Guide (P/N: 4998141259).  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Not used. Keep this item set to No.  
Modem Init String  
Default:  
ATE0  
Setting this item to Yes disables  
Enhanced Communication and SDI RPS  
for use over a LAN or WAN.  
Selection:  
A to Z (capital letters only), 0 to 9,  
[SPACE], ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / :  
; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _  
Determines which initialization string the control  
panel sends to the external modem when the control  
panel powers up.  
Answer Armed  
Default:  
Selection:  
0
7
0 to 15  
If special characters are required,  
Modem Init String can be programmed  
successfully only from RPS. The D5200  
Programmer allows only the characters  
shown in the Modem Init String default  
selections.  
No answer when all areas are  
Master Armed.  
0 to 15  
The control panel answers the  
phone after the specified number of  
rings when all areas are Master  
Armed.  
RPS Dial String  
Determines the number of rings after which the  
external modem automatically answers a call if all  
areas are Master Armed.  
Default:  
Selection:  
Not used.  
ATDT  
Not available  
Answer Disarmed  
Default:  
Selection:  
0
7
0 to 15  
No answer when any area is  
Perimeter Armed or Disarmed.  
0 to 15  
The control panel answers the  
phone after the specified number of  
rings when any area is Perimeter  
Armed or Disarmed.  
Determines the number of rings after which the  
external modem automatically answers a call if any  
area is Perimeter Armed or Disarmed.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 135  
If events are to be routed to an SDI Path but not to an  
IP Address, allow the setting for Path # IP Add# to  
remain at 0. Path # Poll Rate, Path # Ack Wait, and  
Path # Retry Count must be programmed.  
6.5  
Programming Path Numbers and  
IP Addresses for Enhanced  
Communications  
Enhanced communications is the ability to  
Path # IP Add1  
communicate by some means other than the  
standard digital dialer. In this section, programmable  
parameters allow you to define up to four separate  
enhanced communication paths to which events can  
be routed. To route an event (such as an Alarm or  
Trouble) to an enhanced communication path,  
additional programming must also be completed in  
Section 2.3 Routing on page 15 and Section 2.4  
Enhanced Routing on page 24.  
Default:  
Selection:  
0 to 255  
0
0 to 255  
Enter the first three digits of the IP  
address. Leading zeros are not  
required.  
If using IP Addresses as the  
communication means for UL 864  
Commercial Fire applications, set Path  
# IP Add 1 through 4 as necessary.  
Enhanced Comm  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Path # IP Add 1 and the next three items determine  
the IP addresses for each of the four enhanced  
communication paths available when using the  
D5200.  
Yes or No  
Enable enhanced communications  
over the SDI bus.  
No  
Do not enable enhanced  
communications over the SDI bus.  
An IP address has four fields. Each field has a range  
of 0 to 255. For example, an IP address is expressed  
as 110.227.64.190. The D5200 programmer splits the  
IP address into four programmable fields (refer to  
Figure 10). Contact your network administrator to  
obtain the appropriate IP Address to contact a central  
station receiver.  
If using IP Addresses as the  
communication means for UL 864  
Commercial Fire applications, set this  
parameter to Yes.  
Determines if the control panel allows enhanced  
communications over the SDI bus.  
Figure 10: Path # IP Add1 to Add4  
• Modem Format must be set to Yes  
110.227.64.190  
when using enhanced communications.  
• Enable Ext Modem must be set to No  
Path # IP Add1  
Path # IP Add2  
Path # IP Add3  
Path # IP Add4  
if enhanced communications are used.  
• Enhanced Comm must be set to No if  
an external modem is used.  
To disable Enhanced Routing completely  
over an SDI path, RG#Primary SDI,  
RG#Backup SDI, and Enhanced Comm  
prompts must all be set to No.  
Path # IP Add2  
Default:  
0
Events can be routed to as many as four available  
enhanced communication paths through the SDI bus.  
If an event (or group of events) is routed to an SDI  
path, the number entered in Primary Device  
determines which SDI path is used (provided that  
RG# Prim, Primary SDI was set to Yes in Routing).  
Selection:  
0 to 255  
Refer to Path 1 IP Add1.  
Path # IP Add3  
Default:  
0
If events are to be routed to an IP address (in a  
private LAN or WAN application), determine which  
path is used (Path 1 to Path 4), and enter the  
appropriate IP Address for that path (refer to Path #  
IP Add1 to Path # IP Add4).  
Selection:  
0 to 255  
Refer to Path 1 IP Add1.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 136  
Path # IP Add4  
If the control panel is programmed to  
send Heartbeat Poll to the central station,  
a rate of 75 sec maintains the virtual link  
in most network configurations.  
Default:  
0
Selection:  
0 to 255  
Decreasing the value for Path # Poll  
Rate increases the amount of idle  
communication between the SDI device  
and the central station receiver.  
Refer to Path 1 IP Add1.  
Path # PortNum  
Increased idle communication between  
the control panel and the receiver  
decreases the control panel’s event  
reporting efficiency.  
Default:  
7700  
Selection:  
1 to 65535  
This prompt specifies the destination port number for  
each of the four enhanced communication route path  
destinations. All four IP address-and-port pairs must  
be unique to ensure that event acknowledgments are  
accounted correctly. Duplicate address-and-port pairs  
are not supported.  
The control panel readjusts the Heartbeat  
Poll rate temporarily to less than 300 sec  
to 300 sec when online with RPS. The  
poll rate returns to the programmed value  
after the RPS session ends.  
Path # Poll Rate  
The value programmed in Path # Poll Rate is the  
interval at which the control panel sends a Heartbeat  
Poll to the central station receiver. The value  
programmed in Path # Ack Wait is the length of time  
the control panel waits for an acknowledgment of a  
Heartbeat poll. If the acknowledgment is not  
received, the control panel checks to determine if the  
Path # Retry Count entry is greater than 0. If so, the  
control panel retries the number of times  
Default:  
Selection:  
0
0
0, 5 to 65535 sec  
Disables the heartbeat poll (not  
recommended, refer to the first  
Important Note that follows).  
5 to 65535  
Enables the poll rate for the amount  
of time programmed here.  
programmed (in Path # Retry Count) to send the  
Heartbeat Poll before declaring the Path failed and  
generating a COMM FAIL SDI ## (Path 1 = SDI 88,  
Path 2 = SDI 89, Path 3 = SDI 90, Path 4 = SDI 91)  
Event.  
This prompt and the next two prompts determine how  
the SDI Path is supervised between the SDI device  
and the central station receiver(s). Do not confuse  
the SDI Path supervision with the supervision of the  
SDI device itself (the connection of the SDI device to  
the control panel). Each SDI Path can be configured  
to transmit a Heartbeat Poll to the central station for  
supervision purposes. This ensures the integrity of  
the connection at all times.  
If Path # Poll Rate is programmed with a value and  
the central station does not acknowledge the poll  
from the control panel, keypads annunciate a trouble  
condition. To send this event to the central station,  
refer to the Comm Fail prompt in Section 2.13.2  
Panel-Wide Relays on page 81.  
If using IP Addresses as the  
communication means for UL 864  
Commercial Fire applications, program  
this parameter as necessary.  
Example of Heartbeat:  
•
•
•
Path # Poll Rate is set to 120 sec  
Path # Ack Wait time is set to 10 sec  
Path # Retry Count is set to 2  
When sending reports to a central station  
receiver over a network path, you must  
set Path # Poll Rate to a non-zero value.  
Failure to program a value into this field  
could prevent a failed network  
communications path from restoring to  
normal.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 137  
When the control panel first powers up, the first Heartbeat Poll for Path 1 is sent and is acknowledged in 1 sec.  
120 sec after the first Heartbeat Poll is sent, the second Heartbeat Poll for Path 1 is generated and sent to the  
central station receiver.  
Figure 11: Poll Rate Timeline  
4
2
5
6
7
3
1
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210  
8
9
1 - Control panel powered up  
2 - Heartbeat Poll sent  
6 - No acknowledgment, Heartbeat re-sent, retry  
#2  
7 - Path declared failed  
8 - 10-sec interval  
3 - Acknowledgment received  
4 - Second Heartbeat Poll sent  
9 - Additional Heartbeats sent every 10 sec until  
acknowledged  
5 - No acknowledgment, Heartbeat re-sent, retry #1  
Example of Retry Count:  
Although RPS and the D5200 allow Path  
# Poll Rate values of 1 to 4, the control  
panel interprets these entries as an entry  
of 5.  
An acknowledgment of the heartbeat was not  
received within 10 sec. The control panel sends the  
next Heartbeat Poll after the first 10-sec ACK wait  
period expires. If the central station does not  
acknowledge this Heartbeat Poll, the control panel  
continues to re-send. When the resend count is  
reached, the control panel declares this path as failed  
(and generates the Comm Fail ## Event). The control  
panel continues to re-send the Heartbeat Poll every  
10 sec until it receives an acknowledgment, even  
after declaring a Comm Fail.  
5 min = 300 sec  
1 hour = 3600 sec  
12 hours = 43,200 sec  
18 hours = 64,800 sec  
Path # Ack Wait  
Default:  
Selection:  
0
13  
When the control panel receives acknowledgment  
from the central station, the control panel returns to  
the normal Poll Rate (which, in this example, is 120  
sec).  
0, 5 sec to 65535 sec  
The control panel does not look for  
any acknowledgment from the  
central station.  
If more than one SDI Path is used, the control panel  
handles them on a successive basis. For example, if  
acknowledgment from SDI Path 1 is not received  
within 10 sec (using the previous example), the  
control panel moves to SDI Path 2 to send its  
Heartbeat Poll (and subsequently waits for the ack)  
before returning to SDI Path 1 to re-send its  
heartbeat.  
5 to 65535  
The control panel waits this amount  
of time to receive an  
acknowledgment from the central  
station.  
Determines how long the control panel waits for an  
acknowledgment from the central station after a  
Heartbeat Poll or an actual event was transmitted.  
This prompt is applicable to SDI transmitted events  
and Heartbeat Polls. Entries are made in one-sec  
increments.  
If Heartbeat Polls are enabled to send by  
an SDI path, and the Path # Ack Wait  
time is exceeded, a COMM TRBL SDI ##  
event occurs. When this condition occurs,  
all events routed to this path go  
immediately to the backup path  
destination.  
If using IP Addresses as the  
communication means for UL 864  
Commercial Fire applications, this  
parameter cannot be zero (0).  
Entries are made in one-sec increments.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 138  
Account Identification  
The D6600 Receiver can identify the network  
Although RPS and the D5200 allow Path  
# Ack Wait values of 1 to 4, the control  
panel interprets these entries as an entry  
of 5.  
accounts by either the IP address or the account  
number received in the message sent from the control  
panel. The account number sent in the message is  
always the account number for Area 1. Although you  
can program up to ten digits for the account number,  
only eight digits are sent in the message to the D6600  
Receiver.  
Path # Retry Count  
Default:  
Selection:  
0
5
0 to 255  
COMM FAIL RG# SDI ### Events  
are not generated.  
6.6  
SDI RPS/Enhanced  
Communications Configuration  
1 to 255  
COMM FAIL RG# SDI ### Events  
are generated after resending  
Heatbeat Poll the number of times  
selected for a given SDI path.  
This section provides the necessary prompts for  
configuring the SDI-Network Interface Module (NIM)  
when using it for SDI RPS or SDI enhanced  
communication applications.  
Determines how many times the control panel  
resends the Heartbeat Poll before declaring a path  
failure and generating a COMM FAIL RG# SDI ###  
(RG # = 1 to 4, SDI ### = 88 for Path 1, 89 for Path 2,  
90 for Path 3, 91 for Path 4) Event.  
Baud Rate  
Default:  
9600  
Selection:  
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14.4 K  
This item determines the communication baud rate for  
the network interface module (NIM). Because the SDI  
bus communicates at 9600 baud, keep this prompt at  
9600 baud. Pressing the [SPACE] bar on the D5200  
toggles through the available options.  
If using IP Addresses as the  
communication means for UL 864  
Commercial Fire applications, program  
this parameter as necessary.  
The default settings meet or exceed the  
UL specifications.  
Do not set this value to any setting other  
than 9600 baud.  
Path # Anti-Replay  
Default:  
No  
Parity/Stop  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Default:  
Selection:  
No/1  
No/1  
Anti-replay is a strategy that counters “replay” attacks.  
This feature prevents a malicious attack that  
substitutes a control panel or another network  
interface module (NIM) from delivering counterfeit  
events over a network in place of events sent by the  
actual control panel. A replay attack occurs when  
someone records a message sent over the network  
by Device A, and replays this message at a later time  
while pretending to be Device A.  
No/1, No/2, Odd/1, Even/1  
No parity, 1 stop bit.  
No parity, 2 stop bits.  
Odd parity, 1 stop bit.  
Even parity, 1 stop bit.  
No/2  
Odd/1  
Even/1  
This prompt addresses two items: parity and the  
number of stop bits for the network interface module  
(NIM). Pressing the [SPACE] bar on the D5200  
toggles through the available options.  
If this function is required, you must also  
enable the Substitution Monitor function  
in the Conettix D6600 Communications  
Receiver/Gateway. Refer to Substitution  
Monitor in the Conettix D6600/D6100  
Receiver Gateway Program Entry Guide  
(P/N: 4998122702) for more details.  
Set this item to No/1 when using the  
External Modem feature.  
Do not set Path # Anti-Replay to Yes if  
Path # Ack Wait is set to zero (0) for the  
same path.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 139  
RTS Control  
Trouble SDI 88 Reports are always  
reported using the account number for  
Area 1.  
Default:  
Selection:  
On  
On  
On, AutoX, Off, AutoR  
Sets RTS to on (hardware control).  
6.7  
Route Group Attempts  
Auto X  
Automatically enables Xon/Xoff  
(software control).  
This section determines how many times a route  
group tries the primary destination before trying the  
backup destination if the primary destination fails.  
This entry applies to both Phone numbers and IP  
addresses.  
Off  
Sets RTS off (hardware control).  
Sets this to Auto RTS.  
Auto R  
Determines how the Request To Send (RTS) control  
parameters are defined for the network interface  
module (NIM). Pressing the [SPACE] bar on the  
D5200 toggles through the available options.  
RG# 1 Attempt  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Set this item to On when using the  
External Modem feature.  
This route group tries the primary  
destination once and, if  
unsuccessful, tries the backup  
destination. The control panel still  
makes a total of ten attempts (five to  
the primary, five to the backup)  
before generating a route group  
Comm Fail Event.  
DTR Control  
Default:  
Selection:  
On  
On  
On, AutoD, Off  
Sets DTR to on (hardware control).  
Sets this to Auto DTR.  
Sets DTR off (hardware control).  
No  
This route group tries the primary  
destination twice and, if  
AutoD  
Off  
unsuccessful, tries the backup  
destination. The control panel makes  
a total of ten attempts (six to the  
primary, four to the backup) before  
generating a route group Comm Fail  
Event.  
Determines how the Data Terminal Ready (DTR)  
control parameters are defined for the network  
interface module (NIM). Pressing the [SPACE] bar on  
the D5200 toggles through the available options.  
6.8  
Miscellaneous  
Set this item to On when using the  
External Modem feature.  
Fire Summary Sustain  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
9133 Supervision  
Forces the Summary Fire relay  
output to remain on after the Alarm  
Silence command.  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
No  
Allows Summary Fire relay output  
to be silent when the Fire Alarm Bell  
output is silenced and all Fire Points  
return to normal.  
Supervise the network interface  
module (NIM).  
No  
Do not supervise the network  
interface module (NIM).  
Use this parameter to set the Summary Fire relay  
output to continue or to stop after the Fire Alarm Bell  
is silenced or times out. Refer to the Summary Fire  
prompt in Section 2.13.2 Panel-Wide Relays on  
page 82.  
This item determines whether the NIM is supervised.  
If the NIM is supervised, disconnecting it from the  
control panel creates a Trouble SDI 88 Event and the  
keypad annunciates a trouble tone and displays  
SERVC SDI 88.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 140  
Fire Supv Res Type  
Early Ambush Timer  
Default:  
Selection:  
0
0
Default:  
10 min  
0, 1, 2  
Selection:  
5 to 30 min  
The control panel sends a FIRE  
TROUBLE RESTORE when a Fire  
Supervision point restores to normal.  
The programmed time is the maximum value of the  
Early Ambush Timer. When Early Ambush is set to  
Yes for a specified area (refer to A# Early Ambush on  
page 48) and the area is disarmed, the user has the  
amount of time programmed here to enter a second  
code into the keypad.  
1
2
The control panel sends a FIRE  
ALARM RESTORE when a Fire  
Supervision point restores to normal.  
If a second pass code is not entered within the  
programmed time, a Duress event is generated based  
on the first user code. Duress reports must be  
enabled in Routing in order to be sent to a central  
station.  
The control panel sends a FIRE  
SUPERVISION RESTORE when a  
Fire Supervision point restores to  
normal.  
Determines how the control panel sends a Fire  
Supervision Restoral Event.  
Secondary Ambush Code  
The Fire Supv Restore Event is part of  
Fire Events in Routing. If Fire Supervision  
Restore Events are needed, simply  
enable them in Routing.  
Default:  
Unique  
Selection: Unique or any  
Unique  
Any  
The code used to end the timer must  
be different from the code used to  
disarm the area.  
Enable Protocol Type  
Default:  
No  
The timer can be stopped using a  
different code, or the same code that  
disarmed the area.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Not required. Leave at default value.  
The Secondary Ambush Code determines whether  
the same pass code can be used to begin and end  
the Early Ambush process.  
Fire Trouble Resound  
Default:  
Selection:  
0
0
Abort Window  
0, 1, 2  
Default:  
30 sec  
Keypads do not re-sound the fire  
trouble tone.  
Selection:  
15 to 45 sec  
1
Keypads re-sound the fire trouble  
tone at 12:00 PM if any Fire point  
that falls within the scope of a  
This parameter determines the amount of time the  
control panel delays a Burglar Alarm event from a  
point with P## Alarm Abort set to Yes. If an alarm  
silence operation is performed before this time  
elapses, the alarm transmission is aborted and the  
keypad shows an optional ALARM NOT SENT  
message. When an alarm transmission is successfully  
aborted, no event is written to the control panel event  
log.  
keypad is in an off-normal condition.  
2
Keypads re-sound the fire trouble  
tone at 12:00 AM if any Fire point  
that falls within the scope of a  
keypad is in an off-normal condition.  
This item determines if a fire trouble condition,  
previously acknowledged and silenced at a keypad,  
automatically (locally) re-sounds the fire trouble tone  
at 12:00 PM, 12:00 AM, or not at all if the point is still  
in an off-normal state. Events are not generated at the  
time the re-sound occurs.  
When an abort alarm timer starts, it does not stop  
until an alarm silence operation is performed or the  
time expires.  
This feature does not apply to Fire Alarms  
or invisible point alarms.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
Abort Window is a required parameter.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 141  
Swinger Count  
To meet UL requirements, the combined  
Entry Delay time and Abort Window time  
must not exceed 60 sec. For Entry Delay  
time programming information, refer to  
P## Entry Delay in the Point Responses  
section of your control panel’s program  
entry guide.  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1, 2, 3, or 4  
1, 2  
Number of fault or trouble bypasses  
allowed per hour for SIA CP-01  
compliance.  
UL note: Maximum settings for  
residential use:  
3
4
Optional fault count  
Exit Delay – 120 sec  
Entry Delay = 45 sec bell  
Off-Premise Transmission = 60 sec  
Value used for backward  
compatibility with previous control  
panel operation.  
When a point has P# Swinger Byps set to Yes, the  
value set in Swinger Count determines the number  
of times the point is faulted erroneously within an hour  
before it is automatically bypassed.  
Maximum settings for commercial use:  
Exit Delay – 120 sec no line security  
Entry Delay = 60 sec bell  
Off-Premise Transmission = 60 sec  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
The system must use both the bell and  
off-premise transmission.  
P## Swinger Byps can be Yes or No.  
If P## Swinger Byps is Yes, Swinger Count must  
be 1 or 2.  
Passcode Length  
Remote Warning  
Default:  
0
Default:  
Yes  
Selection:  
0, 3, 4, 5, or 6  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
0
Sets a variable length for user  
passcodes, allowing for backward  
compatibility  
Yes  
The system uses the Alarm Bell  
output to annunciate the arming and  
disarming of an area through remote  
software, or a remote arming device  
such as a key switch or key fob.  
3, 4, 5,  
or 6  
Sets a fixed length to all user  
passcodes.  
During entry delay, the code is accepted when the  
last digit is pressed to disarm the area.  
No  
No remote warning occurs to  
annunciate the arming and disarming  
of an area through remote software,  
or a remote arming device such as a  
key switch or key fob.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance:  
Passcode Length must be set to 3, 4, 5, or 6.  
Upon remote arming, the output pulses on for 2 sec.  
Upon remote disarming, the output pulses on, off, on,  
off for 2 sec each.  
For SIA CP-01 Compliance  
Remote Warning must be set to Yes.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 142  
6.9  
Cross Point Parameters  
CrystalTime Adj  
This section discusses the requirements necessary to  
program Cross Point functions.  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Use the Cross Point function on non-fire  
points only.  
Yes  
No  
Set the clock time control on the  
control panel to the on-board crystal  
frequency.  
The Cross Point option reduces false alarms. Points  
can be programmed so that the control panel needs  
to see an Alarm condition within a programmed period  
of time (called Cross Point Time) from at least two  
points within a Cross Point Group (Table 43) before  
Cross Point Alarm Events are generated. These  
points must have P## Cross Point set to Yes to  
generate this event.  
Do not set the clock time control on  
the control panel to the on-board  
crystal frequency.  
When set to Yes, the control panel switches its clock  
time control from the traditional AC frequency to the  
on-board crystal frequency. This prompt replaces the  
alternate function that was enabled by setting the  
Silent Alarm Relay for Area 4 to a value of 60.  
There are 31 Cross Point Groups in the D9412GV2  
and ten in the D7412GV2. Each Cross Point Group  
consists of eight points and is identified by the point  
numbers in them (for example, Cross Points 1 to 8,  
Cross Points 9 to 16, and so on). The maximum  
number of points that can be programmed to meet the  
Cross Point criteria is two. Point numbers from  
different Cross Point Groups do not affect each other.  
Refer to Table 43 for a complete listing of Cross  
Points comprising each Cross Point Group.  
Perimeter Relay  
Default:  
No  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
Change the function of the area-wide  
fail-to-close relays to follow the  
perimeter armed states of their  
areas.  
When any point with P## Cross Point set to Yes  
detects an alarm condition, the control panel starts a  
timer as programmed in the Cross Point Time  
No  
The area-wide fail-to-close relay  
operates normally.  
When set to Yes, the A# Fail to Close relay becomes prompt.  
an area-wide perimeter armed relay. This relay is  
If a second Cross Point within the same Cross Point  
activated when all areas assigned to the same relay  
have perimeter points that are armed. This prompt  
replaces the alternate function that was enabled by  
setting the Silent Alarm Relay for Area 7 to a value of  
63.  
Group detects an alarm condition, the control panel  
creates a Cross Point Alarm Event for both points,  
provided both points activate inside the Cross Point  
Window. A Cross Point is considered to be in alarm  
when it meets the criteria for Instant Alarm response.  
The Cross Point index must have P## Pt Response  
set to a value that generates an instant alarm  
response.  
Early Armed Relay  
Default:  
No  
If a single Cross Point detects an alarm and stays  
faulted throughout the duration of the Cross Point  
Window, a standard Alarm Report is generated for  
that point.  
Selection:  
Yes or No  
Yes  
No  
Change activation of Area Armed or  
Perimeter Armed Relay to the  
beginning of the exit delay time.  
Conversely, if a single Cross Point detects an alarm,  
then restores, and no other conditions occur, an  
Unverified Event is generated for that point. A second  
alarm on the first point does not create an Alarm  
Event but rather an Unverified Event.  
Maintain the activation of Area  
Armed or Perimeter Armed Relay at  
the end of the exit delay time.  
When this prompt is set to Yes, the Area Armed or  
Perimeter Armed Relay activates at the beginning of  
the exit delay time. This prompt replaces the alternate  
function that was enabled by setting the Silent Alarm  
Relay for Area 8 to a value of 64.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 6.0 GV2AUX  
EN | 143  
Cross Point Time  
Table 43: Cross Point Ranges Within Groups  
Cross Point  
Default:  
20 sec  
Selection:  
5 sec to 255 sec  
Group  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Point Range  
Select the amount of time (in seconds) that points  
within a Cross Point Group are in alarm before a  
Cross Point event is generated.  
1
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
8
16  
24  
32  
40  
48  
56  
64  
72  
80  
88  
96  
104  
112  
120  
127  
136  
144  
152  
160  
168  
176  
184  
192  
200  
208  
216  
224  
232  
240  
247  
9
17  
25  
33  
41  
49  
57  
65  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
73  
81  
89  
97  
105  
113  
121  
129  
137  
145  
153  
161  
169  
177  
185  
193  
201  
209  
217  
225  
233  
241  
Refer to Section 2.3 Routing on page 15 for  
information about programming the destination (for  
example, the central station) for Unverified Events. An  
Unverified Event does not produce a corresponding  
Restoral Event.  
The Cross Point function applies only to alarm  
conditions. It does not apply to supervisory or trouble  
conditions. Points programmed with point response D  
(Delayed) eventually enter into an alarm condition if  
the area is not disarmed in time.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 7.0 RADXAXS  
EN | 144  
D#CC#Scope  
7.0 RADXAXS  
7.1 Door Profile  
Default:  
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Blank  
Blank, 1 to 8  
This programming category is used to:  
Determines disarming rights. The  
user’s access level and the CC #  
Scope determines which areas are  
disarmed.  
•
•
•
Assign an area that also activates the D9210B  
Assign a point to the door  
Program the door state to change the time when  
the arm state changes  
Blank  
Only the area assigned to the D#  
Entry Area disarms this door.  
•
•
Allow for the Strike relay to activate upon a fire  
alarm  
Enter the keypad number (CC#) which determines  
the scope of the user ID’s disarming rights. Areas  
disarm on the basis of this keypad’s scope and the  
authority level of the user.  
Programming the Interlock point.  
Door #  
D# Custom Function  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Default:  
Selection:  
0
0 (Disabled)  
0, 128-143  
Enter the number of the door you are programming.  
Custom function disabled.  
The D9412GV2 supports up to eight  
doors. The D7412GV2 supports two  
doors.  
128-143  
The custom function number that  
executes upon a valid ID, given the  
appropriate user access level and  
area arm state.  
D# Entry Area #  
You can program a custom function to run at the  
keypad programmed for CC# Scope. This custom  
function activates only for users with an L##  
Function Level? Assignment (refer to Section 2.11  
User Interface on page 76) in which a valid ID can  
execute a custom function during the armed or  
disarmed state. The user number to which the token  
is assigned must have an assigned pass code.  
Default:  
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Blank  
Blank, 1 to 8  
The area assigned to the door  
controller to which the reader allows  
access.  
Blank  
Door controller does not function.  
Assign an area to the door controller. This entry  
allows the D9210B to be polled, activating  
communication to the control panel. This is also the  
area a user exits when initiating an REX.  
If D# Disarm On Open is set to Yes for the same  
door, and L## Function Level? is set to D or C, the  
custom function executes when the door is physically  
opened.  
A user’s access level and the armed state  
of the area determine whether the custom  
function activates. This access level is  
programmed in the L## Function Level?  
prompt. Refer to 2.11 User Interface on  
page 60.  
All SDI devices, regardless of area  
assigned, report to Area 1, Account 1 by  
default upon SDI failure. If a D9210B  
becomes disconnected, an SDI Fail ##  
and a Missing Point ### Event is  
created.  
Table 44 on page 145 shows how this programming  
affects custom function activation.  
If the D9210B is not programmed with a  
D# Entry Area, 9210 NOT READY  
appears at the keypad with this door  
assigned to it when you press the  
[ENTER] key  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 7.0 RADXAXS  
EN | 145  
When assigning Points 1 to 8 (control  
Table 44: Effects of Programming on Custom  
Function Activation  
panel zones), the end-of-line (EOL)  
resistors must be removed from the  
control panel.  
L## Function  
Level?  
M
Custom Function Activation  
Also, do not enable any POPIT points (or  
OctoPOPIT points) sharing the same  
point number as the Door point. Failure  
to do so results in extra point trouble  
conditions upon reboot.  
User token activates the custom  
function assigned to the Door  
Controller only while the entry area  
for the Door Controller is Master  
Armed or Perimeter Armed.  
(Armed)  
D# Interlock Point  
D
User token activates the custom  
function assigned to the Door  
Controller only while the entry area  
for the Door Controller is disarmed.  
(Disarmed)  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 127, 129 to 247  
C
User token activates the custom  
function assigned to the Door  
Controller regardless of the armed  
state of the entry area.  
1 to 127,  
129 to 247  
The point number assigned to the  
Interlock point. Points 128 and 248  
are reserved by the control panel for  
internal use.  
(Armed and  
Disarmed)  
Blank  
User token does not run the custom  
function assigned to the Door  
Controller.  
Blank  
No point number is assigned to the  
Interlock point.  
Enter the interlock point number. This point, when  
faulted, prevents the door controller from allowing  
access upon a valid ID read or door request.  
A user’s security level must have an M,  
P, or D to operate the custom function.  
Do not assign this point to another D# Door Point.  
You can, however, assign it to another controller to  
prevent multiple controllers from activating.  
D# Door Point  
Door points must be programmed as  
Perimeter points. If a 24-hour point type is  
required for the Door point, you can use a  
Perimeter point type with a Point  
Response of 9 to C. Also, the debounce  
count must be set to 4 in Point  
Default:  
Blank  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 to 127, 129 to 247  
1 to 127,  
129 to 247  
The point number assigned to this  
door. Points 128 and 248 are  
reserved by the control panel for  
internal use.  
Assignments.  
The Interlock point is considered in a  
normal state if it is bypassed, swinger  
bypassed, or forced armed. This results in  
normal access even if the door remains  
open.  
Blank  
No point number is assigned to this  
door.  
Enter the point number assigned to this door. This  
point cannot be used for any other point  
assignments.  
Door points must be programmed as  
Perimeter points. If a 24-hour point type  
is required for the Door point, you can  
use a Perimeter point type with a point  
response of 9 to C. Also, the debounce  
count must be set to 4 in Point  
Assignments.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 7.0 RADXAXS  
EN | 146  
D# Auto Door?  
This command unlocks the door  
regardless of the armed state.  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
When the area assigned in D# Entry  
Area # is disarmed, the door is in  
the unlocked state. When that area  
is armed, the door returns to the  
locked state.  
Each fire alarm that is generated causes  
a Door Unlocked – Automatic Event.  
No  
Door state is not affected by the  
armed state of the area.  
D# Disarm on Open?  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
Yes  
Use this program item to automatically unlock the  
door (latched, shunt, and strike) when the entry area  
is disarmed. The door re-locks upon Master or  
Perimeter Arming the area.  
Yes or No  
The area disarms only after the door  
is opened for a user with a valid  
disarm level.  
The unlocked state cannot be overridden  
manually.  
No  
The area disarms whether or not the  
door is opened as soon as a user  
with a valid disarm level presents a  
valid token or card.  
Use this program item to determine if the door needs  
to be physically opened before disarming the area  
upon a valid access request. The user initiating the  
access request needs access levels that allow  
disarming with ID.  
D# Fire Unlock?  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Relay activates and shunt is applied  
for the door contact automatically  
upon a Fire Alarm.  
D# Card Type  
Default:  
0
No  
Door remains in its current mode  
upon a Fire Alarm.  
Selection:  
0 to 3  
0
3
Card format is 26-bit Wiegand.  
Use this program item to activate the relay for the  
door strike and shunt the door zone automatically  
upon a Fire Alarm. This feature overrides a Secure  
Door state, Locked Door state, Auto Door, and an  
Interlock Faulted point. The relay activates for all  
doors with this prompt programmed as Yes when a  
Fire Alarm occurs in any area. Relays that are  
activated by Fire Unlock can be returned to normal  
only through the keypad using the Door Control  
function.  
Do not use. Card format is 37-bit  
fidelity.  
This item must be kept to a value of 0 (26 bit  
Wiegand format).  
Doors that are activated by Fire Unlock  
must be returned to normal using the  
Door Control function on the keypad.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 7.0 RADXAXS  
EN | 147  
D# Buzz Time  
7.2  
Strike Profile  
This programming category is used to create a  
specific door profile for:  
Default:  
Selection:  
Blank  
2 sec  
Blank, 1 sec to 240 sec  
•
•
Strike and shunt times.  
Buzz Time is not programmed for  
this door.  
Extending strike and shunt times if a door is left  
open.  
1 to 240  
The buzzer sounds for the amount  
of time programmed.  
•
Resetting the strike when the door opens.  
Enter the amount of time the buzzer output sounds to  
notify the user that the strike was activated and the  
door is ready to open. The buzzer stops as soon as  
the door is opened.  
Door #  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Enter the door you are programming.  
A separate buzzer is required. Many  
readers have an internal buzzer that is  
not affected by Buzz Time.  
D# Strike Time  
Default:  
Selection:  
Blank  
10 sec  
D# Extend Time  
1 sec to 240 sec  
Default:  
10  
Strike Time is not programmed for  
this door.  
Selection:  
Blank, 1 sec to 30 sec  
1 to 240  
The strike activates for the amount  
of time programmed.  
Enter the amount of time that strike, buzz, and shunt  
activation is prolonged if a door is left open and the  
shunt time expires. At the end of the programmed  
extend time, the buzzer continues to buzz until the  
door closes. If programmed, the point assigned to the  
door indicates a trouble, alarm, or fault at the keypad.  
Enter the amount of time the door controller toggles  
the relay output to activate the door strike. When the  
door strike is activated, the user can open the door.  
The strike activates for a valid token, RTE, REX, and  
the keypad CYCLE DOOR? function.  
The CLOSE DOOR # display on keypad  
does not activate if no time (blank) is  
programmed.  
D# Shunt Time  
Default:  
Selection:  
Blank  
10 sec  
Blank, 1 sec to 240 sec  
Regardless of how the Door point is  
programmed, the system generates a  
Trouble Door Left Open Event while the  
system is disarmed, and an Alarm Door  
Left Open Event if the system is armed  
and the door is held open beyond Extend  
Time. Door Closed - Restoral Events are  
generated after the door is held open  
past Extend Time and the door returns to  
normal.  
Shunt Time is not programmed for  
this door.  
1 to 240  
The shunt activates for the amount  
of time programmed.  
Enter the amount of time that the Door point is  
shunted to allow a user to open the door. The  
duration of time should be sufficient so that the  
opened door does not cause the point to enter into a  
trouble, alarm, or faulted condition.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 7.0 RADXAXS  
EN | 148  
D# Deact On Open?  
D# REXShunt Only?  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
Yes  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Yes or No  
Strike deactivates when the door is  
opened after a valid Access Granted  
request.  
Programmed shunt time activates  
so the door can be manually  
opened.  
No  
Strike remains activated for the  
amount of the programmed strike  
time whether door is opened or  
closed.  
No  
REX automatically activates the  
programmed strike and shunt time.  
Use this program item to disable the door strike, but  
activate the programmed D# Shunt Time upon a  
request to exit (REX) from an area.  
Determines if the strike deactivates immediately upon  
physically opening the door.  
Use this parameter when a user can  
open a door manually without relying on  
a token or card to activate the strike  
(such as with a push bar).  
In order for this function to work, a point  
needs to be assigned to the door.  
When REXShunt Only is Yes, REX  
Events are not logged, reported, or  
printed.  
To Reduce False Alarms, maintain D#  
Deact on Open? as the default (Yes).  
This helps prevent the door from  
bouncing open and causing a false  
alarm.  
7.3  
Event Profile  
This programming category is used to determine if  
events are created for:  
D# RTE Shunt Only?  
•
•
•
Access Granted and Access Denied  
Door Requests  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Door state changes due to manual (keypad) or  
automatic scheduled or armed state changes  
(skeds/hold open on disarm, normal on armed)  
operation.  
Programmed shunt time activates  
so door can be manually opened.  
No  
RTE automatically activates the  
programmed strike and shunt time.  
Door #  
Use this program item to disable the strike, but still  
activate the programmed shunt time at a Request to  
Enter (RTE) area.  
Default:  
1
Selection:  
1 to 8  
Use this parameter when a user can  
open a door manually without relying on  
a token or card to activate the strike  
(such as with a push bar).  
Enter the door you plan to program.  
RTE Events require Access Granted to  
be programmed as Yes.  
When RTE Shunt Only is Yes, RTE  
Events are not logged, reported, or  
printed.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 7.0 RADXAXS  
EN | 149  
D# Enter Request?  
D# Access Granted?  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Yes or No  
A Door RTE Event from this door  
controller is sent to the control panel  
for processing.  
Access Events from this door  
controller are sent to the control  
panel for processing.  
No  
A Door RTE Event from this door  
controller is not sent to the control  
panel for processing.  
No  
Access Events from this door  
controller are not sent to the control  
panel for processing.  
This program item determines if RTE Events are sent  
to the control panel for processing memory, printing,  
and remote reporting.  
This program item determines if Access Granted and  
Door Request Events are sent to the control panel for  
processing memory, printing, and remote reporting.  
A successful Access Event can be  
started by a(n):  
RTE Events require D# Access Granted  
to be programmed as Yes.  
•
•
Valid user ID  
Valid door state changed at the  
keypad.  
D# Exit Request?  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
•
•
Automatically scheduled or armed  
state change that holds a door open  
Yes or No  
A Door REX Event from this door  
controller is sent to the control panel  
for processing.  
RTE or REX.  
D# No Entry?  
No  
A Door REX Event from this door  
controller is not sent to the control  
panel for processing.  
Default:  
Selection:  
Yes  
No  
Yes or No  
Access Denied Events from this  
door controller are sent to the  
control panel for processing.  
This program item determines if REX Events are sent  
to the control panel for processing memory, printing,  
and remote reporting.  
No  
Access Denied Events from this  
door controller are not sent to the  
control panel for processing.  
REX Events require D# Access Granted  
to be programmed as Yes.  
This program item determines if No Entry Events are  
sent to the control panel for processing memory,  
printing, and remote reporting.  
A No Entry Event can be caused by:  
•
Invalid or unknown user ID, interlock  
or secured door, or incorrect authority  
level  
•
•
RTE or REX at an interlocked door.  
RTE or REX at a door in the secured  
mode.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | 8.0 SIA CP-01 Quick Reference  
EN | 150  
8.0 SIA CP-01 Quick Reference  
Table 45: Programming the Control Panels for SIA CP--01 Compliance  
Prompt Name  
Bosch Recommended Settings  
for SIA CP-01 Compliance  
Shipping Default  
References  
Phone #  
(Prefix backup phone number with  
Call Waiting disable command)  
{Blank}  
Page 11  
Duress Type  
Option 3  
0 (disabled)  
Page 35  
Page 36  
Page 38  
Page 39  
Page 49  
Page 49  
Page 47  
Page 48  
Page 49  
Page 50  
Page 42  
Page 79  
Page 54  
Page 54  
Page 56  
Page 56  
Page 61  
Page 61  
Page 75  
Page 67  
Page 75  
Page 94  
Page 102  
Page 140  
Page 141  
Page 141  
Page 141  
Page 143  
Page 100  
Cancel Report  
Yes  
Yes  
A# Exit Dly Time  
A# Duress Enable  
A# Exit Restart  
A# Arm No Exit  
A# Two Man Rule  
A# Early Ambush  
A# Exit Warning  
A# Entry Warning  
A# Burg Time1  
45 sec to 255 sec  
Yes  
60 sec  
No  
Yes or No  
Yes or No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
6 min to 90 min  
1 to 128(64), A, B, C  
Yes or No  
Yes or No  
Yes or No  
Yes or No  
{Blank}  
6 min  
A# Alarm Bell  
A (on-board alarm output)  
CC# Entry Tone  
CC# Exit Tone  
Yes  
Yes  
CC# Abort Display  
CC# Cancel Display  
Master Arm Inst  
Perim Instant  
Yes  
Yes  
{Blank}  
{Blank}  
E2  
E2  
E2  
{Blank}  
L## Send Duress  
L## Disarm  
[Blank] or E  
[Blank] or E  
[Blank] or E  
30 sec to 240 sec  
Yes or No  
15 sec to 45 sec  
3 to 6 digits  
1 to 2 trips  
Yes  
L## Passcode Disarm  
P## Entry Delay  
P## Alarm Abort  
Abort Window  
30 sec  
Yes3  
30 sec  
Disabled  
1 trip  
Yes  
Passcode Length  
Swinger Count  
Remote Warning  
Cross Point Time  
P## Cross Point  
5 to 255 sec  
Yes or No  
20 sec  
No  
1
2
3
The SIA allowed range is 1 min to 90 min.  
L14 is the default duress user index.  
The default for P## Alarm Abort is No for P3, P4, P5, and P22.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | Programming Prompts Directory  
EN | 151  
Programming Prompts Directory  
GV2MAIN ........................................................ 11  
Phone ....................................................... 11  
Phone 1 ............................................. 11  
Phone 2 ............................................. 12  
Phone 3 ............................................. 12  
Phone 4 ............................................. 12  
Phone Parameters................................... 12  
Modem Format................................... 12  
Point/User Flag .................................. 13  
DTMF Dialing..................................... 14  
Phone Supv Time .............................. 14  
Alarm On Fail..................................... 14  
Buzz on Fail....................................... 15  
Two Phone Lines ............................... 15  
BFSK Duress Code............................ 15  
Expand Test Rpt ................................ 15  
Routing..................................................... 15  
Dialing Attempts..................................... 16  
Route # .............................................. 17  
R# Primary Device............................. 17  
R# Backup Device ............................. 17  
View Events?..................................... 17  
Fire Reports................................. 18  
AC Fail/Res Rpt..................................29  
AC Tag Along.....................................30  
AC/Battery Buzz.................................30  
Bat Fail/Res Rpt .................................30  
Printer Parameters ..................................30  
Printer Address...................................30  
P### Area Assign.............................103  
P## Supervised..................................31  
P## Scope..........................................31  
P## A1 [through A8] in Scope......31  
P## Fire Events..................................32  
P## Burglar Event ..............................32  
P## Access Event ..............................32  
P## User Event ..................................32  
P## Test Event...................................32  
P## Diag Event ..................................32  
P## Auto Functions Event..................32  
P## RPS Event ..................................32  
P## Relay Event.................................32  
P## Point Event..................................32  
P## Usr Chng Evt...............................32  
RPS Parameters.......................................32  
RPS Callback Reports ...........................33  
RPS Passcode ...................................33  
Log % Full ..........................................33  
RPS Call Back....................................34  
RPS Line Monitor ...............................34  
Answer Armed....................................34  
Answer Disarmed...............................34  
RPS Ph ..............................................35  
Miscellaneous..........................................35  
Duress Type.......................................35  
Cancel Report ....................................36  
Area Parameters......................................36  
Area Parameters....................................36  
Area ...................................................36  
A# Area On ........................................36  
A# Acct Number .................................36  
A# FA Bypass Max.............................38  
A# Delay Res .....................................38  
A# Exit Tone.......................................38  
Burglar Reports ........................... 18  
User Reports ............................... 19  
Test Reports................................ 14  
Diag Reports ............................... 20  
Relay Reports.............................. 21  
AutoFunc Reports........................ 21  
RPS Reports ............................... 21  
Point Reports............................... 22  
User Chng Reports...................... 23  
Access Reports ........................... 23  
Enhanced Routing .................................. 24  
Programming a Duplicate Report .......... 24  
RG# Primary SDI ............................... 25  
RG# Backup SDI................................ 25  
RG# Primary Pager............................ 25  
Power Supervision.................................. 28  
AC Fail Time...................................... 28  
AC Fail Display .................................. 29  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | Programming Prompts Directory  
EN | 152  
A# Exit Dly Time ................................ 38  
A# Auto Watch................................... 38  
A# Verify Time ................................... 38  
A# Duress Enable.............................. 39  
A# Area Type..................................... 40  
Bell Parameters ..................................... 41  
Area................................................... 42  
A# Fire Time ...................................... 42  
A# Fire Pat......................................... 42  
A# Burg Time..................................... 42  
A# Burg Pat ....................................... 42  
A# Single Ring................................... 43  
A# Bell Test ....................................... 43  
Open/Close Options .............................. 43  
Area................................................... 44  
A# Acct O/C....................................... 44  
A# Area O/C ...................................... 45  
A# Disable O/C in Window................. 45  
A# Auto Close.................................... 45  
A# Fail to Open.................................. 45  
A# Fail to Close.................................. 46  
A# Restrictd O/C................................ 46  
A# Perimeter O/C............................... 47  
A# Latest Close Time......................... 44  
Arming Features .................................... 47  
Two Man Rule.................................... 44  
A# Early Ambush ............................... 48  
A# Exit Restart................................... 49  
A# Arm No Exit .................................. 49  
A# Exit Warning ................................. 49  
A# Entry Warning............................... 50  
Keypad (Command Center) ................... 51  
Keypad (Command Center) Assignment51  
Cmd Center ...................................... 51  
CC# Supervised................................. 51  
CC# Area Assign ............................... 52  
CC# Scope ........................................ 52  
CC# A1[through A8] in Scope...... 52  
CC# Exit Tone....................................54  
CC# Arm Now Warn...........................54  
CC# Close Door .................................55  
CC# EnhancCmdCtr...........................55  
CC# Passcode Follows Scope ...........55  
CC# Menu Key Lock ..........................56  
CC# Abort Display..............................56  
CC# Cancel Display ...........................56  
CC# Scroll Lock..................................56  
Area Text................................................57  
Area ...................................................57  
Area# Is On........................................57  
Area# Not Ready................................57  
Area# Is Off........................................57  
Area# Acct Is On ................................57  
Custom Function....................................57  
Custom Function ................................58  
CF### Text ........................................58  
CF### Key Strokes ............................58  
User Interface...........................................60  
Keypad Selections .................................60  
Master Arm Delay...............................61  
Mstr Arm Inst......................................61  
Perim Instant......................................61  
Perim Delay........................................61  
Watch Mode.......................................61  
Perim Partial.......................................62  
View Area Stat....................................62  
View Memory .....................................62  
View Pt Status....................................62  
Walk Test ...........................................62  
Fire Test.............................................62  
Send Report.......................................63  
Access Control Functions ......................63  
Door Control.......................................63  
Access Ctl Level.................................63  
Chg Display........................................63  
Chg Time/Date ...................................63  
Chg Passcode....................................63  
Add User ............................................64  
Del User .............................................64  
Extend Close......................................64  
View Log ............................................64  
CC# Entr Key Rly............................... 52  
CC# Entr Cycl Dr ............................... 53  
CC# Assign Door ............................... 53  
CC# Trouble Tone ............................. 54  
CC# Entry Tone ................................. 54  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | Programming Prompts Directory  
EN | 153  
Print Log ............................................ 64  
User Cmd 7........................................ 64  
User Cmd 9........................................ 65  
Bypass a Pt........................................ 65  
Unbypass a Pt.................................... 65  
Reset Sensors ................................... 65  
Change Relay.................................... 65  
Remote Program................................ 65  
Move to Area ..................................... 66  
Display Rev........................................ 66  
Service Walk...................................... 66  
Default Text ....................................... 66  
Change Skeds ................................... 66  
Invisible Walk Test............................ 66  
C Function 128 [through 143]............. 67  
Authority Level Selections ..................... 67  
Authority Level................................... 67  
L## Disarm ........................................ 67  
L## Master Arm Delay ....................... 68  
Mstr Arm Inst ..................................... 68  
L## Perim Instant............................... 68  
L## Perim Delay ................................ 68  
L## Watch Mode................................ 68  
L## Perim Partial ............................... 68  
L## View Area Stat ............................ 68  
L## View Memory .............................. 69  
L## View Pt Status............................. 69  
L## Walk Test.................................... 69  
L## Fire Test...................................... 69  
L## Send Report................................ 70  
L## Door Control................................ 70  
L## Cycle Door............................ 70  
L## User Cmd 7 .................................72  
L## User Cmd 9 .................................72  
L## Bypass a Pt .................................72  
L## Unbypass a Pt.............................73  
L## Reset Sensors.............................73  
L## Change Relay..............................73  
L## Remote Program.........................73  
L## Move to Area...............................73  
L## Display Rev .................................73  
L## Service Walk ...............................74  
L## Default Text.................................74  
L## Change Skeds.............................74  
L## Function Level.............................76  
Custom Functions ..................................75  
L## C Function 128 [through 143] ......75  
L## Force Arm....................................75  
L## Area O/C .....................................75  
L## Restricted O/C.............................75  
L## Perimeter O/C .............................75  
L## Send Duress................................75  
L## Passcode Arm.............................75  
L## Passcode Disarm ........................75  
L## Security Level..............................76  
L## Disarm Level ...............................76  
L## Function Level.............................76  
Function List............................................77  
Menu Item ..........................................77  
M## Function .....................................77  
M## CC Address 1 [through 8]...........78  
Relay Parameters ....................................78  
Area Relays............................................79  
Area ...................................................79  
A# Alarm Bell .....................................79  
A# Fire Bell.........................................79  
A# Reset Sensors ..............................79  
A# Fail to Close..................................80  
A# Force Armed .................................80  
A# Watch Mode..................................80  
A# Area Armed...................................80  
A# Area Fault .....................................80  
A# Duress Relay ................................81  
A# Perim Fault....................................81  
A# Silent Alarm...................................81  
L## Unlock Door.......................... 70  
L## Secure Door ......................... 70  
L## Access Ctl Lvl ............................. 71  
L## Chg Display................................. 71  
L## Chg Time/Date............................ 71  
L## Chg Passcode............................. 71  
L## Add User..................................... 71  
L## Del User...................................... 72  
L## Extend Close............................... 72  
L## View Log..................................... 72  
L## Print Log ..................................... 72  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | Programming Prompts Directory  
EN | 154  
Panel-Wide Relays ................................ 81  
AC Failure.......................................... 81  
Battery Trouble .................................. 82  
Phone Fail.......................................... 82  
Comm Fail ......................................... 82  
Log % Full.......................................... 82  
Summary Fire .................................... 82  
Summary Alarm ................................. 82  
Summary Fire Tbl .............................. 82  
Summary SupFire.............................. 82  
Summary Trouble .............................. 83  
Summary SupBurg............................. 83  
RADXUSR1/RADXUSR2................................ 84  
Pass Code or Token Worksheet............ 84  
Reporting and Logging .......................... 85  
User ###............................................ 85  
U### Passcode.................................. 86  
U### User Group............................... 86  
U### Area 1 [through Area 8] Auth.... 86  
U### Name........................................ 87  
U### Mstr Site ................................... 87  
U### Mstr Crd Data........................... 87  
U### SU1 through SU3 Site .............. 87  
U### SU1 through SU3 C/D .............. 87  
RADXPNTS..................................................... 88  
Point Index............................................... 88  
Point Index......................................... 88  
P## Type ........................................... 88  
Point Responses.................................... 92  
P## Pt Response............................... 93  
P## Entry Delay................................. 94  
P## Ent Tone Off ............................... 94  
P## Silent Bell ................................... 94  
P## Ring Til Rst................................. 95  
P## Audible After 2 Failures .............. 95  
P## Invisible Pt .................................. 95  
P## Buzz On Fault............................. 96  
P## Watch Point ................................ 96  
P## RlyResp Type............................. 97  
P## Disp as Dvc ................................ 97  
P## Local While Disarmed................. 97  
P## Local While Armed ..................... 98  
P## Disable Rst................................. 98  
P## FA Retrnable...............................98  
P## BP Retrnable...............................99  
P## Bypassable .................................99  
P## Swinger Byps............................100  
P## Report Bypass at Occurrence ...100  
P## Defer BP Report........................100  
P## Cross Point ...............................100  
P## Fire Point ..................................101  
P## Alarm Verify ..............................101  
P## Resettable.................................101  
P## Alarm Abort...............................102  
Point Assignments................................102  
Point Number ...................................102  
P### Point Index..............................102  
P### Area Assign.............................103  
P### Debounce................................103  
P### BFSK/Relay ............................103  
P### Point Text................................104  
COMMAND 7 and COMMAND 9............104  
CMD7 Point Index ............................104  
CMD7 BFSK/Relay...........................104  
CMD7 Point Text..............................104  
CMD9 Point Index ............................105  
CMD9 BFSK/Relay...........................105  
CMD9 Point Text..............................105  
RADXSKED...................................................106  
Windows.................................................106  
Opening and Closing............................106  
Window ............................................106  
W# Sunday.......................................106  
W# Monday......................................107  
W# Tuesday.....................................107  
W# Wednesday................................107  
W# Thursday....................................107  
W# Friday.........................................107  
W# Saturday ....................................107  
W# Open Early Begin.......................107  
W# Open Window Start....................108  
W# Open Window Stop....................108  
W# Close Early Begin ......................109  
W# Close Window Start....................110  
W# Close Window Stop....................110  
W# Xept Holiday...............................111  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | Programming Prompts Directory  
EN | 155  
W# Holiday 1 ................................... 111  
W# Holiday 2 ................................... 111  
W# Holiday 3 ................................... 111  
W# Holiday 4 ................................... 111  
W# Area 1 [through 8]...................... 111  
User Group Windows........................... 113  
User Windows #............................... 113  
UW# User Group ............................. 113  
UW# Sunday.................................... 114  
UW# Monday................................... 114  
UW# Tuesday.................................. 114  
UW# Wednesday............................. 114  
UW# Thursday................................. 114  
UW# Friday...................................... 114  
UW# Saturday.................................. 114  
UW# Group Enable.......................... 114  
UW# Group Disable......................... 114  
UW# Xept Holiday............................ 115  
UW# Holiday 1 [through 4]............... 115  
Skeds...................................................... 115  
Sked Number................................... 115  
S## TimeEdit ................................... 115  
S## Function Code .......................... 116  
S## Area 1[through 8] ............... 116  
S## Area 1[through 8] ............... 116  
S## Point Number ..................... 116  
S## Point Number ..................... 116  
S## Area 1[through 8] ............... 117  
S## Relay Number .................... 117  
S## Relay Number .................... 117  
S## Defer Test .......................... 118  
S## Hourly Report..................... 118  
S## Defer Status ....................... 118  
S## Cmd Center........................ 119  
S## Custom Func...................... 119  
S## Cmd Center 1[through 8].... 120  
S## Access Ctl Level #.............. 120  
S## Access Ctl Level#............... 120  
S## Door 1 [through 8] .............. 121  
S## Door 1 [through 8] .............. 121  
S## Door 1 [through 8] .............. 121  
S## Door 1 [through 8] .............. 122  
S## Door 1 [through 8] .............. 122  
S## Door 1 [through 8]...............122  
S## Time..........................................123  
S## Date ..........................................123  
S## Sunday......................................123  
S## Monday.....................................123  
S## Tuesday....................................123  
S## Wednesday...............................123  
S## Thursday...................................123  
S## Friday........................................123  
S## Saturday ...................................123  
S## Xept Holiday..............................124  
S## Holiday 1...................................124  
S## Holiday 2...................................124  
S## Holiday 3...................................124  
S## Holiday 4...................................124  
Holiday Indexes .....................................124  
Add/Change/Delete..............................124  
Date .................................................124  
Holiday Index 1.................................124  
Holiday Index 2.................................124  
Holiday Index 3.................................125  
Holiday Index 4.................................125  
View Holidays.......................................125  
Index 1 Days ....................................125  
Index 2 Days ....................................125  
Index 3 Days ....................................125  
Index 4 Days ....................................125  
GV2AUX .......................................................126  
SDI Automation.....................................126  
Enable SDI Auto...............................126  
Baud Rate ........................................126  
Parity/Stop........................................127  
9133 Supervision..............................127  
RTS Control .....................................127  
DTR Control .....................................127  
Status Rate ......................................127  
SDI RPS Parameters.............................128  
User Interface Modifications for COMMAND 43  
.............................................................128  
Enable SDI RPS...............................128  
Call Back Enabled............................129  
RPS IP Address 1 ............................130  
RPS IP Address 2 ............................130  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | Programming Prompts Directory  
EN | 156  
RPS IP Address 3............................ 130  
RPS IP Address 4............................ 130  
RPS Port Number ............................ 130  
Using an External Modem ................... 130  
Enable Ext Modem........................... 134  
Answer Armed ................................. 134  
Answer Disarmed............................. 134  
RPS Line Monitor............................. 134  
Seize Relay...................................... 134  
Modem Init String............................. 134  
RPS Dial String................................ 134  
Perimeter Relay................................142  
Early Armed Relay ...........................142  
Cross Point Parameters........................142  
Cross Point Time..............................143  
RADXAXS......................................................144  
Door Profile............................................144  
Door # ..............................................144  
D# Entry Area #................................144  
D#CC#Scope ...................................144  
D# Custom Function.........................144  
D# Door Point...................................145  
D# Interlock Point.............................145  
D# Auto Door? .................................146  
D# Fire Unlock?................................146  
D# Disarm on Open?........................146  
D# Card Type...................................146  
Strike Profile ..........................................147  
Door # ..............................................147  
D# Strike Time..................................147  
D# Shunt Time .................................147  
D# Buzz Time...................................147  
D# Extend Time................................147  
D# Deact On Open?.........................148  
D# RTE Shunt Only?........................148  
D# REXShunt Only?.........................148  
Event Profile...........................................148  
Door # ..............................................148  
D# Access Granted? ........................149  
D# No Entry?....................................149  
D# Enter Request?...........................149  
D# Exit Request? .............................149  
Programming Path Numbers and IP  
Addresses for Enhanced Communications  
................................................................ 135  
Enhanced Comm ............................. 135  
Path # IP Add1................................. 135  
Path # IP Add2................................. 135  
Path # IP Add3................................. 135  
Path # IP Add4................................. 136  
Path # PortNum ............................... 136  
Path # Poll Rate............................... 136  
Path # Ack Wait ............................... 137  
Path # Retry Count .......................... 138  
Path # Anti-Replay........................... 138  
SDI RPS/Enhanced Communications  
Configuration.............................................. 138  
Baud Rate........................................ 138  
Parity/Stop ....................................... 138  
RTS Control..................................... 139  
DTR Control..................................... 139  
9133 Supervision ............................. 139  
Route Group Attempts......................... 139  
RG# 1 Attempt ................................. 139  
Miscellaneous....................................... 139  
Fire Supv Res Type ......................... 140  
Enable Protocol Type....................... 140  
Fire Trouble Resound ...................... 140  
Early Ambush Timer ........................ 140  
Secondary Ambush Code ................ 140  
Abort Window .................................. 140  
Passcode Length ............................. 141  
Swinger Count ................................. 141  
Remote Warning.............................. 141  
CrystalTime Adj................................ 142  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D9412GV2/D7412GV2 | Program Entry Guide | Programming Prompts Directory  
EN | 157  
Notes  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 10/08 | F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.  
130 Perinton Parkway  
Fairport, NY 14450-9199  
(800) 289-0096  
© 2008 Bosch Security Systems, Inc.  
F01U003636-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Belkin Network Router F5D8235 4 User Manual
Black Decker Work Light 84 011 User Manual
Bosch Appliances Electric Pressure Cooker HBN 13120 A User Manual
Bosch Appliances Home Security System LTC 8016 90 User Manual
Bose Headphones Acoustic Noise Cancelling Headset User Manual
Broil King Griddle USG 10 User Manual
Casio Calculator PV S460 PV S660 User Manual
Cerwin Vega Microphone T 680 User Manual
Chicago Electric Saw 94245 User Manual
Cisco Systems IP Phone OL 11528 01 User Manual